Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
Introduction
Safety
System Description
Delivery Specification
Technical Data
Operating Instruction
Maintenance Instructions
Trouble Shooting
Contact List
Rolls-Royce Icon(TM)
Dynamic Positioning System Class 2
Project id
Vessel
Project name
Yard/Hull
Order no.
Document no.
Revision
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
110735
PSV/UT755LC
Simek, 115 (+repeats)
10 Spare parts
11 Tools
CAA-110735-01MU
A
12 Design drawings
13 Revision
14 Subsuppliers manuals
1
Introduction
1
Purpose .....................................................................................................1-3
Contents ....................................................................................................1-3
References ................................................................................................1-5
Introduction
1 Purpose
The purpose of the Icon User Manual is to provide the necessary information to plan and
perform a safe and correct operation of the installed system, as well as under-standing
the basic functionality of the equipment. The User Manual covers both operational and
technical aspects of the system.
The personnel involved in using the system must have relevant experience and training
with regards to the use of such systems.
2 Contents
This manual contains the following chapters:
Chapter
Contents
1. Introduction
This chapter specifies the purpose and target groups for the
manual. It also contains list of used abbreviations and a
specification of the document conventions.
2. Safety
3. System Description
4. Delivery Specification
5. Technical Data
6. Operating Instructions
7. Maintenance Instructions
8. Trouble Shooting
9. Contact List
11. Tools
13. Revision
This chapter contains the revision history for the total binder,
including a listing of contained documents.
3 Target Groups
The User Manual is primarily intended for the user of the system. The user must be
properly trained in using and maintaining the system.
Page 1-3 of 6
Introduction
Page 1-4 of 6
Description
AC, DC
AI, AO
Az
Azimuth
BASE-T
CAA
Control - Aalesund
CAN-bus
CB
Circuit Breaker
NC
Normally Closed
CPP
CTE
CW, CCW
Clockwise, Counter-clockwise
DGPS
DI, DO
DP
Dynamic Positioning
DPC
ETA
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
FAT
FWD, BWD
Forward, Backward
GNSS
GSN
GUI
HAT
HDG
Heading
HDOP
Heave
H/W, S/W
Hardware, Software
HUD
Head-up Display
IBS
I/O
Input/Output
IMO
IOC
JS
Joystick System
LAN
LED
MultiMode, MM
NMEA
MP
Main Propeller
N/A
Not Applicable
NO
Normally Open
Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc
Introduction
Abbreviation or term
Description
Outstation
An outstation provides the interface necessary for the interconnection between the control system and the equipment to be
controlled/monitored (i.e. thruster or switchboard/PMS)
Pitch
The motion of a ship about her transverse axis. This causes the
forward and aft ends of the ship to rise and fall repeatedly.
Pitch is also used as denomination for the angle of the propeller
blades.
PMS
RPM
Roll
The motion of a ship about her longitudinal axis. This causes the
ship to rock from side to side.
RRM
Rolls-Royce Marine
RRMC
RSG
SAT
SB, SWBD
Switchboard
Stbd, Pt
Starboard, Port
S-FTP
SP
Setpoint
ST
STP
Surge
Alongship movement
Sway
Athwartship movement
THR
Thruster system
VRU
WP
Waypoint
XTE
Yaw
5 References
References to delivery specific documents are only shown as suffixes in this document.
The document ID syntax is:
CAA-<Project Number>- <Suffix>
See front page of this manual for the delivery specific project number. It is also specified
on the attached lists and drawings to this manual.
Type
Suffix
Description
Drawings
01DC
Cable Diagram
0xDW
Wiring Diagram
01DM
Mechanical Drawing
01DL
Layout Drawing
01LI
01LC
Cable List
01LF
Fuse List
Listings
Page 1-5 of 6
Introduction
Type
Documents
Suffix
Description
01LN
Network List
01TS
01TF
nnMI
Installation Manual *)
nnMU
User Manual *)
nnMX
For Installation and User Manuals, the initial two digits specifies the Chapter No.
Page 1-6 of 6
Safety
Introduction ...............................................................................................2-3
Disclaimer .................................................................................................2-3
Safety
1 Introduction
This chapter provides information regarding safety measures that must be taken to
prevent injury to people and damage of equipment.
Whoever is responsible for the installation, operation or maintenance of this RollsRoyce system, is obliged to read this chapter and fully understand its content before any
installation, operation or maintenance of the system may take place.
2 Disclaimer
Undertaking any work envisaged by this document may either directly or indirectly
create risks to the safety and health of the person undertaking the work or the product
and/or its components while the work is being performed.
It is the responsibility of the user to protect the health and safety of the persons
undertaking the work as well as risk to the product and/or its components. Therefore the
user must ensure that appropriate controls and precautions are identified and taken in
relation to the work envisaged by this document in accordance with the relevant
statutory and legal and industrial requirements.
Neither this document, nor its use, in any way absolves the user from the responsibility
to ensure that the controls and precautions referred to above are implemented.
If any Rolls-Royce product design related features which could create risks to persons,
the product and/or its components are identified, Rolls-Royce should be contacted
immediately.
It is the user's responsibility to make all relevant hazard identifications and risk
assessments of all the activities associated with the use of this document.
It is the user's responsibility to design and implement safe systems of work and to supply
safe equipment (including, without limitation, safety equipment) and training
(including, without limitation, health and safety training) to anyone using this document
to work on products to which it relates.
A user without relevant experience of working in accordance with this document, or
with products to which it relates, should seek appropriate advice to identify the health
and safety controls and precautions that need to be taken while working.
Technical assistance can be sought from Rolls-Royce and will be subject to RollsRoyce's terms and conditions.
Page 2-3 of 4
Safety
3 Safety Instructions
This Rolls-Royce system is a heading/position control system connected to the
propeller, rudder and thruster control systems on board a vessel. By operating the
system, thrust force will be generated at the different propulsion units.
The operator must at all times be aware of:
Consequences of operating the system to prevent injury to people, damage of
equipment, damage to the vessel operated and damage to the surroundings.
That the system will set out an order signal to the propulsion unit if any position sensor
signal differs from the position set in the system.
Such an event will cause the propulsion units to generate thrust force. Special
consideration must be taken when the operator of the system is involved in other
activities, such as communication, operation of other systems or any other activities that
might take the focus away from the operation of the vessel.
4 Safety Messages
Safety messages in this manual are always accompanied by a safety alert symbol and a
signal word. The safety alert symbol is used to alert the reader about a potential risk of
personal injury or damage to the equipment.
The following types of safety messages are used within this manual:
Warning: Risk of... Indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in death or
personal injury.
Note:
Page 2-4 of 4
Alerts the reader to relevant factors and conditions which may impact the
function of the equipment.
System Description
1
General ......................................................................................................... 3
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3
Design .......................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch .............................................................. 9
3.2 Operator Station ............................................................................................ 9
3.2.1 Graphical Display(s) ......................................................................... 10
3.2.2 Operator Station Computer .............................................................. 10
3.2.3 Joystick Device ................................................................................. 11
3.2.4 Positioning Device ............................................................................ 12
3.3 Printer .......................................................................................................... 12
3.4 Additional Operator Station (Optional) ......................................................... 12
3.5 Control Cabinets .......................................................................................... 13
3.6 UPS ............................................................................................................. 14
3.7 Thrust Devices ............................................................................................. 15
3.7.1 Status and Settings .......................................................................... 15
3.7.2 Failure Detection and Failure Handling ............................................ 16
3.8 Sensors and Position Reference System .................................................... 17
3.8.1 Multi Sensor System Handling ......................................................... 17
4
Function ..................................................................................................... 18
4.1 Operation Principles .................................................................................... 18
4.2 Graphical User Interface .............................................................................. 19
4.2.1 GUI Philosophy and Interaction ........................................................ 19
4.2.2 Main Layout and Components ......................................................... 20
4.3 System Operation ........................................................................................ 22
4.3.1 Basic Operational Modes ................................................................. 22
4.3.2 Basic System Functions ................................................................... 25
4.3.3 Optional Functions ........................................................................... 27
4.4 Signal Processing Functions ....................................................................... 28
5
Location of Manufacturing Number ......................................................... 33
5.1 Marking Locations ....................................................................................... 33
5.1.1 Product Identification ........................................................................ 33
5.1.2 Company Identification ..................................................................... 33
System Description
1 General
This chapter provides an overview of the Icon system and a technical description of the
main components that give the required knowledge about the system.
The figures, drawings and text in this chapter are general and may not comply to the
actual installation on the vessel. For details on the delivered equipment, see chapter
4 Delivery Specification.
2 System Overview
2.1
Main Components
The redundant Icon DP 2 system is based on a triple controller solution with a redundant
fibre-optic network. Interface to sensors and position reference systems, power system
and thruster system are split into logical groups, based on class requirements and system
segregation.
The triple redundant controller solution features a two-out-of-three voting principle. In
case of controller failure and voting rejection, the operator does not have to intervene.
The remaining two controllers are unaffected and continue the operation. The redundant
network solution handles network failures locally on network level. The connected
nodes do not need special functionality to handle network redundancy. With the DP
system integrity preserved, the DP network is separated from networks of other
applications. The DP cabinets, operator stations, sensors and position reference systems
are dual powered from the redundant UPS system.
A typical Icon DP 2 system configuration is illustrated in figure 1. It shows how the
system parts communicate with each other. A typical system may consists of the
following:
Three control cabinets (triple redundant controllers), alternatively a large single
cabinet. See chapter 12 Design Drawings for delivery specific details.
Redundant fibre-optic network
Two or more Icon operator stations with:
- high-resolution colour LCD with touch-screen interface
- Joystick device
- Positioning device
- Remote display controller (located in the operators chair)
Printer(s):
- for printing of alarms, trendings etc.
Manoeuvring mode selector switch
Sensors and position reference systems (of different types)
Two UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
Interfaces to thruster devices (I/O modules or Rolls-Royce HeliconX3).
Page 3-3 of 34
System Description
DP Operator Stations
Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch
Control Cabinets
Uninterruptible
Power Supplies
DP Network
Thrust Devices
Figure 1
Page 3-4 of 34
System Description
From the UPS, 220 VAC power is distributed to the control cabinet(s), the operator
station(s) and positioning reference systems.
Figure 2 shows how power (220 VAC) is distributed to the system parts.
Operator Station 1
Operator Station 2
Control
Cabinets
UPS 1
Figure 2
Main
Main
Main
Main
Main
UPS 2
The system can consist of one or three control cabinets, depending on the customer
requirements. For systems with only one control cabinet, the cabinet is divided into three
logical sections with separate power supplies. An addtional I/O cabinet will be installed
when using only one control cabinet.
Addtional UPSs may also be added to the system.
Page 3-5 of 34
System Description
The Icon system acquire measurements from the propulsion system, power system,
sensor and position reference systems, and apply thrust setpoints to the propulsion
system, satisfying the commanded surge and sway forces and yawing moment.
The control loop of the Icon system is illustrated in Figure 3.
Thrust Device
Setpoints
Measurements
Power
Limits
Thrust Allocation
Signal Processing
Commanded
Thruster
Forces
Feedback and
Feedforward
Controller
Control System
Estimated Vessel Motion
References
Vessel Model
(Filtering & Estimation)
Trajectory Generator
Operator Input
Figure 3
Page 3-6 of 34
System Description
2.2
Note:
Thrust Allocation
A thrust device can be any propeller, thruster or rudder.
3
The force demands in surge and sway and moment demand in yaw from the controller
have to be distributed to each thruster as pitch and/or rpm setpoints and (if applicable)
directional setpoints.
The thrust allocation in the Icon system takes into account:
Available power on each bus bar. The Icon system will not enforce thruster action that
exceeds the available power.
Optimal thruster utilisation in normal operations.
Turning rate of thrusters, pitch and rpm response. The direction of azimuthing thrusters
can either be variable (auto direction) or fixed in a set of pre-defined configurations.
Grouping of thrusters. Two or more thrusters can be arranged to be working as a group.
The purpose is often to reduce changes in thruster direction. In cases where thrusters
cannot produce negative thruster force (reverse direction), this ensures that the thrust
demand is fulfilled without unnecessary turning of thruster direction.
Fixed thruster direction configurations or variable thruster direction.
Forbidden sectors for thruster direction.
2.3
Signal Processing
All measurements to the Icon system have to pass several levels of testing and
processing before being used in the control of the vessel. The type of testing and
processing functions used, is dependant on the signal source, see section 4.4 Signal
Processing Functions.
2.4
Page 3-7 of 34
System Description
moment to keep the vessel on the desired position, heading or track in automatic control
modes of operation. The individual position and heading control gain settings influence
how aggressive the system will respond to deviations in position and heading.
Automatic control modes also use reference feedforward control action, based on the
trajectory generator to speed up the response of the system in change position and
change heading operations. Wind measurements are used for wind compensation. I.e.
the wind force and moment acting on the vessel is derived from wind speed and
direction, wind drag coefficients and wind areas scaled by draught measurements. The
corresponding wind feedforward counter force and moment are commanded.
Page 3-8 of 34
System Description
3 Design
3.1 Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch
The manoeuvring mode selector switch (DP selector switch) is used for the selection
of operational mode (independent Joystick control/Manual/Icon control). The switch is
located on the bridge.
Figure 4
The manoeuvring mode selector switch can also be used for a fast disconnection of the
Icon system, in case of an emergency situation.
A fast disconnection will cause the separate thruster/rudder control systems to be
enabled instead of the Icon system.
3.2
Operator Station
The operator station or stations have a display with a touch-screen interface, a
positioning device and a joystick device.
The operator stations can be of different versions:
Fixed mounted
Integrated in the operator chair.
The Icon may be equipped with several operator stations.
The main components of an operator station are:
Graphical display for advanced system operation and status monitoring
Computer
Joystick device, including dedicated push-buttons and indicators.
Positioning device, including dedicated push-buttons and indicators
Trackball or mouse (optional).
Page 3-9 of 34
System Description
Figure 5
3.2.1
Graphical Display(s)
A graphical display for the Icon system is a high-resolution colour display with a touchscreen interface. The touch-screen is operated with buttons on the display. A button can
have different colours, indicating the current status of the system.
3.2.2
Page 3-10 of 34
System Description
3.2.3
Joystick Device
The joystick device is used for the mode changes and joystick control operations. Main
parts of the joystick device are:
Three-axes joystick device for manoeuvring (surge, sway and yaw)
Figure 6
Joystick Device
Page 3-11 of 34
System Description
3.2.4
Positioning Device
The positioning device is used for the manoeuvering of the vessel during DP control
mode operations. Main parts of the positioning device are:
Two-axes lever for positioning control with an integrated turning wheel for heading
setpoint control
Illuminated push-buttons for
- DP/joystick control mode (auto/manual position, auto/manual surge and sway)
- Increment/decrement of setting values
- Pause/restore of operation
- Enter/apply.
Figure 7
Positioning Device
3.3 Printer
The Icon system is normally equipped with one plain dot matrix monochrome line
printer, used for alarm printouts.
The system can be equipped with an additional network hardcopy colour printer, used
for printing of trendings, screen-shots, etc.
3.4
Note:
Page 3-12 of 34
System Description
3.5
Control Cabinets
For DP class 2 systems, three (or alternatively one large) cabinets are required. All
cabinets are based on the same Rolls-Royce Common Platform design.
Each control cabinet have four Rolls-Royce Marine Controllers with interfaces to
operator stations, thruster devices, power systems, position reference systems (GNSS,
laser, radar, hydro acoustics etc.) and different sensors (gyro compasses, VRUs, wind
sensors etc.).
For the alternative DP2 configuration, the control cabinet contains six Rolls-Royce
Marine Controllers.
Figure 8 shows examples of the location of the main components of the control cabinet.
9
3
10
2
1
Figure 8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Figure 9 shows examples of the location of the main components of the alternative large
DP2 control cabinet.
Page 3-13 of 34
System Description
DP-A
DP-C
DP-B
1
2
3
4
5
4
10
Figure 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
3.6
UPS
The uninterruptable power supply, UPS, delivers filtered and stabilized uninterrupted
power for the Icon system. In case of loss of main supply, the UPS can provide power
for the system for at least 30 minutes. The status of the UPS is monitored by the Icon
system.
The connectors for power supply and interfaces are located at the rear of the UPS.
See Figure 10 for the location of the main components of the UPS.
Page 3-14 of 34
System Description
3
4
Figure 10 Example of an Uninterruptable Power Supply Layout, Front and Rear View
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.7
Note:
Circuit breakers
UPS Marine filter
UPS Power module
UPS Battery module
Main switch
Thrust Devices
The Icon system is controlling the thrust devices via a corresponding
remote control system.
Page 3-15 of 34
System Description
Transfer to Lever Control
During operation, the operator can transfer a thrust device to manual lever control. This
functionality depends on the type of remote control system for the specific thrust device.
The command transfer to lever control is by the give-then-take principle. First, the thrust
device is disabled from the Icon system. Secondly the operator must take command on
the lever unit and then control the thrust device manually.
From the Icon system the operator can re-enable the thrust device for Icon operation at
any time.
Some examples where such functionality might be useful are:
Transfer of main propellers (and rudders) to lever control and use the remaining
thrusters for heading control only
Transfer of a swing-up thruster to lever control and keep the remaining thrust devices
for positioning and heading control by the Icon system.
Page 3-16 of 34
System Description
Note:
3
Note:
If the operator (on purpose) would like to reduce the number of active
thrust devices such that an insufficient thrust configuration situation will
occur, it is recommended to disable surge and/or sway from active control
in order to avoid the alarm situation.
For detailed information about sensors that are part of the Icon delivery,
see chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals.
Information about sensors that are not part of the Icon delivery, see
sensor system suppliers manuals.
A number of sensors provide the interfaces for various operator devices monitored by
the Icon system via the control cabinet. In addition to gyro compass, such devices can
be hydro acoustic, laser based, radar based, VRUs, wind sensors, GNSS etc.
Class rules regulate minimum system requirement. The Icon system requires interface
to accurate position measurement systems (typically differential GNSS reference
system). The Icon system also will have interface to at least a wind sensor (relative wind
speed and direction) and a vertical reference unit (VRU) for measurement of roll and
pitch angle of the vessel.
3.8.1
Page 3-17 of 34
System Description
4 Function
4.1 Operation Principles
The operation of the Icon system is related to the fundamental axes of horizontal motion
surge (alongship), sway (athwartships) and yaw (rotation about the centre of selected
rotation), see figure 11.
surge
sway
yaw
By automatic control of the propulsion system, thruster forces in surge and sway and
thruster moment in yaw will be applied in order to achieve the desired vessel motion,
position, heading or path.
Page 3-18 of 34
System Description
4.2
4.2.1
Page 3-19 of 34
System Description
4.2.2
3
4
1
6
7
Designation
Function
Stack of panels
User HUD
Main HUD
World
Toolbar
Alarm & Message Area Information area, displaying alarm messages and other vital
information.
Statusbar
Page 3-20 of 34
System Description
3
4
5
2
6
7
Figure 15 GUI Fullscreen Mode
Note:
For a detailed description of the GUI and its different areas, please refer to
the User Manual chapter 6 Operating Instructions.
Stack of Panels
The stack of panels are displayed, two at the time, on the remote control display and on
the main DP operator station display when set to split-screen view.
The different panels are:
Change used for changing position/heading and tracking operations.
PosRef used for changing the settings for positioning devices.
Sensors used for changing the different sensors settings.
Page 3-21 of 34
System Description
Thrust used for monitoring and enabling/disabling of thrust devices.
Control used for changing of operational functions and modes.
Settings used for changing of different system (operational) settings.
Operation used for changing the settings in different vessel operations.
Performance (available on the remote control display) shows information related to
heading control, speed and rate-of-turn, thruster force and moment order.
4.3
System Operation
The Icon operator stations have a high resolution colour display with a touch-screen
interface. Any operation of the system can be performed through the graphical interface.
In addition, the most common operations can be performed by means of dedicated pushbuttons on the operator devices.
For details, please refer to the User Manual chapter 6 Operating Instructions.
Standby
Standby is a monitoring mode where the Icon system will not generate any control
outputs (such as thruster action). If sensors and position reference systems are available,
all signals can be monitored on the operator station(s). Feedback and status signals from
thrust devices and power system can be monitored as well. Entering standby from any
other Icon function will immediately stop any thruster action on thrusters actively used
for Icon operations.
Start-up Function
When the system is activated (out of standby), the default start-up function is the
Joystick function with manual position and manual heading control modes. However, it
is possible to define other start-up functions such as yaw control fore.
Start-up heading control function (Manual/Auto) can also be preset in such way that the
Icon system automatically enters fixed heading function when activated. The selected
start-up function will activate only thrust devices needed for the selected function, e.g.
yaw control fore will activate only thrust devices located fore of midship.
Page 3-22 of 34
System Description
Joystick Functions
The Joystick mode comprises all operational functions in surge, sway and yaw for
operating the vessel by means of the joystick device and manual/automatic heading
control. The following operational functions are available as standard for the Joystick
mode:
Manual position and manual heading
In manual position and manual heading, the operator manoeuvres the vessel by using
the three-axes lever. The lever is used for direct generation of surge and sway forces
and yawing moment demands by the thrust devices.
Auto heading (fixed or change heading)
Reliable and accurate heading measurement (usually a gyrocompass) is required for
activating this function. In auto heading, the heading of the vessel is kept automatically
at the present heading setpoint value (fixed heading). Heading deviation is monitored
and an alarm will be issued when moving outside the boundaries.
In auto heading, the heading of the vessel can be automatically controlled from the
present heading towards a new heading setpoint by a change heading operation. A
reference heading signal is generated to ensure a smooth and controlled heading
change operation. In change heading, the system takes into account the maximum
rotation speed setting.
Yaw control (fore/aft)
If surge and sway axes are disabled (no control), the system will control the yawing
moment of the vessel only. This function can be used in cases where few thrust devices
are enabled for active use, e.g. only one tunnel thruster fore and the other thrust devices
are operated by manual levers. The heading function can then be either in manual
heading or auto heading (fixed or change).
Rotation point
When the selected rotation point is Fore or Aft, the system will generate an additional
sway force when the joystick lever is rotated. This sway compensation force is
generated to keep a pure rotation of the vessel around the rotation point.
There is no feedback command involved for positioning the vessel in this operation.
The additional sway force is generated from the yawing moment generated by the
rotation of the joystick lever.
The operator can generate a new heading setpoint in many ways, such as:
Position device Heading wheel
A new heading setpoint is easily generated by rotating the heading wheel in the desired
direction, in increments relative to the present heading setpoint.
Joystick device Push-buttons
Dedicated push-buttons are available for the increment or decrement of the heading
setpoint relative to the present heading setpoint
GUI
When using the graphical user interface, a new heading setpoint can be generated by:
Numeric input of a new heading setpoint
Increment/decrement of the heading setpoint relative to the present heading setpoint.
Whenever a new heading setpoint is defined, the new proposed heading is clearly
displayed on the graphical user interface together with a numeric presentation. The
change heading operation starts when the new heading setpoint is acknowledged by the
operator (by the Accept soft-button on the graphical user interface, or by the Accept
push-button on the joystick or positioning device).
Page 3-23 of 34
System Description
Joystick Settings
The following settings are available for the Joystick mode:
Joystick sensitivity
Heading control gain
Maximum rotational speed (used in change heading operations)
Heading deviation warning and alarm limits
Thrust allocation settings, depending on the thrust configuration of the vessel (e.g. bias
settings, thrust device combinator settings, maximum rudder angle, fixed direction on
azimuthing thrusters).
Positioning Functions
The positioning mode comprises all joystick functions. In addition, the following
operational functions are available:
Auto position (fixed or change position)
The surge and sway axes are controlled automatically. Reliable and accurate position
measurements (e.g. satellite-based systems, laser-based systems, radar-based systems,
hydro-acoustic systems) are required for these operations. The environmental
conditions, the system control gain settings and the number of thrusters active,
determine the performance of the automatic positioning.
In fixed position, the vessel is kept automatically on the operator selected position
setpoint. Position deviation is monitored and an alarm will be issued when moving
outside the boundaries. A change position operation can be initiated for automatic
moving of the vessel from present position towards the new position setpoint.
Reference position signals are generated to ensure a smooth and controlled position
change operation. The surge and sway speed settings determine the response and time
to achieve the new vessel position. Change position operations requires the auto
heading control to be active. A change position operation can be combined with a
change heading operation at any time, either stepwise or in a coupled operation.
Mixed surge and sway control
The operator can select combinations of surge and sway axes control (No control,
Manual or Auto).
Manual/auto heading control
Automatic heading control (fixed or change heading) is in most cases required in
combination with any auto position mode.
Rotation point
The operator can set the rotation (pivot) point, either by means of a set of pre-defined
rotation points, or by a user-defined rotation point. The actual vessel position, the
position setpoint and the position deviation monitoring, are always related to the
selected rotation point.
When the selected rotation point is Fore or Aft, the system will generate an additional
sway force when the joystick lever is rotated. This sway compensation force is
generated to keep a pure rotation of the vessel around the rotation point.
There is no feedback command involved for positioning the vessel in this operation.
The additional sway force is generated from the yawing moment generated by the
rotation of the joystick lever.
Page 3-24 of 34
System Description
Additional Positioning Functions
When in positioning mode, the following additional functions are available:
Wind compensation
If wind speed and direction measurements are available, the resulting wind loads acting
on the vessel can be automatically compensated by the Icon system. This function is
for rapid compensation of variations in wind loads acting on the vessel. In most cases,
the wind compensation feature will enhance the positioning performance.
Positioning Settings
Class Monitoring
In the Icon system, the operator can select the IMO DP class, which the system is
supposed to be in compliance with. Based on this input, the class monitoring function
will provide a complete overview of the system configuration regarding:
Sufficient sensors systems active
Sufficient position reference systems active
The power system and its configuration
Sufficient thrust devices active
DP system hardware components and data network status
Result of the online consequence monitoring function.
Power Limitation
The Icon system includes power limitation. When activated, the power limitation
function computes the available power for Icon operation and limits the thrust device
action to avoid power system overload.
Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX
Revision: C
Page 3-25 of 34
System Description
Power system measurements, thrust device feedback and internal power models are used
to estimate available power on each power bus for thrust devices controlled by the Icon
system. In cases with power limitation, i.e. insufficient available power to satisfy the
commanded thrust, the thrust orders are equally reduced.
Hence, the thrust reduction ratio is equal for all thrusters on the bus(es) with insufficient
power. Power limitation alarms are submitted for the limited thrust devices, and
limitation status is clearly indicated on the Icon graphical display.
Note:
If desired, the Icon system can be configured not to utilise all the available
power, to avoid an automatic start of the generators by the power
management system.
Thrust Configuration
When the Icon system is activated (from standby), all available thrust devices are
enabled for active use. During operation, a thrust device can be set to idle state. This
means that the system keeps command of the thrust device, but the thrust order is neutral
(e.g. zero pitch).
When a thrust device is in idle state, the operator have the ability to take command of
the thrust device on the dedicated lever, and operate it in combination with the remaining
thrust devices actively used by the Icon system.
The Icon system will automatically adjust to the actual number of active thrust devices.
If the requested mode of operation cannot be fulfilled due to reduced number of thrust
devices, an alarm will be issued. However, if an axis is set to No control, this alarm
will not be issued.
Note:
Built-in Trainer
The purpose of the built-in trainer is to provide operator training and system
familiarisation as an integral part of the Icon system. The built-in trainer comprises a
vessel simulator and a dedicated graphical user interface for set-up of the simulated
operational conditions. The simulator generates realistic dynamic behavior of
environmental conditions, thrust devices, power system, and resulting vessel motion.
Page 3-26 of 34
System Description
The simulator sends artificial measurements and feedback signals to the Icon system that
in real operations are received from the sensor systems, position reference systems,
power systems and thrust devices. Based on these inputs, the Icon system computes
thrust device order signals. In training, these signals are sent back to the vessel
simulator, not the real thrust devices.
3
Note:
4.3.3
The built-in trainer can only be started when the Icon system is in standby
mode. When operating the system with the trainer, this is clearly indicated
on the graphical user interface.
Optional Functions
An Icon system can be delivered with the following optional operational functions:
Waypoint tracking
Target tracking
Towing.
An Icon system can be delivered with the following optional system functions:
Capability analysis.
Waypoint Tracking
Waypoint Tracking is a low speed tracking function that permits the vessel to
automatically move along a track defined by a list of pre-defined waypoints. During the
tracking operation, all three axes (surge, sway and yaw) are controlled automatically.
Each waypoint is defined by the following characteristics:
Latitude/longitude
Radius about the waypoint that defines when to change to the next waypoint
Vessel speed on the leg towards the waypoint.
During a Waypoint Tracking operation, the automatic heading control can be governed
in several ways:
Heading setpoint automatically set by track course (tangentially on track). A side-slip
angle can be defined as additional input to the track course
Operator defined heading setpoint (as in any normal auto heading operation)
During waypoint tracking, the cross-track deviation is monitored. An alarm is issued if
the vessel moves outside the boundaries. The waypoint tracking function can be paused
and resumed at any time by the operator (by the Pause soft-button on the graphical user
interface, or by the Pause push-button on the positioning device).
Waypoints can be transferred from electronic chart systems to the Icon system (if such
an interface exist and is available on the electronic chart system).
Waypoint Tracking Settings
The following additional settings are available in waypoint tracking:
Cross-track deviation warning and alarm limits
Heading setpoint option (operator set/track course/from waypoint list)
Side-slip angle (offset to tangential heading setpoint)
Doc. No.: CAA-022001-03MX
Revision: C
Page 3-27 of 34
System Description
Target Tracking
Target tracking is a function that permits the Icon vessel to track another object - remote
operated vehicle or another vessel - in a fixed distance (range) and direction (bearing).
Accurate and reliable measurements of distance and direction between the DP vessel
and the target are required for target tracking. During the target tracking operation, all
three axes (surge, sway and yaw) are controlled automatically.
A reaction radius about the tracked object is defined whenever target tracking is entered.
Similarly, the present distance and bearing are taken to be the setpoints for distance and
bearing. When the object moves outside the reaction radius, the reaction radius is moved
correspondingly, and thus the vessel starts to track the object.
During target tracking operations, the heading control is governed by operator defined
heading setpoints (as in any normal auto heading operation).
The reaction radius and the distance and the bearing to the tracked object can be adjusted
anytime during the target tracking operation.
Target Tracking Settings
The following additional settings are available in Target Tracking:
Target identification (which target to track)
Reaction radius
Towing
During a towing operation, the operator can add a bias force in the forward direction to
compensate a near constant load. A constant bias force can only be added when the surge
axis control mode is set to Joystick. The bias force will automatically be set to zero by
the system if the Joystick mode is exited.
The joystick lever can be used in combination with the constant bias force to adjust the
total surge force order, i.e. the constant bias force can be neutralized by moving the
joystick in negative surge position.
Towing Settings
The bias surge force can be entered numerically or incrementally up and down from the
GUI.
4.4
Function\Device
Power
System
Propulsion
System
Interface check
Wind
Sensors
VRUs
Gyro
Compasses
Posrefs
Wind speed
scaling
Output
smoothing
Info quality
evaluation
Range check
Wildpoint check
Step check
System Description
Function\Device
Power
System
Propulsion
System
High dynamics
Position
standardisation
Wind
Sensors
VRUs
Gyro
Compasses
Posrefs
Position alignment
Weighting
Manual scaling
Page 3-29 of 34
System Description
The signal processing functions available is described in more detail in the following
table:
Function
Desciption
Interface check
This function checks that the interface to all sub-systems and devices are working
correctly.
Loop and range checks on signals are performed, as well as hardware and protocol
checks for serial lines and network communication. Possible interface errors will
result in Unavailable status for the specific device in the GUI.
Range check
t
Out of range
Frozen signal
This function checks if all input signals to the system are within the system specified
range.
Out of range status will result in auto disabling of sensors and position reference
systems.
Out of range status on power signals will cause the signal to be limited on max/min
limit.
Frozen signal check
This function checks that the signals from sensors and position reference devices
are not frozen.
If a signal is unchanged or changes very slowly for an abnormal long period of time,
a signal freeze alarm is issued.
Wildpoint check
t
Wild point &
replacement
Step
This function checks the signals for wildpoints, i.e. single values that are
unexpected and does not follow the curve for the other values.
Signal wild points are replaced, and alarms issued in the GUI.
Step check
Page 3-30 of 34
This function checks the signals from the devices for unacceptable steps.
If unacceptable steps are found, the device will be disapproved until the signal
becomes normal again. For large signal steps the device will be automatically
disabled.
System Description
Function
Desciption
This function checks if there are high variances in the output values from sensors
and position reference devices. If there are high variances, the device will be
disapproved until the signal becomes normal again.
High dynamics
Position standardisation This function performs checks on raw measurements, standardized measurements
and aligned measurements for position reference systems.
Out of range and Frozen signal checks are performed on the raw measurements.
The raw measurements are mapped to the standardized vessel position.
The Wildpoint, Step, High variance and High dynamics checks are performed
on standardized positions.
Position alignment
t
Aligning dashed line with continuous
This function is used for alignment of the position reference systems to provide
position measurements that are referred to a common zero frame.
Basically, each GNSS define their own zero point, and the local position references
are aligned with the GNSS zero frame. A GNSS can also be aligned if the position
deviates from another more reliable GNSS.
The position references can be re-aligned from the GUI when required.
If there are no GNSS available one of the local position reference systems will
define the zero frame.
Page 3-31 of 34
System Description
Function
Desciption
Voting rejected
Weighted
Differ rejected
This function automatically makes the output values from functional and enabled
sensors and position reference devices affect the system in relation to the quality of
the output signal.
Weighted signals will only be calculated for multiple devices of the same type.
Manual scaling
Page 3-32 of 34
This functions is used to manually control how much specific sensors and position
reference devices affects the system
System Description
Rolls-Royce IconTM
DP System Class 2
MAIN CONTROL CABINET A
+C101
Figure 16 Product Identification Label
5.1.2
Company Identification
The Rolls-Royce Company Identification sticker shows where the product has been
produced and is found on discrete places on all delivered items, e.g. on the inside of the
cabinet doors.
TYPE NO
INST.NO
SERIAL NO
Q.A.- DATE
3
4
MADE IN NORWAY
Rolls-Royce Marine AS
dep.: Automation - Longva
N-6293 Longva,Norway
Denomination
Meaning
TYPE NO
SERIAL NO
INST. NO
Q.A. DATE
Page 3-33 of 34
System Description
Page 3-34 of 34
Delivery Specification
1
General ......................................................................................................4-3
Delivery Specification
1 General
This chapter contains a delivery specification of all separately packaged items in the
Rolls-Royce delivery.
Note:
Page 4-3 of 4
Delivery Specification
Page 4-4 of 4
Technical Data
1
General ......................................................................................................5-3
4
Hardware Data ..........................................................................................5-4
4.1 Operator Stations .......................................................................................5-4
4.1.1 Main Display ....................................................................................5-4
4.1.2 Display Controller ............................................................................5-4
4.1.3 Input Device ....................................................................................5-4
4.1.4 AC/DC Power Supply ......................................................................5-5
4.1.5 Diode Bridge ....................................................................................5-5
4.1.6 Printers ............................................................................................5-5
4.1.7 Remote Control Display (Operators Chair Only) ............................5-5
4.2 Control Cabinet(s) ......................................................................................5-5
4.2.1 Main Components in the Control Cabinet(s) ...................................5-5
4.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ..........................................................5-7
4.3.1 Main Components in the UPS .........................................................5-7
5
Interfaces ..................................................................................................5-8
5.1 Manoeuvering Mode Selector Switch .........................................................5-8
5.2 Thruster System .........................................................................................5-8
5.2.1 Manoeuvring Mode Selection Signals ...........................................5-10
5.2.2 Manoeuvring Mode Selection Sequence .......................................5-11
5.3 Sensors / Positioning Reference Systems ...............................................5-12
5.4 Power System ..........................................................................................5-12
6
Technical Data
1 General
This section provides the technical data of the Icon system, with focus on the main
hardware components. Detailed drawings and interface descriptions are found in the
delivery specific drawings, see chapter 12 Design Drawings.
The Icon system is designed to meet the type approval requirements stated by EU
standards and the following classification societies:
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)
Bureau Veritas (BV)
China Classification Society (CCS)
Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
Germanischer Lloyds (GL)
Korean Register of Shipping (KR)
2 Environmental Data
Temperature:
055 C
(Engine room)
055 C (Control room, Accomodation and Bridge)
Humidity:
97 %
Vibration:
mm
Enclosure:
3 Electrical Data
DC power supply
24 VDC
AC power supply
Page 5-3 of 12
Technical Data
4 Hardware Data
This section describes each of the Icon system unit types. Some units in this description
may not be a part of the specific delivery. See the Main Item List (01LI) in chapter
12 Design Drawings, for a detailed listing of the specific system delivery.
Details about the hardware can be subject to change without further notice.
4.1
Operator Stations
The operator stations provide the operator interaction units. The system may be
equipped with several operator stations. The operator station can be divided into several
units. Hence, the sub-panel units can be arranged according to the user requirements and
the requirements to ergonomics at the different bridge arrangement (desk, chair,
integrated bridge system etc.).
Each operator station is interfaced to the control cabinet(s) by means of Ethernet and
CAN bus communication links.
All operations can be performed and monitored either from any main operator station,
integrated in the operators chair or from a desk mounted operator station.
The vessel can also be equipeed with additional, limited operator stations that will have
a smaller display and will not be able to present information to the same extent as a fully
equipped operator station.
In general, the operator stations consists of the following main items:
Display unit (including display controller)
Operator devices
- Joystick device (including a 3-axes joystick lever, push-buttons and indicators)
- Positioning device (including a 2-axes joystick lever, push-buttons and indicators).
4.1.1
Main Display
High-resolution colour LCD with resistive touch-screen interface
24 VDC power supply.
4.1.2
Display Controller
CPU with VGA and 10/100Base-Tx Ethernet
Serial channels (RS-232/RS-485/RS-422)
Compact flash reader
24 VDC power supply.
4.1.3
Input Device
CAN bus interface
24 VDC power supply.
Page 5-4 of 12
Technical Data
4.1.4
4.1.5
Diode Bridge
Input: 2x24 V/20 A
Output: 1x24 V/20 A.
4.1.6
Printers
Line printer (no graphics, only alarms)
- Impact dot matrix printer with roll paper stand.
- 230 VAC power supply
Hardcopy printer
- High resolution color printer
- 230 VAC power supply.
4.1.7
4.2
Control Cabinet(s)
The control cabinet(s) provide the interfaces necessary for the interconnection between
the operator stations, thrust devices, switchboard, sensors and position reference
systems. The number of control cabinets depends on the DP class and customer
requirements of the delivered system.
Each cabinet contains controllers, both for DP calculations (DPC) and I/O calculations
(IOC) such as communicating with thrust devices, switchboard, sensors, position
reference systems and auxiliary systems.
4.2.1
Page 5-5 of 12
Technical Data
Diode Bridge
Input: 2x24 V/20 A
Output: 1x24 V/20 A
Ethernet Switch
Managed switch
10/100 MBit/s twisted pair ports
Fibre-optic ports
Ring network support.
Interface Modules
A control cabinet may be equipped in different ways, dependant of which subsystem to
be interfaced with. In case thrusters or other devices are already equipped with Ethernet
interfaces, there will be less need for digital/analogue I/O. In such case, the cabinet may
be equipped with a separate Ethernet switch connected to the I/O Controller (IOC) in
addition to the CAN I/O modules.
CAN I/O modules
- RRAIO for analogue and digital I/O signals
- RRDIO for digital I/O signals
Signal Isolation Amplifier
- Output current: 0(4)20 mA
- Maximum input current: 25 mA
- Load impedance, current: <= 600 ohm
- Galvanic isolation: 3-way disconnector
Ethernet Switch
- Managed switch
- 10/100 MBit/s twisted pair ports.
Page 5-6 of 12
Technical Data
4.3
4.3.1
Power Module
On-line double conversion with PFC (Power Factor Correction) system
10/100 MBit/s twisted pair ports (10/100Base-Tx, RJ45 connectors)
Single phase input
Battery Module
Maintenance-free sealed lead acid
20 pcs 12 V/7 Ah batteries in series per module.
Page 5-7 of 12
Technical Data
5 Interfaces
The Icon system can acquire measurements from the power system, the truster system,
sensors and position reference systems, and applies thrust setpoints to the thruster
system. This section provides an overview of the different types of interfaces.
For detailed description of interfaces, refer to the delivery specific interface list. See
chapter 12 Design Drawings.
5.1
5.2
Thruster System
The thruster systems are interface by means of a set of signals. The signals are
communicated to the different other thruster systems in one of two ways:
Ethernet (i.e. Helicon X3)
The interface to the thruster control system is based on network communication. The
thruster system interface is a dedicated network channel from an I/O controller, located
in a control cabinet.
Discrete signals
Each signal has its dedicated pair of wires. They are galvanically isolated at the
transmitting end.
Page 5-8 of 12
Technical Data
The signals are set/received with I/O:s located in the thrusters controller cabinet of the
thruster control system, which again are interfaced towards switchboard, steering gear,
variable speed drive and auxiliaries. For each thruster system, the interface may consist
of the signals listed in the following table.
Signal 1)
Type 2)
Direction
Description
Order Pitch
420 mA or 10 V
Feedback Pitch
420 mA or 10 V
Order Direction
420 mA or 10 V
Feedback Direction
420 mA or 10 V
420 mA or 10 V
Feedback RPM
420 mA or 10 V
Order Rudder
420 mA or 10 V
Setpoint angle:35, 45 70
Feedback Rudder
420 mA or 10 V
Feedback angle:35, 45 70
Thruster Avaliable
Pot. free
Thruster Request
Pot. free
Thruster
Acknowledge
Pot. free
Pitch Reduced
Pot. free
1)
Other status signals may apply, e.g. clutches signal (closed = clutch engaged).
For Ethernet interfaces (outstations omitted), ignore the Type column.
For analogue signals 10 V is available if required, 4-20 mA is preferred.
Calibration: 6 mA = -180 (CCW), 12 mA = 0, 18 mA = +180 (CW).
For a detailed description of each thruster interface, refer to the delivery specific system
drawings. See chapter 12 Design Drawings.
2)
Page 5-9 of 12
Technical Data
5.2.1
Joystick
Request
RUN PUMP 1
RUN PUMP 2
Rudder 1 (2 similar)
Request
Acknowledge
DP Mode
Joystick Mode
Enable request
Enable request
DP
Enable request
Manual
Enable request
Enable request
Enable request
Joystick Mode
Joystick
Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch
DP
RUN PUMP 1
RUN PUMP 2
Acknowledge
Propulsion / Thruster
Request
Request
Available
Available
Acknowledge
Request
INFO
Not a part decision.
Information for
DP/JS only.
Acknowledge
Propulsion / Thruster
Request
Available
Available
Acknowledge
Acknowledge
INFO
Not a part decision.
Information for
DP/JS only.
Enable Request
Available
The thruster system is available for DP/Joystick operation and will accept
a request signal.
Request
Acknowledge
RUN PUMP 1
RUN PUMP 2
Joystick Mode
Manual Mode
DP Mode
Page 5-10 of 12
Technical Data
5.2.2
Enable Request
activated from
Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch
No
Enable Request
activated from
Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch
Yes
Available
activated from
thruster
Yes
No
RUN PUMP 1
(and/or) RUN PUMP 2 (from)
Yes
Request
from Joystick / DP
Request
from Joystick / DP
No
Acknowledge
activated from
Steering Gear
Yes
Thruster operated
from Joystick / DP
No
Steering Gear
Yes
Acknowledge
activated from
thruster
No
No
Yes
Steering gear operated
from Joystick / DP
Page 5-11 of 12
Technical Data
5.3
5.4
Power System
The power system interface monitors the status of the applicable circuit breakers, bus tie
and generator load. Interface signal specifications are found in the Wiring Diagram, see
chapter 12 Design Drawings.
Signal
Type
Direction
Description
Generator load
420 mA
SB > Icon
Generator breaker
Pot. free
SB > Icon
Bus tie
Pot. free
SB > Icon
Thruster breaker
Pot. free
SB > Icon
6 Additional Interfaces
Possible additional interfaces may be implemented with the Icon system. In such cases,
details will be found in chapter 12 Design Drawings.
Page 5-12 of 12
Operating Instructions
1
General ......................................................................................................6-3
1.1 Operation Principles ...................................................................................6-3
1.2 Basic Operational Modes ...........................................................................6-3
2
Operation ...................................................................................................6-4
2.1 Joystick Device ...........................................................................................6-4
2.1.1 Push-buttons and Indicators ............................................................6-4
2.2 Positioning Device ......................................................................................6-6
2.2.1 Push-buttons and Indicators ............................................................6-6
2.3 Graphical User Interface .............................................................................6-7
2.3.1 GUI Philosophy and Interaction .......................................................6-7
2.3.2 Main Layout and Components ........................................................6-8
2.4 Activating the Icon System .......................................................................6-10
2.5 Deactivating the Icon System ...................................................................6-10
2.6 Standby ....................................................................................................6-11
2.7 Transfer of Command Between Operator Stations ..................................6-11
2.8 Joystick Operations ..................................................................................6-12
2.8.1 Manual Heading ............................................................................6-12
2.8.2 Auto Heading .................................................................................6-12
2.8.3 Heading Control Settings ..............................................................6-14
2.8.4 Control Presets ..............................................................................6-15
2.8.5 Rotation Point (Pivot) ....................................................................6-15
2.9 Positioning Functions ...............................................................................6-17
2.9.1 Automatic Positioning ....................................................................6-17
2.9.2 Mixed Surge and Sway Control .....................................................6-19
2.9.3 Position Control Settings ...............................................................6-19
2.9.4 Wind Compensation ......................................................................6-20
2.10 Basic System Functions ...........................................................................6-21
2.10.1 Class Monitoring ............................................................................6-21
2.10.2 Online Consequence Monitoring ...................................................6-21
2.10.3 Power Limitation ............................................................................6-21
2.10.4 Thrust Configuration ......................................................................6-21
2.10.5 Built-in Trainer ...............................................................................6-22
2.11 Optional Functions ....................................................................................6-23
2.11.1 Waypoint Tracking .........................................................................6-23
2.11.2 Target Tracking .............................................................................6-24
2.11.3 Towing ...........................................................................................6-24
3
GUI ...........................................................................................................6-25
3.1 Main View .................................................................................................6-25
Operating Instructions
1 General
This chapter gives a brief overview on how to operate the Icon system. For practical
reasons, it is not possible to go into particulars about all available functions. Instead, the
graphical user interface (GUI) is designed to be as self-explanatory as possible. In the
following sections, the most common functions are described in detail.
1.1
Operation Principles
The operation of the Icon system is related to the fundamental axes of horizontal motion
surge (alongship), sway (athwartship) and yaw (rotation around the selected rotation
point), see figure 1.
surge
sway
yaw
Figure 1
By automatic control of the propulsion system, thruster forces in surge and sway as well
as thruster moment in yaw will be applied in order to achieve the desired vessel motion,
position, heading or path.
1.2
Page 6-3 of 62
Operating Instructions
2 Operation
2.1 Joystick Device
2.1.1
Lamp Control
The Lamp control push-button with indicators, used to adjust the light of the indicators
in steps. One long push (2 s.) activates the Lamp Test function.
LED Indication
The LED indicator on the Alarm button (5) flashes red together with the alarm buzzer.
When the Alarm button is pressed to mute the alarm, the LED is lit constantly as long
as there are active alarms.
When the LED below the Give command symbol (right hand symbol) on the
Command transfer button (2) flashes on an operator station, this indicates that the
operator station is ready to take the command.
10
5
4
2
Figure 2
Page 6-4 of 62
Joystick Device
Operating Instructions
Pos.
Symbol
Function
10
Page 6-5 of 62
Operating Instructions
2.2
2.2.1
Positioning Device
Push-buttons and Indicators
Some push-buttons have two dots on them, indicating that they need to be pressed twice
(double press) to activate the designated function.
1
8
9
4
3
Figure 3
Pos.
Page 6-6 of 62
2
Positioning Device
Symbol
Function
Operating Instructions
2.3
2.3.1
Figure 4
Page 6-7 of 62
Operating Instructions
2.3.2
3
4
1
6
7
Figure 5
Page 6-8 of 62
Pos
Designation
Function
Stack of panels
User HUD
Main HUD
World
Toolbar
Alarm & Message Area Information area, displaying alarm messages and other vital
information.
Statusbar
Operating Instructions
1
Figure 6
3
4
5
2
6
7
Figure 7
Note:
For a detailed description of the GUI and its different areas, please refer to
section 3 GUI.
Stack of Panels
The stack of panels are displayed, two at the time, on the remote control display and on
the main DP operator station display when set to split-screen view.
The different panels are:
Change used for changing position/heading and tracking operations.
PosRef used for changing the settings for positioning devices.
Sensors used for changing the different sensors settings.
Page 6-9 of 62
Operating Instructions
Thrust used for monitoring and enabling/disabling of thrust devices.
Control used for changing of operational functions and modes.
Settings used for changing of different system (operational) settings.
Operation used for changing the settings in different vessel operations.
Performance (available on the remote control display) shows information related to
heading control, speed and rate-of-turn, thruster force and moment order.
2.4
Note:
1.
2.5
Note:
Note:
The manoeuvring mode selector switch can also be used for a fast transfer
of thrust devices to manual lever control.
Page 6-10 of 62
Operating Instructions
2.6
Standby
In standby (not active) mode, the Icon system is continuously running and processing
input data. However, the system has no control of the thrusters, main propellers or
rudders. The operator can monitor input signals, alarms and system status on the
operator station. The system remains in standby mode until it is activated, see section 2.4
Activating the Icon System.
Note:
2.7
Note:
Press the Command transfer push-button twice on the Joystick device on the
operator station that currently is in command.
The Give command indicator is lit on all operator stations.
2.
Press the Command transfer push-button twice on the Joystick device for the
operator station to be in command.
The Give command indicator is turned off.
The In command indicator is lit, indicating that the operator station is now in
command.
If no other operator station has taken command within a certain time, the Give
command will time-out.
Note:
Note:
Page 6-11 of 62
Operating Instructions
2.8
2.8.1
Note:
Joystick Operations
Manual Heading
Whenever the Icon system is activated the manual heading is the default
operating mode.
1.
Press the Manual heading push-button on the joystick device twice to activate the
manual heading operation function.
In manual heading operation mode, the rotation of the joystick generates a yawing
moment.
The manual heading function is clearly indicated by a symbol in the statusbar on the
graphical display.
Rotation Point
The operator can set the rotation (pivot) point, either by means of a set of pre-defined
rotation points, or by a user-defined rotation point.
How to change the rotation point is described in section 2.8.5 Rotation Point (Pivot).
2.8.2
Auto Heading
There are three states of automatic heading control:
Fixed heading the vessel is kept at the present heading setpoint automatically.
Change heading the vessel rotates from the present heading towards the new heading
setpoint automatically.
Track In advanced functions, such as target tracking and waypoint tracking, the
heading setpoint can be automatically changed (either in steps or continously changed)
by the Icon system.
The auto heading function is clearly indicated by a symbol in the statusbar on the
graphical display and in the heading indicator.
Note:
In fixed heading operations, the Icon system will issue an alarm if the
heading deviation exceeds the operator defined alarm limit.
In normal operation, the warning limit must be less than the alarm limit.
A warning limit can, however, be set to avoid warnings and only issue
alarms, by setting the warning limit equal to the alarm limit.
See section 2.8.3 Heading Control Settings on how to change the alarm
and warning limits.
Page 6-12 of 62
Operating Instructions
Fixed Heading
Fixed heading is activated in one of the following ways:
By pressing the Auto heading push-button on the joystick device twice.
From the Control panel (see the following instruction).
These methods can also be used to update the heading setpoint.
When fixed heading is entered, the heading setpoint is assigned to be the actual vessel
heading.
1.
Change Heading
Note:
2.
3.
New setpoint
30 degrees
8 and Apply
22 degrees
10 degrees
+ 12 and Apply
22 degrees
10 degrees
22 and Apply
22 degrees
The new heading setpoint is clearly indicated together with the heading measurements
in the heading display area on the graphical display.
The change heading operation can be paused by pressing the Pause push-button, this
makes the vessel stay at heading until pause is released. When it is released the vessel
will continue to the original setpoint.
The change heading operation can be terminated in three ways:
By selecting Manual heading mode, see section 2.8.1 Manual Heading.
By selecting Auto heading mode, see section 2.8.2 Auto Heading.
Doc. No.: CAA-021001-06MU
Revision: B
Page 6-13 of 62
Operating Instructions
By deactivating the Icon system, see section 2.5 Deactivating the Icon System.
Rotation Point
The operator can set the rotation (pivot) point, either by means of a set of pre-defined
rotation points, or by a user-defined rotation point.
How to change the rotation point is described in section 2.8.5 Rotation Point (Pivot).
Failure Handling
If heading measurements are lost or disabled during auto heading operations, the internal
vessel model will predict the rotation of the vessel (dead reckoning).
In dead reckoning, an auto heading operation will continue where the command action
is based on the predicted heading and rotational speed signals from the internal vessel
model.
Should this failure situation occur during change heading operations, the internal
reference model will automatically slow down towards zero speed in a controlled
manner to stop the vessel motion.
If the gyro is lost, but the measurements are availbable again, the gyro must be reenabled. This is done from the Measurements panel on the display.
Recovery Handling
If the actual heading differ with more than 3 degrees from the set point, a pop-up menu
appears on the display, and the operator must make one of the following decisions:
Stay - Remain fixed in the present heading (setpoint will then be updated to present
heading)
To setpoint - Move back to the original heading setpoint (or continue the change
heading operation to the new heading setpoint).
Tap Stay or To setpoint followed by Apply in the pop-up menu.
2.8.3
2.
3.
4.
Page 6-14 of 62
Operating Instructions
Note:
In manoeuvring operations, the Icon system always turns the vessel in the
direction that makes the shortest turn.
Note:
The Joystick sensitivity and Thrust bias can be changed in the Allocation
sub-view of the Settings panel.
2.8.4
Control Presets
The control preset is clearly indicated by a symbol in the status area on the graphical
display.
In Normal mode, the joystick lever position generates a force order in surge and sway.
There are different ways of managing the control functions:
By pressing the Manual position push-button on the positioning device twice.
From the Control panel (see the following instruction).
1.
2.
3.
2.8.5
1.
2.
Select the Surge row and press the Menu button to open the axis control submenu.
3.
4.
5.
Select Normal to terminate Auto Heading Fore, or set the system in Standby.
2.
Select the rotation point (Free select, Fore, Midship, Aft) from the drop-down
Page 6-15 of 62
Operating Instructions
menu.
Note:
3.
For rotation point Free select there is two extra drop-down calculator menus for
setting Fwd/aft Rotpoint [m] and Stb/Port Rotpoint [m].
4.
Page 6-16 of 62
Operating Instructions
2.9
2.9.1
Positioning Functions
Automatic Positioning
There are three functions for automatic control of positioning:
Fixed position the vessel is kept at the present position setpoint automatically.
Change position the vessel rotates from the present position towards the new position
setpoint automatically.
Track In advanced functions, such as target tracking and waypoint tracking, the
position setpoint can be automatically changed (either in steps or continously changed)
by the Icon system.
Note:
Note:
In fixed position operations, the Icon system will issue an alarm when
moving outside of the operator defined boundaries.
See section 2.9.3 Position Control Settings on how to change the alarm
limit.
Fixed Position
Fixed position can be activated in different ways:
By pressing the Auto position push-button on the position device twice.
By pressing the Auto surge and Auto sway push-buttons on the position device
twice.
From the Control panel (see the following step-by-step description).
1.
2.
Press the Preset mode button, followed by Normal in the sub-menu. The same
effect can be achieved by directly in the list set surge and sway control to auto.
When auto position is entered, the position setpoint is assigned to be the actual vessel
position.
These methods can also be used to update the position setpoint.
The auto position mode can be terminated in two ways:
By selecting Manual position mode, see section 2.8.4 Control Presets.
By deactivating the Icon system, see section 2.5 Deactivating the Icon System.
Page 6-17 of 62
Operating Instructions
Change Position
Note:
A change position operation can only be initiated when the system already
is operating in auto position.
A change position operation can be combined with a change heading operation at any
time, either stepwise or in a coupled operation.
There are two ways to initiate a change position operation:
By moving the position lever on the positioning device in the desired direction,
followed by a press on the Apply push-button. The new position is always generated
relative to the vessel alongship (forward/aft) and athwartship (port/starboard) axes.
By entering a new position setpoint in the Change panel. When using the graphical
user interface, a new position setpoint can be defined as:
- Relative position change; North/South and East/West directions.
- Relative position change; alongship (Fwd/Aft) and athwartship (Port/Stbd)
directions.
- Relative position change; distance and course.
- Absolute position in Latitude/Longitude.
- Absolute position in UTM-coordinates (Northing/Easting/UTM zone).
Whenever a new position setpoint is defined, the new proposed position is clearly
visualised in the graphical user interface together with numeric position coordinates
(relative and absolute).
The change position operation starts when the new position setpoint is acknowledged by
the operator (by the Apply button in the graphical user interface, or by the Apply
push-button on the positioning device).
To enter a new position setpoint:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Page 6-18 of 62
Operating Instructions
2.9.2
2.
3.
2.
Select mode from the sub-menu, the following selections are available:
Normal - This is the default selection, where all three horizontal axes are controlled
by the joystick lever. The joystick lever position generates a force order in surge and
sway.
HDG - With this selection, manual position of the vessel is disabled in the Icon
system, only the yawing moment (heading) can be controlled.
HDG and Sway - This selection activates manual position in sway, but not in surge.
The yawing moment is also controlled.
2.9.3
2.
3.
Page 6-19 of 62
Operating Instructions
2.9.4
Wind Compensation
The wind compensation can be individually enabled for the three axes of horizontal
motion (surge, sway and yaw).
To activate the wind compensation feature:
1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
4.
Press the Menu button and select block (or unblock) from the sub-menu.
Page 6-20 of 62
Operating Instructions
Note:
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the system does not comply with the selected class, an alarm will be
issued.
2.10.4
1.
2.
3.
Select the Power Lim row and press the Menu button.
4.
Thrust Configuration
It is possible to enable or disable any specific thrust device in the system.
1.
2.
Select the preferred truster row and press the Menu button.
3.
Page 6-21 of 62
Operating Instructions
Note:
2.10.5
The Icon system will automatically adjust to the actual number of active
thrust devices. If the requested mode of operations cannot be fulfilled due
to reduced number of thrust devices, an alarm will be issued. However, if
an axis is set to No control, this alarm will not be issued.
Built-in Trainer
The built-in trainer comprises a vessel simulator and a dedicated graphical user interface
for set-up of the simulated operational conditions. The simulator generates realistic
dynamic behavior of environmental conditions, thrust devices, power system, and
resulting vessel motion.
Note:
The built-in trainer can only be started when the Icon system is in standby
mode. When operating the system with the trainer, this is clearly indicated
on the graphical user interface.
Operation
From this tab it is possible to start and stop the trainer function and monitor the function
availability.
Note:
symbol
Settings
From this tab system input signals are set according to the following sub-views:
Environment (wind, current and wave speed and direction)
Target (speed, direction, acceleration, turn rate etc.)
Position reference systems (standard deviation, signal noise, differential limits etc.)
Reflectors
From this tab it is possible to set up laser reflectors used by the vessel. For each reflector,
the following parameters can be set:
Which laser it is being used by
Fixed or mobile (i.e. if it is placed on a vessel or not)
Position (north, east, height)
Active or inactive.
Page 6-22 of 62
Operating Instructions
Trends
From this tab it is possible to monitor graphs for:
Simulated environment conditions (wind, current and wave speed and direction)
Target object values (speed and direction).
Waypoint Tracking
Waypoint tracking is a low speed tracking function that permits the vessel to
automatically move along a track defined by a list of pre-defined waypoints.
During a waypoint tracking operation, the automatic heading control can be governed in
several ways:
Heading setpoint automatically set by track course (tangentially on track). A side-slip
angle can be defined as additional input to the track course.
Operator defined heading setpoint (as in any normal auto heading operation, see
section 2.8 Joystick Operations for details).
Waypoint tracking is enabled from the Control panel:
1.
2.
Managing Waypoints
The waypoint list is managed from the Change panel, sub-view Waypoint. From
here, the operator can add/delete waypoints or change the settings of a specific
waypoint. Each waypoint is defined by the following characteristics:
The waypoint position, relative and absolute.
A radius about the waypoint, defining when to change to the next waypoint.
Vessel speed and heading on the leg towards the waypoint.
To change the definitions of a waypoint:
1.
2.
Select a waypoint in the waypoint list (scroll up/down in the list by means of the
scroll bar to the right).
3.
4.
5.
Page 6-23 of 62
Operating Instructions
Cross-track deviation warning limit and alarm limit.
To change a waypoint tracking setting:
2.11.2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Target Tracking
Target tracking is a function that permits the DP vessel to track another object - remote
operated vehicle or another vessel - in a fixed distance (range) and direction (bearing).
During target tracking operations, the heading control can be governed by:
Operator defined heading setpoint (as in any normal auto heading operation).
The reaction radius and the distance and the bearing to the tracked object can be adjusted
anytime during the target tracking operation.
1.
2.
3.
2.11.3
Towing
During a towing operation, the operator can add a bias force in the forward direction to
compensate a near constant load. The joystick lever can be used in combination with the
constant bias force to adjust the total surge force order, i.e. the constant bias force can
then be neutralized by moving the joystick in negative surge position.
In the 'Settings' panel, 'Towing' sub-view, the settings available for towing operations
are:
A bias force can be entered either numerically (reached from the 'Menu' button), or
incrementally up and down from the GUI.
Note:
It is only possible to set a bias surge force when the surge control mode
is set to 'Joystick', see section 2.9.2 Mixed Surge and Sway Control. The
bias force will automatically be set to zero by the system if the 'Joystick'
mode is exited.
Page 6-24 of 62
Operating Instructions
3 GUI
From the graphical user interface, most of the settings and operating procedures for the
Icon system can be initiated.
3.1
Main View
5
6
7
6
3
10
11
12
1
Figure 8
Pos.
Description
Current position
Stack of Panels
Current speed
Order indicator
Heading indicator
Position indicator
Power visualisation
10
Toolbar
11
12
Statusbar
Page 6-25 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.2
Indicators
3.2.1
Heading Indicator
The heading indicator presents:
Actual vessel heading and heading setpoint (numerically and visualised)
Heading deviation and heading deviation alarm limit
Setting symbols
Figure 9 shows the heading indicator area.
Figure 9
Heading Indicator
Pos
Indication
Heading deviation
Page 6-26 of 62
Operating Instructions
Pos
Indication
The colours of the heading indicator (see figure 9) symbolizes the heading deviation as
follows:
Grey
Green
Yellow
Red
By selecting the Setting panel from the Stack of panels, a sub-menu will open where the
operator can change settings and options for the heading operation.
3.2.2
Order Indicator
The order indicator presents:
Visualisation of thruster force order and feedback (magnitude and direction relative to
midship)
Visualisation of thruster moment order and feedback (magnitude relative to midship)
Settings symbols.
Figure 10 shows the order indicator.
Page 6-27 of 62
Operating Instructions
6
5
1
Figure 10 Order Indicator
Pos
Indication
Page 6-28 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.2.3
Position Indicator
The position indicator shows the vessel position in relation to position setpoints,
estimated time of arrival to setpoint, and some setting status regarding positioning.
6
6
1
7
Figure 11 Position Indicator(during change position)
Pos
Indication
ETA, Estimated Time of Arrival, time left until new position setpoint is
reached. (Visible only in automatic change position operations.)
Page 6-29 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.2.4
Note:
If any sub-system does not comply with the class, DP operations for the
selected class may not be carried out. Demands on different class types
vary, depending on the classification society.
3.2.5
Selected DP class.
List of sub-system compliance with the selected class. See section 4.1
Basic Status Symbols for symbol descriptions.
Power
This indicator shows the used thrust power, divided on starboard and port power buses.
For further information on power distribution, see section 3.5.5 DP System.
Page 6-30 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.2.6
Speed Indicator
This indicator shows the vessel speed in all horizontal axes. The speed is also visualised
by the size of the symbol.
2
3
Page 6-31 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.2.7
1
2
3.2.8
Wind direction.
Page 6-32 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.3
Statusbar
The statusbar displays some vital information about current settings and status of the
Icon system. It also contains a couple of buttons.
FIX
1 2
7 8
10
LOW
11 12 13 14 15
3.3.1
Pos.
Description
10
11
12
13
14
15
System Status
The statusbar displays the Icon system status (1). The following table shows the possible
system states.
Symbol
Meaning
System active
System inactive
3.3.2
In Command/Give Command
The Icon system provides means for transfer of command control between the different
operator stations. Only one operator station can be in command at a given time.
Page 6-33 of 62
Operating Instructions
Indicator (2) shows the operator station status.
Symbol
Meaning
Operator station In command
3.3.3
Axes Control
Indicator (3) shows the way the axes of horizontal movement of the vessel are
controlled, see 2.9 Positioning Functions for details about how to change the settings.
The following table shows control symbols. In general, manual control applies when the
arrows point outwards, automatic control when the arrows point inwards and no control
when arrowheads are missing.
Symbol
Note:
3.3.4
Sway
Yaw
Joystick
Joystick
Joystick
Joystick
Joystick
Auto
Auto
Joystick
Auto
Joystick
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
No ctrl
No ctrl
Auto
The table shows just one of the possible control mode combinations
including No cntrl, but No cntrl can occur in various combinations with
Joystick and Auto.
Page 6-34 of 62
Operating Instructions
displayed as groups:
GPS, one symbol for each sensor.
Rel, relative position reference system status, i.e. radar and laser based.
Gyro compass status, one symbol for each gyro.
For more details about the sensors status symbols see 4.1 Basic Status Symbols.
3.3.5
Wind Compensation
Indicator (6) shows for which axes wind compensation is activated, see 3.3.5 Wind
Compensation for more details.
Symbol
in all axes
3.3.6
Setting
Hdg:Vessel
Pos:Vessel
Centre of view is fixed to the the centre of the vessel and the
orientation is fixed to the vessel's heading. The bow or stern is
up, depending on the physical operator station orientation on
the bridge.
Hdg: North
Pos: Vessel
Centre of view is fixed to the the centre of the vessel and the
orientation is fixed to earth (North up).
Hdg: Vessel
Pos: Setpoint
Hdg: North
Pos: Setpoint
Page 6-35 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.4
Stack of Panels
The stack of panels are, together with the joystick device and the positioning device, the
main tools for the operation of the Icon system. They are displayed, two at the time, on
the remote control display and on the main DP operator station display when set to splitscreen view.
All panels are built-up in the same way, with access to different sub-views. The subviews are tailored to the operational mode by enabling buttons for the most common/
important operations for the specific mode.
3.4.1
5
4
Description
Weight button, applicable for the Sensor and PosRef panels. Adjusts manual weight
for selected row incrementally.
Name list.
Scrollbar
By double tapping on a row in the list, the operator gets access to a sub-menu (specific
for each panels) where a specific value or setting can be changed. Multiple row
selections for changes can be done by a tap-and-slide with the finger over the desired
rows.
Page 6-36 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.4.2
3
2
6
4
Function
List for change between standard and optional operational functions (e.g.target
tracking)
Sub-view
Parameter
Description
Standard
Hdg
North/East
Target
Tracking
Fwd/Stbd
Dist/Crse
Lat/Long
Nrts/Ests
Hdg
North/East
Fwd/Stbd
Dist/Crse
Page 6-37 of 62
Operating Instructions
Sub-view
Waypoint
3.4.3
Parameter
Description
Range
Bearing
Add/Delete/Change
Any waypoint
1
Figure 20 PosRef Panel (example)
Pos
Function
Page 6-38 of 62
Operating Instructions
Sensors
Parameter
Description
All Position
Reference
Systems
Enable/Disable
Block/Unblock
Align
Weight
Zero
Absolute
Position (e.g.
DGPS)
Fixed
Relative
Position (e.g.
Cyscan/Radar)
Mobile
Page 6-39 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.4.4
Function
Description
Enable/Disable
Block/Unblock
Weight
Page 6-40 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.4.5
2
1
6
Figure 22 Trust Panel (example List View)
Pos
Indication
Thrust device
Page 6-41 of 62
Operating Instructions
5
4
1
2
Function
By selecting List view on the screen, a sub-menu will open where the operator can
change settings and options for each thrust device..
Sub-view
Parameter
Description
Overview
Enable/Disable
Pitch
Enable/Disable
Rpm
Enable/Disable
Dir
Enable/Disable
List
Page 6-42 of 62
Operating Instructions
Sub-view
Parameter
View
3.4.6
Description
A graphical visualisation of all thrust devices
showing Order, Direction and Feedback for
each device.
1
5
Function
Pause button.
The following table shows the parameter descriptions for the Control panel.
Axis
Parameter
Description
Surge
No cntrl/Joystick/Auto
Sway
No cntrl/Joystick/Auto
Yaw
No cntrl/Joystick/Auto
Page 6-43 of 62
Operating Instructions
Axis
Parameter
Description
Preset mode
Wind comp
Pause
Pause Off/Pause On
Page 6-44 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.4.7
1
2
Function
Parameter
Description
Position
Pos gain
Wind comp
Heading
Surge spd
Sway spd
Warn limit
Alarm limit
Hdg gain
Wind comp
Page 6-45 of 62
Operating Instructions
Sub-view
Allocation
Target
(optional)
Waypoint
(optional)
System
Display
Units &
Formats
Pivot
Page 6-46 of 62
Parameter
Description
Acc Factor
Acceleration factor.
Warn limit
Alarm limit
Joystick (High/Medium/Low)
Joystick sensitivity.
High/Medium/Low
High/Medium/Low
Auto /
Auto /
Hdg SP opt
Hdg SP offset
Reaction radius
Reaction radius.
Wp Radius
Hdg SP opt
Hdg SP offset
Manual Draft
Vessel draught.
Power Lim
Power limitation
DP Class
DP system class.
Theme
Show trackplot
Trackplot freq
Plot density
Trackplot duration
Autozoom, new SP
DDDMMSS,S or DDDMM,MMM
D=Degree, M=Minute, S=Seconds
Free select/Fore/Midship/Aft
Operating Instructions
Sub-view
Parameter
Description
2.
Select the sub-menu Display and then double-tap on the Theme row.
A pop-up dialogue appears.
3.
Page 6-47 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.4.8
Parameter
Description
Target
Windcomp On/Off
Target Start/Exit
Pause off/on
Waypoint
Towing
Page 6-48 of 62
Radius
Radius to target
Range
Range to target
Target
External target
Windcomp On/Off
Track Start/Exit
Pause off/on
Windcomp On/Off
Alongforce On/Off
Pause off/on
Alongforce
Bias force
Operating Instructions
6
1
Function
Range to target.
Operational function
Page 6-49 of 62
Operating Instructions
3
2
4
Function
Operational function
Page 6-50 of 62
Operating Instructions
Towing Operation
Function
Operational function
Page 6-51 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.4.9
3
Figure 29 Performance Panel (example)
Pos.
Description
Heading indicator
Speed indicator
Order indicator
Page 6-52 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.5
Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons for the operator to alter the look of the GUI, choose which
sub-menus to be shown and change the operational settings of the system.
From the toolbar it is possible to reach all Icon functions and settings. The toolbar also
consists of buttons for short-cuts to frequently used functions of the Icon system.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 30 Toolbar (example)
Pos
Function
Camera zoom in
Opens the Cam cntrl page, from where it is possible to control the
camera view of the vessel relative to the surroundings. It is possible to
pan, rotate and zoom the vessel in the grid. It is also possible to tilt the
grid to achieve a 3D visualisation effect.
10
11
12
Page 6-53 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.5.1
Views
The Split button, toggles between the following views:
Splitscreen view all main areas of the GUI is displayed on the same screen.
Fullscreen view the panels are not displayed in the main view. (But on a remote
display.)
3.5.2
Zoom
With the zoom (4,5) buttons, the operator can zoom the visualisation in the main area of
the screen in or out respectively.
3.5.3
Camera Control
By means of the Cam cntrl (6) setting, the operator have full control on how the vessel
position in the grid net is visualised in the main area of the display.
There are two main ways to manage the camera control, Auto and Manual control.
Auto: Hdg the visualisation in the main area is from either vessel or from a north
view.
Auto: Pos the visualisation in the main area is from either vessel or from a setpoint
view.
Auto: Top, Tilt1, 2, 3,4 the visualisation in the main area can be tilted in predefined
3D-views.
Manual: the visualisation in the main area can be tilted in a 3D-view, it is also
possible to pan the vessel on the grid, as well as to rotate it. See Figure 31 Camera
Control.
om
Zo
Pan
Tilt
Rotate
3.5.4
Alarms
In the alarms page (7), all active alarms are listed chronologically with the latest alarm
on top. The operator has the ability to acknowledge one alarm at the time, or all alarms
on the page simultaneously. There is also a separate Alarm history page, containing all
(old) alarms, see 4.4 Alarm Status Symbols and 4.5 Alarm Handling.
Page 6-54 of 62
Operating Instructions
3.5.5
DP System
The DP System pages presents an overview of the status of:
The Icon system itself
Sensors The operator has the ability to enable/disable any sensor. (This can also be
done from the Sensor panel.)
Position reference systems The operator has the ability to enable/disable any position
reference system. (This can also be done from the PosRef panel.)
Thruster devices The operator has the ability to enable/disable any thruster device.
(This can also be done from the Thrust panel.)
Power system The operator can view the available and consumed power as well as
the bus tie.
By tapping the DPSystem (8) button in the toolbar on the screen, the DP System
display appears. From this page, the operator can:
View the system status
View the machine power distribution status
View measurements values for sensors, position reference systems and thrusters
Enable/Disable sensors, position reference systems and thrusters.
4
5
6
Part of system
DP system B
DP system C
DP system A
Controllers
Page 6-55 of 62
Operating Instructions
Pos
Part of system
Thrust devices
For more information about DP system configuration, see chapter 3 System Description.
3.5.6
Monitoring
The monitoring pages presents an overview of all monitored items with respect to the
chosen DP class.
By tapping the Monitoring (9) button in the toolbar on the screen, the system
monitoring display appears. From this page, the operator can:
View the alarm list and the event log
Acknowledge alarms
View trends for sensors, position reference systems, thrust devices and available/
consumed power
Download system log files to a USB memory for further analysis, see chapter
8 Trouble Shooting.
3.5.7
Operation
The operation pages present detailed information about the current settings of the Icon
system.
By tapping the Operation (10)
button in the toolbar on the screen, the Operation display appears. From this page, the
operator can perform the exact same operation as from the Control, Change and
Page 6-56 of 62
Operating Instructions
Settings panels.
In addition to this, the operator can also use the built-in trainer, which comprises a vessel
simulator and a dedicated graphical user interface for set-up of the simulated operational
conditions.
3.5.8
Print
The Icon system is equipped with two printers:
One impact dot matrix printer with roll paper stand, for printing of alarms. This printer
continuously prints all alarms as they get active, are being acknowledged and reset.
One high-resolution hardcopy color printer, for printing of trendings and screen-shots
of the GUI. The operator can configure the look of the GUI and then press the
Print (11) button.
Page 6-57 of 62
Operating Instructions
!
?
Colour
Meaning
White
Grey
Green
Yellow
Warning
Red
Error
Red
Grey
Blocked
Page 6-58 of 62
Colour
Meaning
Red
Yellow
Not aligned.
Yellow
Aligning.
Yellow
Aligning to estimate.
Green
Zero reference
Green
Aligned.
Red
Cannot align.
Yellow
Aligned to estimate.
Operating Instructions
4.3
Color
Meaning
Grey
Yellow
Yellow
Towing is enabled
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
White
Trainer is on
FIX
LOW
Page 6-59 of 62
Operating Instructions
4.4
Note:
The following alarm status symbols are used by the Icon system.
Symbol
Colour
Meaning
Red
Red
Blue
Yellow
Yellow
Blue
Alarms:
Warnings:
Page 6-60 of 62
Operating Instructions
4.5
Alarm Handling
When an alarm appears, the alarm indicator is flashing and an alarm text is clearly
displayed on the screen.
The alarms page is accessed from the statusbar in the main display area:
Note:
Note:
1.
Tap the Alarm button or the Menu button in the statusbar to open the alarms
page. If using the Menu button, the Alarm button in the appearing Monitoring
window may be needed to tap.
2.
Select an alarm in the alarms list and press the Ack button to acknowledge the
alarm (or the Ack all button to acknowledge all alarms on the page
simultaneously).
3.
Refer to chapter 8 Trouble Shooting for a detailed description of the alarm text.
4.
Page 6-61 of 62
Operating Instructions
Page 6-62 of 62
Maintenance Instructions
1
3
Routine Maintenance ...............................................................................7-4
3.1 Operator Stations .......................................................................................7-4
3.1.1 Lamp Test .......................................................................................7-4
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................7-5
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
Maintenance Instructions
The following warnings and cautions are for your safety, for the prevention of injury
from electric shock and for a safe operation of the equipment. Also see chapter 2 Safety.
While performing maintenance tasks, always position the equipment (and yourself) on
a stable and safe surface.
Ensure that all accessible cables cannot be walked on, tripped over or damaged by
transportable items.
If a device is damaged or fails to function correctly, disconnect it from the power
source. Refer to the system drawings to locate the nearest fuse/circuit breaker, see
chapter 12 Design Drawings.
Do not attempt to repair any sub-component yourself consult a qualified Rolls-Royce
service technician.
A serious electrical shock hazard exists within the covers of some components (i.e.
displays) and on marked locations inside the cabinets (marked with 220 VAC or
24 VDC).
The life span of electronics can be affected by damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
This can happen if a charged tool or person touches a component. Therefore it is very
important that all tools and personnel are discharged by touching a grounded point
before the printed circuit board or any of the components are touched. It is equally
important to discharge the package with the new component before opening it.
A person walking on a carpet can be charged with up to fifteen thousand volt (15000 V).
In worst case, some sensitive components can be destroyed when discharged with about
100 V.
Page 7-3 of 12
Maintenance Instructions
3 Routine Maintenance
3.1
3.1.1
Note:
Operator Stations
Lamp Test
The lamp test function is not available when the operator station is in
command.
1.
All indicators on the joystick device should lit and the alarm buzzer should sound
for 10 seconds.
4 Periodic Maintenance
4.1
General
Check connectors on installed connection points, carefully clean as necessary.
Check for any loose terminals due to vibration, fasten as necessary.
4.2
Cabinets
Ensure that the cabinet is properly fastened.
Keep the exterior of the cabinet clean. If needed, carefully clean with a soft anti static
cloth and a non-abrasive cleaning agent.
Keep the interior of the cabinet clean.
If needed, carefully clean the inside the cabinet using a soft anti static cloth and a nonabrasive cleaning agent.
When necessary, carefully vacuum-clean the inside of the cabinet avoiding to touch
any components.
Cabinets can be equipped with a fan. When necesary, carefully vacum-clean the fan
filter.
Ensure that the cabinet doors are closed.
4.3
Operator Stations
Ensure that the operator station is properly fastened.
Check connectors on installed connection points, carefully clean as necessary.
Page 7-4 of 12
Maintenance Instructions
Keep the exterior of the operator station clean. If needed, carefully clean with a soft
cloth and a non-abrasive cleaning agent.
4.4
5 Troubleshooting
The diagnostics of errors are given by the issued alarms. The troubleshooting is based
on the proposed error tracing and corrective actions given in the alarm list and
description. For details, see chapter 8 Trouble Shooting.
6 Corrective Maintenance
6.1
General
The main tasks of corrective maintenance to be covered in this manual, are replacing
parts/units inside cabinets or on operator stations and, if applicable, tuning and set-up of
a new unit.
6.2
Operator Devices
4
Figure 1
Operator Device
Remove the rubber protection plugs (1) that cover the screw heads on the top side
Page 7-5 of 12
Maintenance Instructions
of the operator device.
6.3
2.
3.
Carefully pull the operator device straight up from the top of where it is mounted.
4.
Unplug the CAN and power connector (2) from the bottom of the operator device.
5.
Set the addresses on the node address switches (4) on the new operator device
identical to the device, being replaced.
6.
Verify that the terminal resistors (3) are identical on the device being replaced.
7.
8.
Calibrate all operator devices on the operator station where the operator device has
been changed, see chapter 6 Operating Instructions for details.
10,4 Display
4
1
2
Figure 2
10,4 Display
Disconnect the power supply to the display, by removing the fuse for the operator
station.
2.
3.
6.3.1
4.
Loosen the 4 screws that hold the display in place, and remove the display.
5.
6.
Fan Filter
When necessary, clean display fan filter (4) with vacuum cleaner.
Page 7-6 of 12
Maintenance Instructions
If necessary, change fan filter for 10,4 display by ripping the old filter off. It is fitted
with velcro. Fit a new fan filter in place.
6.4
19 Display
Back side
Bottom side
Figure 3
19 Display
Disconnect the power supply to the display by removing the fuse on the operator
station.
2.
3.
Loosen the screws that hold the display in place, and remove the display.
4.
Page 7-7 of 12
Maintenance Instructions
6.5
DC Power Supply
DC
OK
Output DC
Adjust
DC OK
powerb
ox
Figure 4
DC Power Supply
6.6
1.
Release the fuse for the DC Power Supply, see chapter 12 Design Drawings for
details.
2.
Unplug the power connections to the unit. 220 VAC (bottom) 24 VDC (top).
3.
Remove the unit from the rail. It is locked with a clip at the bottom of the unit
4.
5.
Adjust the output voltage to 26 VDC for the primary unit and to 25 VDC for the
secondary unit (if installed).
Fuses
There are two general types of fuses, automatic and glass cartridge fuses.
Automatic fuses are reset by pulling the fuse switch to open (lower) position, and then
pulling it up to closed (upper) position again. A red LED is lit on the blown automatic
fuse.
Glass cartridge fuses are changed by means of a plier or the protective cover around
the fuse. A lit green LED indicates that the glass cartridge fuse is OK. An extinguished
LED indicates that the fuse is blown.
Study the appropriate design drawings to find the fuse to reset or change, see chapter
12 Design Drawings for details.
Replaceable fuses are according to the fuse list (see inside door on corresponding
cabinet).
Page 7-8 of 12
Maintenance Instructions
6.7
Printer
To change toner, ink cartridges, toner tapes, or a complete printer, see chapter
14 Subsuppliers Manuals for instructions.
6.8
UPS
The fan filter on the UPS must be changed periodically. For instructions on when and
how to change UPS fan filters, see chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals.
6.9
Note:
Switch
The new switch must be readily configured.
2.
3.
Remove the Ethernet cables and optical fiber cables (if applicable).
4.
5.
4
Figure 5
Marine Controller
Page 7-9 of 12
Maintenance Instructions
To replace the controller (Rolls-Royce Marine Controller), proceed as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Loosen the 6 screws that hold the controller in place, and remove the controller.
6.
7.
1
Front side
3
4
Back side
6
Figure 6
2.
Disconnect the power supply to the computer by removing the fuse on the operator
station.
Page 7-10 of 12
Maintenance Instructions
See chapter 12 Design Drawings for details.
3.
4.
5.
Loosen the 4 screws that hold the computer in place and remove the unit.
6.
Front
1
2
Circuit Board
5
Figure 7
The CAN I/O module is located in the Control Cabinet. To change the internal circuit
board, proceed as follows:
1.
Disconnect the power and CAN connector (2), which is located in the front.
Page 7-11 of 12
Maintenance Instructions
2.
3.
Loosen the 3 screws (1) that hold the top cover of the CAN I/O module in place
and remove the top cover.
4.
Remove the circuit board from the CAN I/O module by pulling it staight out from
the housing.
5.
Set the address (4) and jumpers (5) on the new CAN I/O module circuit board
identical to the one being replaced.
6.
6.14 Sensors
Please refer to the corresponding subsuppliers manual for details, see chapter
14 Subsuppliers Manuals.
Page 7-12 of 12
Trouble Shooting
1
General ......................................................................................................8-3
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Alarms .......................................................................................................8-5
General .......................................................................................................8-5
Cabinet Alarms ...........................................................................................8-5
Consequence Analysis Alarms ...................................................................8-6
Control System Alarms ...............................................................................8-6
Operator Station Alarms .............................................................................8-8
Power System Alarms ..............................................................................8-10
Sensor and Position Reference System Alarms .......................................8-11
Thruster System Alarms ...........................................................................8-15
UPS Alarms ..............................................................................................8-18
Trouble Shooting
1 General
The aim for the troubleshooting chapter is to be of assistance to the operator during fault
tracing of the Icon system. The main parts of the chapter are:
System Log Download - this section describes how the operator can, after fault tracing
using the the alarm list, download the system log to a USB memory, and send it for
further analysis to Rolls-Royce.
Alarms - this section contains a list with all typical alarms of the Icon system,
including alarm text, and possible cause, effect and proposed action for each alarm.
Insert the USB memory to the USB port of the operator station computer or the
remote control display.
2.
Tap the Monitoring button on the toolbar in the main view to open the
Monitoring page.
3.
Figure 1
Page 8-3 of 18
Trouble Shooting
The complete system health log consists of the following files:
One health log file for each main operator station. (This information is used
for the GUI software. Contains data for the last 24 hours or since the last
reboot.)
One status log file for each controller in the control cabinet(s). (Contains
data for the last 24 hours or since the last reboot.)
An alarm log file from the display where the log is being downloaded.
A playback log file for the last hour.
Note:
There is a maximum file size for the log files. If there has been a substantial
activity/many alarms, the history may be shortened.
4.
To download a playback log for a specific single hour during the last four weeks:
4.1. Select Util in the Monitoring page.
4.2. Tap on the HourLog tab.
Figure 2
Page 8-4 of 18
Trouble Shooting
3 Alarms
3.1 General
The diagnostics of errors are given by the issued alarms. The troubleshooting is based
on the proposed fault tracing and corrective actions given in the alarm descriptions.
See chapter 12 Design Drawings for wiring diagrams for the Icon system and applicable
cabinets.
Alarm Text
Cause:
A failure has occurred on the I/O bus.
Effect:
Connected equipment to the I/O bus will not be available to the system.
Action:
Check the I/O bus cables/wiring. Ensure that all connectors are in place
for each connected module. Verify that the CAN-bus termination (60
Ohm between the data signals).
Cause:
An failure or malfunction is detected on the I/O module.
Effect:
Dependant of failure the system may be disabled for operation until the
failure is fixed.
Action:
Check module, connectors/wires and internal I/O Modules.
Cabinet: HW failure in
<Equipment name>
Cause:
A hardware signal indicates a failure in the unit.
Effect:
Dependant of failure the unit may be disabled for operation until the
failure is fixed.
Action:
Check status on the unit, connectors/wires and mains power supply.
Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the communication is
lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.
Page 8-5 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the communication is
lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.
Alarm Text
Cause:
There are not enough capability for the system to perform safely in
case of a worst case failure.
Effect:
The system performance may not be sufficient with respect to the
operational requirement. In case of a single worst case failure,
e.g. blackout on one side, the vessel will most likely drift off.
Action:
If available, consider to enable more power (thrust or effect) into
the system. Otherwise the system is operating outside the normal
limits and must be watched carefully.
Cause:
There are not enough thrusters available for the system to perform
safely in case of a worst case failure.
Effect:
In case of a single worst case failure (e.g. blackout of one side) the
vessel will most likely drift off.
Action:
If available, consider enabling more thrusters. If not, the system is
operating outside the normal limits and must be watched carefully.
Alarm Text
Page 8-6 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
Cause:
The controller (DPC) has stopped or lost its network
communication with the other controllers (DPC).
Effect:
The DPC is not a part of the control system until the system is
restarted.
Action:
Reset the system to enable all controllers , Check network
connection.
10
Cause:
The controller (DPC) is out of synchronisation with respect to the
other controllers.
Effect:
The DPC is not a part of the control system until the system is
restarted.
Action:
Reset the system to enable synchronisation of all controllers.
11
12
Cause:
In waypoint tracking function, the vessel has a large deviation from
the desired track.
Effect:
No effect - the system will attempt to decrease the cross track
deviation.
Action:
Increase the limits, adjust the operation parameters.
13
Lost target
Cause:
In target tracking function, measurement giving the relative
position of the target is lost (e.g. HPR, laser).
Effect:
Tracking of the target will no longer be possible, and the vessel will
calm down.
Action:
Dependant of operating or weather conditions. Establish contact
with the target (e.g. reflectors/transponders).
14
Out of heading
Cause:
Heading deviation exceeds alarm limits, i.e. the difference
between actual heading and set point heading is larger than the
operator defined alarm limit.
Effect:
No effect - the system will attempt to decrease the heading
deviation.
Action:
Increase the limits and adjust the operation parameters.
Page 8-7 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
15
Out of position
Cause:
Position deviation exceeds alarm limits, i.e. the difference between
actual position and set point position is larger than the operator
defined alarm limit.
Effect:
No effect - the system will attempt to decrease the position
deviation.
Action:
Increase the limits, adjust the operation parameters.
16
17
Cause:
The alarm buzzer is disabled by the operator.
Effect:
No audible alarm will be presented to the operator in case of a
system alarm.
Action:
Enable the Buzzer in the system settings menu.
18
Cause:
The measurements indicates that the status is close to the
deviation limit.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
Alarm Text
19
Cause:
The printer is not available to the system.
Effect:
No alarms will be printed, the alarms will be buffered by the
computer.
Action:
Verify power to printer. Enable the Printer ("Online"/"Select") ,
Check cable to printer.
Page 8-8 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
20
Cause:
The printer is not available to the system.
Effect:
No alarms will be printed, the alarms will be buffered by the
computer.
Action:
Enable the Printer ("Online"/"Select").
21
22
Cause:
A hardware signal indicates a failure in the unit.
Effect:
Dependant of the failure the unit may be disabled for operation
until the failure is fixed.
Action:
Check status on the unit, connectors/wires and main power supply.
23
Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the
communication is lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.
24
Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the
communication is lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.
25
Cause:
The received order is outside the expected range.
Effect:
The device will not available for operation.
Action:
Check device, connectors/wires and internal I/O Modules.
26
Failure on all OS
Cause:
All of the Operator Stations reports one or several failures.
Effect:
Proper operator interaction with the system may be difficult.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and communication I/O.
Page 8-9 of 18
Trouble Shooting
Alarm Text
27
Cause:
The received measurements are not consistent with respect to the
vessels capabilities.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
28
Cause:
An error is detected on one or more feedbacks from the power
system.
Effect:
The power limitation function will estimate the power consumption.
The power limitation function will be degraded.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
29
Cause:
The received measurements are outside the expected range for
this kind of equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. The Load signal will not
be used by the system.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
30
Page 8-10 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
31
Cause:
An error is detected on one or more feedbacks from the power
system.
Effect:
The power limitation function will estimate the power consumption.
The power limitation function will be degraded.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
32
Cause:
An error is detected on one or more feedbacks from the power
system.
Effect:
Erronous signals will be estimated. The power limitation function
might be degraded.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
Alarm Text
33
Cause:
The data received from the equipment indicates a malfunction,
and the equipment is disabled by the system.
Effect:
The connected sub-system is not available to the system, and a
reduced performance may be the result.
Action:
Consider to adjust the unit settings, or revise the selected
operational selections.
34
Cause:
Based on a linear regression (a straight line through the received
measurements in the last approx. 15 seconds) the measurement
differ from the expected range.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Consider to adjust the unit settings, or revise the selected
operational selections.
Page 8-11 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
35
Cause:
The horizontal dilution of precision is high, which indicates a poor
satellite configuration for the GNSS system.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Consider to adjust the unit settings, or revise the selected
operational selections.
36
37
Cause:
Failure detected in the received NMEA telegram. Indicates a
malfunction in connected equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. Data will not be used
by the system.
Action:
Verify the unit setup, power and cabling.
38
Cause:
The measurement difference between two sensors is critically
high.
Effect:
The sensor will be Auto Disabled, and not longer used by the
system.
Action:
Check unit. Verify appplicable settings.
39
Cause:
The measurements from the sensor has changed in a large step,
and then been stabilized. This indicates that a failure has occurred
in the sensor.
Effect:
The sensor will be Auto Disabled, and not longer be used by the
system.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
40
Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the
communication is lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.
Page 8-12 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
41
Cause:
The measurement difference between two sensors is higher than
expected.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced.
Action:
Check unit.
42
Cause:
The measurements indicates that the sensor has frozen (i.e.
measurements is frozen for a period of time). Readings from
sensor / position reference system have not changed for a period
of time.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. Measurement from the
affected sensor / position reference system will be weighted down.
Action:
Check unit.
43
Cause:
The received measurements are outside the expected range for
this kind of equipment. Indicates a malfunction in the connected
equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. Unit will be auto
disabled.
Action:
Check unit.
44
Cause:
More than two sensors/position reference systems in use. The
difference between this measurement average and the average
between the other sensor measurements is high.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. The unit will be
weighted down by the system.
Action:
Check unit.
45
Cause:
More than two sensors/position reference systems in use. The
difference between this measurement average and the average
between the other sensor measurements is too high.
Effect:
Followed by Auto Disabled - and the unit is not available to the
system.
Action:
Check unit.
46
Cause:
The GNSS system has no correction signals.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. DPGS system will be
weighted down by the system.
Action:
Change correction signal base, or enable the backup correction
signal system.
Page 8-13 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
47
Cause:
The GNSS system does not have enough satellites to give position
measurement.
Effect:
No positon measurement will be available from the affected unit.
Action:
If problem persists, check unit, cabling, antenna.
48
Cause:
The differential signal available to the GNSS system is old.
Effect:
The accuracy of affected unit might be degraded. Unit will
gradually be weighted down by system.
Action:
Change correction signal base, or enable the backup correction
signal system.
49
Cause:
The measurements from the sensor has changed in a step, and
then been stabilized. This may indicate that a failure has occurred
in the sensor.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal. Unit will be weighted down by
the system.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
50
Cause:
Based on a linear regression (a straight line through the received
measurements in the last approx. 15 seconds) the measurement
differ from the expected values. This alarm is followed by "Auto
Disable".
Effect:
The sensor will be Auto Disabled, and not longer be used by the
system.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
51
Cause:
Some wild points in the measurements are detected.
Effect:
A quality error on the unit signal is detected. The wild points will
not be used.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
52
Cause:
There are no valid measurements and these signals are lost
during automatic control.
Effect:
The system will use the internal vessel model and thrust estimates
to predict the actual value.
Action:
If possible, enable more position reference systems to the system.
Page 8-14 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
53
Cause:
No time signal is available from and GNSS system.
Effect:
If problem persists, system time will drift away from correct time.
Action:
Check GNSS units.
Alarm Text
54
55
Cause:
A broken wire failure or a signal overflow is detected.
Effect:
Wrong data may have been received, and data will not be used.
Action:
Check signal, wires and connections. Most likely a wire is not
properly connected.
56
Cause:
The data received from the equipment indicates an malfunction,
and the equipment is disabled by the system.
Effect:
The connected sub-system is not available to the system, and a
reduced performance may be the result.
Action:
Consider to adjust the unit settings, or revise the selected
operational selections.
57
Cause:
The reported feedback value is out of range (i.e. the received
value is not possible according to the system setup).
Effect:
The measurement will not be used, the system will use the order
signals vessel model and estimates to predict the actual value.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O. If applicable, check if
there are any failures reported on the remote control system.
Page 8-15 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
58
Cause:
Status signal is received in a wrong sequence (i.e. an error is
detected in signal from remote control system).
Effect:
The remote control system is not be available for control.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
system. Check the I/O modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are
used).
59
Cause:
The reported breaker status is inconsistent with respect to the
system setup.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Check connections and possible open circuits.
60
Cause:
The I/O Module reports a malfunction.
Effect:
The I/O Module status will not be available to the system.
Action:
Verify the unit setup, power and cabling.
61
Cause:
The received measurements are outside the expected range for
this kind of equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. The Load signal will not
be used by the system.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
62
Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the
communication is lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.
63
Cause:
The thruster is no longer available for the system (Acknowledge
signal is lost).
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced and will not consider the
actual thruster.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
systems. Change parameters for the desired action.
Page 8-16 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
64
Cause:
The commanded thrust cannot be obtained due to insufficient
available power on the power bus that the thruster is connected to.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced.
Action:
Start more generators or reduce other loads.
65
Cause:
The feedback signal does not follow the commanded set point.
Effect:
The thruster will not give force as commanded. Performance might
be degraded.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
system. Check the I/O modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are
used). Consider disabling thruster.
66
Cause:
Logical signals from the remote thruster control have behaved in
an unexpected way.
Effect:
The thruster could be lost for DP. The system will continue as
normal.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on one of the remote
control systems or the power management system. Check the I/O
modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are used).
67
Cause:
The system has not received an expected activation of the
Acknowledge signal from the remote control system.
Effect:
The remote control system will not be available for control.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
system. Check the I/O modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are
used).
68
Cause:
A release of the Acknowledge signal is missing from the remote
control system.
Effect:
The remote control system will not be controlled by DP System.
Status is set to Idle.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
system. Check the I/O modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are
used).
69
Cause:
A broken wire failure or a signal overflow is detected.
Effect:
Wrong data may have been received, and data will not be used.
Action:
Check signal, wires and connections. Most likely a wire is not
properly connected.
Page 8-17 of 18
Trouble Shooting
Alarm Text
70
Cause:
A hardware signal indicates a failure in the unit.
Effect:
Dependant of failure the unit may be disabled for operation until
the failure is fixed.
Action:
Check status on the unit, connectors/wires and mains power
supply.
Page 8-18 of 18
Contact Information
1
Contact Information .................................................................................9-3
1.1 Rolls-Royce Marine, Control Aalesund ....................................................9-3
1.2 World-Wide Support Organisation ..............................................................9-3
Contact List
1 Contact Information
1.1
1.2
E-mail:
dpsupport@rolls-royce.com
Postal address:
Rolls-Royce Marine AS
Control Aalesund
Service Box 22
N-6025 lesund
Norway
Visiting address:
Rolls-Royce Marine AS
Control Aalesund
Parkgata 3
3rd floor
lesund, Norway
Tel:
+47 81 52 00 70
Fax:
+47 70 10 37 01
+47 81 52 00 75
+47 90 01 09 97
Tel: +45 99 30 36 00
Fax: +45 99 30 36 01
Fax: +35 82 83 79 48 04
Tel: +47 81 52 00 70
Fax: +47 70 10 37 01
Longva (Automation)
Tel: +47 81 52 00 70
Fax: +47 70 20 83 51
FINLAND
Rauma (Propulsion/Deck
machinery)
FRANCE
Rungis (Service)
GERMANY
Norderstedt (Service)
THE NETHERLANDS
Rotterdam, Pernis
NORWAY
Tel: +47 81 52 00 70
Fax: +47 23 31 04 99
Tel: +47 81 52 00 70
Fax: +47 70 01 40 13
Ulsteinvik (Propulsion)
Tel: +47 81 52 00 70
Fax: +47 70 01 40 14
Tel: +46 55 08 40 00
Fax: +46 55 01 81 90
Tel: +44 13 83 82 31 88
Fax: +44 13 83 82 40 38
SWEDEN
Kristinehamn (Propulsion)
UNITED KINGDOM
Dunfermline (Motion Control)
Page 9-3 of 6
Contact List
NORTHERN EUROPE
Portsmouth (Marine Electrical
Systems)
Tel: +44 23 92 31 00 00
Fax: +44 23 92 31 00 01
Fax: +39 01 05 72 19 50
Tel: +30 21 04 59 96 88
Fax: +30 21 04 59 96 87
Madrid
Tarragona
Melbourne
Perth
Beijing (Merchant)
Shanghai
Tel: +86 21 63 87 88 08
Fax: +86 21 53 82 57 93
Tel: +91 22 56 40 38 38
Fax: +91 22 56 40 38 18
Tel: +65 68 62 19 01
Fax: +65 68 63 21 65
Tel: +64 39 62 12 30
Fax: +64 39 62 12 31
SOUTHERN EUROPE
ITALY
Genova
CROATIA
Rijeka
GREECE
Piraeus
SPAIN
MIDDLE EAST
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Dubai
ASIA PACIFIC
AUSTRALIA
CHINA
INDIA
Mumbai
SINGAPORE
Singapore
NEW ZEALAND
Christchurch
NORTHEAST ASIA
JAPAN
Tokyo
Tel: +55 21 38 60 87 87
Fax: +55 21 38 60 44 10
REPUBLIC OF KOREA
Busan
AMERICAS
BRAZIL
Rio de Janeiro
CANADA
Page 9-4 of 6
Contact List
AMERICAS
Halifax
Tel: +1 90 24 68 28 83
Fax: +1 90 24 68 27 59
Vancouver (Propulsion)
Tel: +1 60 49 42 11 00
Fax: +1 60 49 42 11 25
Houston
Tel: +1 71 32 73 77 00
Fax: +1 71 32 73 77 76
Miramar
Tel: +1 95 44 36 71 00
Fax: +1 95 44 36 71 01
New Orleans
Tel: +1 50 44 64 45 61
Fax: +1 50 44 64 45 65
Seattle
Tel: +1 20 67 82 91 90
Fax: +1 20 67 82 01 76
USA
Page 9-5 of 6
Contact List
Page 9-6 of 6
Spare Parts
1
Ordering Spare Parts .............................................................................10-3
1.1 Ordering Spare Parts Separately .............................................................10-3
1.2 Ordering Spare Parts Kit ..........................................................................10-4
1.2.1 Parts Included in Spare Parts Kit ..................................................10-4
2
3
Preservation and Handling ....................................................................10-5
3.1 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................10-5
3.2 Delivery Check .........................................................................................10-5
10
Spare Parts
spares.ulstein@rolls-royce.com
Phone:
+47 81 52 00 75
Fax:
+47 70 01 40 12
+47 90 01 09 97
There are two ways of ordering spare parts for the Icon system:
components ordered separately
spare parts kits put together to match the various system configuration.
1.1
Page 10-3 of 6
10
Spare Parts
1.2
1.2.1
Qty
Marine Controller
Fuse kit
Joystick device
Positioning device
Relay
For operator stations integrated in Operators Chair or for additional operator station of
limited equipped type:
10.4 Remote control display
Note:
Page 10-4 of 6
Spare Parts
Electrostatic Discharge
The life span of electronics can be affected by damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
This can happen if a charged tool or person touches a component. Therefore it is very
important that all tools and personnel are discharged by touching ground before the
printed circuit board or any of the components are touched. It is equally important to
discharge the package with the new component before opening it.
A person walking on a carpet can be charged with up to fifteen thousand volt (15000 V).
In worst case, some sensitive components can be destroyed when discharged with about
100 V.
Note:
3.2
It is very important that you are connected to ground before touching any
electronic components or printed circuit boards.
Delivery Check
Upon arrival of spare parts at the destination, all items must be inspected. The following
steps are to be taken:
Compare the shipment to the list of contents attached to the shipment and/or the
packing list. If there is any discrepancy, Rolls-Royce must be informed immediately.
Inspect for damage caused during transportation.
A visual check must be performed on all parts of the shipment; pallets, cardboard boxes
and wooden boxes. If there is any damage (i.e. signs of water immersion, dropping or
other mishandling), the crates must be opened for inspection.
Note:
A damage report, listing damages found and possibly including pictures of the damaged
parts, should be produced. The report must then be sent to Rolls-Royce immediately.
Page 10-5 of 6
10
Spare Parts
Page 10-6 of 6
Tools
1
General ....................................................................................................11-3
2
Tools ........................................................................................................11-3
2.1 Recommended Tools ...............................................................................11-3
2.2 Special Tools ............................................................................................11-3
11
Tools
1 General
This chapter lists required and recommended tools for installation and maintenance
purposes.
Note:
For maintenance and/or replacement of the sensors and position reference systems, the
separate manual from each manufacturer must be used.
Note:
2 Tools
2.1 Recommended Tools
The following tools are recommended for the installation and maintenance of a Poscon
or an Icon system:
Standard network technician tools
Standard electrician tools
Optic fibre termination tools (if applicable).
Caution: Always use appropriate tools for all maintenance tasks. Use of
inappropriate tools can lead to system malfunction.
Page 11-3 of 4
11
Tools
Page 11-4 of 4
Design Drawings
1
General ....................................................................................................12-3
12
Design Drawings
1 General
This chapter comprises the following types of design drawings (see the Main Item List
for a complete listing):
Suffix
Name
Description
01LI
01LC
Cable List
01LN
Network List
01DC
Cable Diagram
0xDW
Wiring Diagram
01DM
Mechanical Drawing
01DL
Layout Drawing
12
Page 12-3 of 4
Design Drawings
Page 12-4 of 4
Revision
1
13
Copyright 2006 Rolls-Royce plc
The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be copied or communicated to a third party, or
used for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of Rolls-Royce Marine plc.
This information is given in good faith based upon the latest information available to Rolls-Royce plc, no warranty or representation
is given concerning such information, which must not be taken as establishing any contractual or other commitment binding upon
Rolls-Royce plc or any of its subsidiary or associated companies.
13
Doc. No.: CAA-000001-13MX
Revision: A
Revision
1 Revision History
This chapter specifies the complete compilation of documents and their revision for this
manual. It also contains the document number and revision of the complete manual. This
information is also found on the first page of this manual.
An Installation Manual comprise the following type of documents:
Suffix
Title
01MI
Introduction
02MX
Safety
03MX
System Description
04MX
Delivery Specification
05MX
Technical Data
06MI
07MI
Installation
08MI
Commissioning
09MX
Contact List
10MI
Final Inspection
11MX
Tools
12MX
Design Drawings
13MX
Revision
14MX
Subsuppliers Manuals
Title
01MU
Introduction
02MX
Safety
03MX
System Description
04MX
Delivery Specification
05MX
Technical Data
06MU
Operating Instructions
07MU
Maintenance Instructions
08MU
Trouble Shooting
09MX
Contact List
10MU
Spare Parts
11MX
Tools
12MX
Design Drawings
13MX
Revision
14MX
Subsuppliers Manuals
13
Doc. No.: CAA-000001-13MX
Revision: A
Page 13-3 of 4
Revision
13
Page 13-4 of 4
Revisions
Document Revisions
User Manual
Chapter/Title
Document ID
01
Introduction
CAA-021001-01MU
02
Safety
CAA-000001-02MX
03
System Description
CAA-022001-03MX
04
Delivery Specification
CAA-000001-04MX
05
Technical Data
CAA-021001-05MX
06
Operating Instruction
CAA-021001-06MU
07
Maintenance Instructions
CAA-021001-07MU
08
Trouble Shooting
CAA-021001-08MU
09
Contact List
CAA-000001-09MX
10
Spare parts
CAA-021001-10MU
11
Tools
CAA-000001-11MX
12
Design drawings
CAA-000001-12MX
- System Drawings
Main Item List
CAA-110734-01LI
Cable Diagram
CAA-110734-01DC
07-05-11
B
Cable List
CAA-110734-01LC
07-05-11
Wiring Diagram
CAA-110734-00DW
07-04-17
Wiring Diagram
CAA-110734-01DW
Layout Drawing
CAA-110734-01DL
PartNo
Description
75683
- Equipment Drawings
CAA-321007-01DW
75992
74092
COMPUTER DP UNIT
CAA-324002-01DL
CAA-324002-01DW
CAA-492003-01DL
CAA-492003-01DW
74496
TFT 19i/TOUCH/VBUF/24VDC
CAA-414006-01DL
75687
DP Console (2xIPD,TRB)
CAA-452012-01DL
75688
DP Swingframe (2xIPD,TRB)
CAA-452012-01DW
CAA-452013-01DL
CAA-452013-01DW
A
A
75218
DESKJET 2360
CAA-416003-01DL
61910
OKI ML280
CAA-416001-01DL
74483
12WDU25+4X12 WDK25
CAA-391003-01DL
75940
GIL, BOW UP
CAA-652003-01DL
75943
MRU-D COMPLETE
CAA-651002-01DL
75957
CAA-610011-01DL
75094
CYSCAN
CAA-613001-01DL
74093
230VAC DISTR.
CAA-391004-01DL
74119
UPS, 7 KVA
74129
13
Revision
Document Revision
CAA-381001-01DL
CAA-381001-01DW
CAA-482001-01DL
CAA-000001-13MX
CAA-110735-13MU
CAA-110735-13MU
Issue: A
14
Subsuppliers manuals
CAA-000001-14MX
74496
TFT 19i/TOUCH/VBUF/24VDC
CAA-414006-01MU
71462
TFT 15i/220VAC
CAA-414006-01MU
75218
DESKJET 2360
CAA-416003-01MU
61910
OKI ML280
CAA-416001-01MU
75940
GIL, BOW UP
CAA-652003-01MU
CAA-652003-01MU
75943
MRU-D COMPLETE
CAA-651002-01MU
75942
MRU-5 COMPLETE
CAA-651002-01MU
75957
CAA-610011-01MU
72312
TFT 19i/220VAC
75094
74119
CYSCAN
UPS, 7 KVA
CAA-414006-01MU
CAA-414006-01MU
CAA-613001-01MU
CAA-414006-01MU
CAA-381001-01MU
CAA-381001-01MU
CAA-110735-13MU
Issue: A
Subsuppliers Manuals
1
General ....................................................................................................14-3
14
14
Subsuppliers Manuals
1 General
This chapter contains customer documentation for equipment that is part of the RollsRoyce system installation, but not covered by the Installation Manual or the User
Manual.
Each document consists of excerpts from the subsuppliers original documentation. This
has been made by Rolls-Royce with the expressed consent of each subsupplier.
Page 14-3 of 4
14
Subsuppliers Manuals
Page 14-4 of 4
14
User Manual
for
JHD DISPLAYS
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-414006-01MU
Unrestricted
Blank page
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-414006-01MU
Unrestricted
User Manual
10T06
15T05
19T02
20T03
20T06
23T02
MMD
MMD
MMD
MMD
MMD
MMD
10.4
15.0
19.0
20.1
20.1
23.1
inch
inch
inch
inch
inch
inch
Maritime
Maritime
Maritime
Maritime
Maritime
Maritime
Multi
Multi
Multi
Multi
Multi
Multi
Display
Display
Display
Display
Display
Display
www.hatteland.com
Contents
Contents........................................................................................ 3
Contents of package
General .......................................................................................... 9
Introduction to Jakob Hatteland Display AS
About this manual
Basic Construction - Maritime Multi Display
Product Labels (Example)
Serial Number Label
Warranty Label
Capacitive Touchscreen
Resistive Touchscreen
9
10
11
12
12
12
13
14
15
15
16
17
17
18
18
18
19
21
24
26
28
33
35
37
39
42
43
44
49
3
IND100130-1
Contents
Specifications ............................................................................. 51
Specifications - JH 10T06 STD
Specifications - JH 10T06 MMD (DVI)
Specifications - JH 15T05 STD
Specifications - JH 15T05 MMD (DVI)
Specifications - JH 19T02 MMD (DVI)
Specifications - JH 20T03 MMD (DVI)
Specifications - JH 20T06 MMD (DVI)
Specifications - JH 23T02 MMD (DVI)
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Technical Drawings.................................................................... 61
Technical Drawings - JH 10T06 STD
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 10T06 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 15T05 STD
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 15T05 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 19T02 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 20T03 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 20T06 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Technical Drawings - JH 23T02 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
4
IND100130-1
62
62
63
64
64
65
66
66
67
68
68
69
70
70
71
72
72
73
74
74
75
75
76
Contents
Technical Drawings - Accessories ........................................... 77
10 Inch Sun Visor
17 >> 23 Rotary Bracket
17 Inch > 20 Inch Bracket
15 TFT to 19 TFT adapter
19 TFT to 21 CRT adapter
19 Inch Sun Visor
VESA Bracket
Water Cover
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
88
89
91
92
93
96
97
98
5
IND100130-1
Contents of package
This product is shipped with:
Item
Description
Illustration
Note: If you prefer your own bolts, make sure they are minimum
M6 and 25mm in length for security reasons.
Optional Accessories:
Item
Description
Illustration
If you prefer your own bolts, make sure they do not exceed 12mm
in length. Use any longer will do serious damage to components
inside the product!
6
IND100131-1
General
General
IND100077-1
General
IND100077-1
10
Basic Construction,
Hatteland Display Concept
Backcover/cabinet
Touchscreen option
Bracket
Rotation bracket
LCD Panel
Sun Visor
Controller Hatch
Front frame w/glass
General Display Variations/Models Overview:
A1
A2
A3
A4
C1/C3
C2/C4
E1
E2
Hx
MMD
MMC
MIL
MEX
STD/VGA
General
IND100077-5
11
Product Information
Manufacture:
Jakob Hatteland Display
NORWAY
Description
Power rating
100W
Product:
19 Inch
TFT
Product type: #
JH 19T01MMD-A1-831
Serial Number
115VAC/60Hz
230VAC/50Hz
Input Voltage
NOMENCLATURE
Example
Serial Number
Sub Version (AC-Odd / DC-Even number)
Version (Number & Product Name)
TFT (Thin Film Transistor)
Display Size (inch)
Jakob Hatteland (manufacturer)
Warranty Label
If you are to perform service on a unit still under warranty, any warranty will
be void if this label is damaged or removed. This label is usually located on the
back of the product and near the serial number label. This is to help our service
department to better determine if there has been any unauthorized service on a
product still under warranty.
General
IND100077-23
12
Capacitive Touchscreen
Introduction to Jakob Hatteland Display products with touchscreen
JHD uses both Resistive and Capacitive touchscreen solutions for their products. Please visit our
website to verify what product and touchscreen solution your product have.
Capacitive Touchscreen
Capacitive touchscreens operate using oscillator circuits
that are located in each corner of the glass overlay and
measure the capacitance of the area to be touched.
Depending on where the user touches the overlay, the
oscillators will vary in frequency. A touchscreen controller
then measures the frequency variations to ascertain the
coordinates of the persons touch. This glass overlay has
a coating that stores the charge deposited over its surface
electrically. It will not operate with either a gloved hand
or with a mechanical stylus.
Brief Specifications
Subject
Construction
Positional Accurancy
Touch Contact
Requirements
Enduarance Tested
Cleaning
Liquid Resistance
Light Transmission
Details
Top: ClearTek protective overcoat protects the sensors and increase durability.
Inside: Electrode X/Y grid pattern and conductive coating.
Bottom: Glass and conductive coating.
Small amount of voltage is applied to the four corners for measuring X and Y
coordinates of the touch point.
Reported touch coordinates are within 1.0% of true position.
(Based on viewing area dimensions)
3 ms for finger input.
More than 225 million touches in one location without noticable degradation to
the surface.
Water, isopropyl, alcohol, and similar non-abrasive cleaners.
Liquids on screen does not impede touchscreen performance.
Up to 88% at 550 nm; dependant on specific surface finish chosen.
Touchscreen
IND100110-1
13
Resistive Touchscreen
Resistive Touchscreen
It generally uses a display overlay composed of layers,
each with a conductive coating on the interior surface.
Special separator dots are distributed evenly across the
active area and separate the conductive interior layers.
The pressure from using either a mechanical stylus or
finger produces an internal electrical contact at the
action point which supplies the controller with vertical
and horizontal analog voltages for data input. The resistive
touchscreens are anti-glare to reduce reflective shine
intensity, which will slightly diffuse the light output
throughout the screen. Resistive technology activation can
be initiated by; a gloved hand, fingernail, mechanical stylus
or an ungloved finger.
Brief Specifications
Subject
Construction
Details
Top: Polyester with outside hard-surface coating with clear or anti-glare finish.
Inside: Transparent conductive coating.
Bottom: Glass substrate with uniform conductive coating.
Top and bottom layers separated by separator dots.
Positional Accurancy
Standard deviation of error is less than +- 0.080-inch (2mm).
Touch Activation Force Typically 57 to 133 g
Expected Life
More than 35 million touches in one location without failure, using a stylus similar
Performance
to a finger.
Chemical Resistance
Acetone, Ammonia-based glass cleaners, Common food and beverages,
(Exposed for one hour) Hexane, Isopropyl alcohol, Methylene chloride, Methyl ethyl ketone,
Mineral spirits, Turpentine
Light Transmission
Typically 75% over visible light spectrum.
Touchscreen
IND100110-1
14
1. Most of our products are intended for various methods of installation or mounting
(panel mounting, bracket mounting, ceiling/wall mounting etc.); for details, please see the relevant
mechanical drawings.
2. Adequate ventilation is a necessary prerequisite for the life of the product. The air inlet and outlet
openings must definitely be kept clear; coverings which restrict ventilation are not permissible.
3. Do not install the unit in a horizontal position (laying down), as this will cause heat to build up
inside the display which will damage the LCD Panel. To prevent this problem we recommend
installing the unit in a vertical position (30 degrees) to improve the airflow through the unit.
4. Exposure to direct sunlight can cause a considerable increase in the temperature of the unit, and
might under certain circumstances lead to overtemperature. This point should already be taken
into consideration when the bridge equipment is being planned (sun shades, distance from the
windows, ventilation, etc.)
5. Space necessary for ventilation, for cable inlets, for the operating procedures and for
maintenance, must be provided.
6. To further improve the cooling of the unit we recommend installing Cooling Fans underneath
blowing upwards into the unit air inlet. This may be required in high temperature applications
and also when there is reason to expect temperature problems due to non-optimal way of
mounting(Ref.2-5).
7. If the push buttons of the product are not illuminated, an external, dimmable illumination
(IEC 60945, 6.5.c, e.g. Goose neck light is required for navigational use.
8. Information about necessary pull-relievers for cables is given in the installation drawings.
Attention must be paid to this information so that cable breaks will not occur, e.g. during service
work.
Brightness knob precaution
Please be aware of the risk of breaking or bending the brightness knob. The brightness knob
should be free of any obstruction.
Installation
IND100078-1
15
1. Adjust the unit height so that the top of the screen is at or below eye level. Your eyes should
look slightly downwards when viewing the middle of the screen.
2. Adjust screen inclination to remain gaze angle to the centre of the screen approximately
perpendicular to the line of gaze.
3. When products are to be operated both from a sitting position and from a standing position, a
screen inclination of about 30 to 40 (from a vertical plane) has turned out to be favourable.
4. The brightness of displays is limited. Sunlight passing directly through the bridge windows - or its
reflection - which falls upon the screen workplaces must be reduced by suitable means
(negatively inclined window surfaces, Venetian blinds, distance from the windows, dark colouring
of the deckhead)
5. Units in the bridge wing area must be installed or mounted by suitable alignment or
bulkhead/ deckhead mounting in such a way that reflections of light from the front pane of the
display are not directed into the observers viewing direction.
6. The use of ordinary commercial filter plates or filter films is not permitted for items of equipment
that require approval (by optical effects, aids of that kind can suppress small radar targets, for
example).
- The useful life of the components of all Electronics Units generally decreases with increasing
ambient temperature; it is therefore advisable to install such units in air-conditioned rooms. If there
are no such facilities these rooms must at least be dry, adequately ventilated and kept at a suitable
temperature in order to prevent the formation of condensation inside the display unit.
- With most Electronic Units, cooling takes place via the surface of the casing. The cooling must not
be impaired by partial covering of the unit or by installation of the unit in a confined cabinet.
- In the area of the wheel house, the distance of each electronics unit from the magnetic standard
compass or the magnetic steering compass must not be less than the permitted magnetic
protection distance.
This distance is measured from the centre of the magnetic system of the compass to the nearest
point on the corresponding unit concerned.
- Units which are to be used on the bridge wing must be installed inside the wing control console
protected against the weather. In order to avoid misting of the viewing screen, a 25 ... 50 W
console-heating (power depending on the volume) is recommended.
- When selecting the site of a display unit, the maximum cable lengths have to be considered.
Installation
IND100078-1
16
Cables
Use only high quality shielded signal cables. For RGB/DVI cables use only cables with separate
coax for Red, Green and Blue. Jakob Hatteland Display can supply a varity of high quality RGB/
DVI, RS232, PARALLEL, LAN and USB cables intended for this use.
Cable Entries & Connectors (Marked area) - Illustration only
Bottom View
Back View
Installation
IND100078-1
17
Note: MMC bracket may vary in placement and design, but length of bolts should not
exceed 12mm.
Rotary Bracket
This can only be mounted if your product is equipped with a Standard Bracket.
Use the provided bolts to secure it. You may choose your own bolts to secure it to a table or
desktop, recommended size are: M10 and minimum 30mm in length. The rotary bracket can be
rotated 180
Installation
IND100078-1
18
Power Input
RGB IN
Serial Interface(opt)
Connect the RS-232 cable to the D-SUB 9P Connector (female) on the rear side of the TFT display.
Connect the other end to your COM port of your computer. Install the nesscessary software to operate it.
- Note that the connector is only installed upon customer request. VGA OUT connector is then removed.
- By factory standards the product have been mounted with a VGA OUT 15PIN DSUB connector, this signal
is a clone of the incoming signal.
Connect your composite video signal cable into the RCA jack plug. To activate the Picture In Picture
function, the TFT display must be configured via the OSD menus.
- Note that Composite Video must be selected as the incoming video source in the OSD menu.
S-VIDEO IN:
Connect your S-Video (SVHS) video signal cable into the mini 4-way din plug. It can only be inserted
one way and make sure you dont bend any of the pins inside your cable. To activate the Picture In Picture
function, the TFT display must be configured via the OSD menus.
- Note that S-Video must be selected as the incoming video source in the OSD menu.
RGB IN:
Connect the VGA cable to the D-SUB 15P Connector (female) on the rear side of the TFT display.
If possible, screw the VGA cable to the D-SUB connector and make sure you dont bend any of the pins
inside the VGA cable connector. To reduce tension of the VGA cable, secure it to the base mounted cable
tie clamp. Connect the other end of the cable to the VGA output of your computer, and fasten it there also.
19
IND100133-1
Connect the DVI cable to the DVI-D 24P Connector (female) on the rear side of the TFT display.
If possible, screw the DVI cable to the DVI-D connector and make sure you dont bend any of the pins
inside the DVI cable connector. To reduce tension of the DVI cable, secure it to the base mounted cable tie
clamp. Connect the other end of the cable to the DVI-D output of your computer, and fasten it there also.
The internal AC power module supports both 115VAC/60Hz and 230VAC/50Hz power input. You may
secure the cable further by mounting it to the base mounted cable tie clamp.
Secure the cables (check polarity!) to the screw terminal, you may secure the cable further by mounting it
to the base mounted cable tie clamp. The internal DC power module supports voltage from 12 to 24 VDC.
The two serial remote control connectors are used for displays with the JHSCOM-A1 or JHSCOM-B1.
It features a RS232/RS422/RS485 interface for controlling all parameters, including brightness, for the
display. For further information, see the Control Interface under support - www.hatteland.com
The led adjust is only present in displays described in the chapter automatic power light dimming. With the
led adjust knob, you can manually adjust the intensity of the power light indicator which is located in the
front of the display. The power light indicator is controlled by the Auto Power LED Dimming function which
automatically adjusts the intensity of the power light based on your environment lightning. You could also
turn it off if that is necessary.
Note:
If you have optional accessories beyond these standard connectors described here, please visit our
website at www.hatteland.com for separate documentation/specifications regarding accessories (when
made available).
20
IND100133-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pin 01 - TDP
Pin 02 - TDN
Pin 03 - RDP
Pin 04 - NC
Pin 05 - NC
Pin 06 - RDN
Pin 07 - NC
Pin 08 - NC
Pin 01 - D0P
Pin 02 - D0N
Pin 03 - D1P
Pin 04 - D2P
Pin 05 - D2N
Pin 06 - D1N
Pin 07 - D3P
Pin 08 - D3N
4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Pin 01 - DCD
Pin 02 - SIN
Pin 03 - SOUT
Pin 04 - DTR
Pin 05 - GND
Pin 06 - DSR
Pin 07 - RTS
Pin 08 - CTS
Pin 09 - RI
Pin 01
Pin 02
Pin 03
Pin 04
Pin 05
Pin 06
Pin 07
Pin 08
Pin 09
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15
Pin 4: Ground
15 14 13 12 11
Red, analog
Green, analog
Blue, analog
Reserved for monitor ID bit 2 (grounded)
Digital ground
Analog ground red
Analog ground green
Analog ground blue
+5V power supply for DDC (optional)
Digital ground
Reserved for monitor ID bit 0 (grounded)
DDC serial data
Horizontal sync or composite sync, input
Vertical sync, input
DDC serial clock
Pin 3: Ground
Pin 3: Ground
21
IND100241-2
Pin 3: Ground
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Pin 01 - STROBE
Pin 02 - DATA0
Pin 03 - DATA1
Pin 04 - DATA2
Pin 05 - DATA3
Pin 06 - DATA4
Pin 07 - DATA5
Pin 08 - DATA6
Pin 09 - DATA7
Pin 10 - ACK
Pin 11 - BUSY
Pin 12 - PE
Pin 13 - SELECT
Pin 14 - AUTO FEED
Pin 15 - ERR#
Pin 16 - INIT#
Pin 17 - SLIN#
Pin 18 - GND
Pin 19 - GND
Pin 20 - GND
Pin 21 - GND
Pin 22 - GND
Pin 23 - GND
Pin 24 - GND
Pin 25 - GND
This signal indicates to the printer that data at PD7..0 are valid.
Parallel data bus from PC board to printer. The data line are able to operate in PS/2 compatible bi-directional mode.
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Signal from printer indicating that the printer has received the data and is ready to accept further data.
Signal from printer indicating that the printer cannot accept further data.
Signal from printer indicating that the printer is out of paper.
Signal from printer to indicate that the printer is selected.
This active low output causes the printer to add a line feed after each line printed.
Signal from printer indicating that an error has been detected.
This active low output initialises (resets) the printer.
Signal to select the printer sent from CPU board to printer.
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
C5
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 C3 C4
Pin 01
Pin 02
Pin 03
Pin 04
Pin 05
Pin 06
Pin 07
Pin 08
Pin 09
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15
Pin 16
Pin 17
Pin 18
Pin 19
Pin 20
Pin 21
Pin 22
Pin 23
Pin 24
Pin C1
Pin C2
Pin C3
Pin C4
Pin C5
DDC = Display Data Channel /// T.M.D.S = Transition Minimized Differential Signal /// PIN C1,C2,C3,C4 = Only present on DVI-I connectors.
22
IND100241-2
User Controls
MMD Products
23
Operation
POWER SWITCH:
This TFT display features a Instant-ON/Delay-OFF switch, which ensures that the display is not turned off
by user accident.
Power Switch
Brightness Knob
This TFT display features a 100% dimmable image, which means it is capable of displaying a completely
black image when the BRIGHTNESS knob is turned fully to the left.
NOTE1: The design and placement of the user / osd controls may vary from product to product !
NOTE2: For ECDIS systems the brightness knob indication mark should be aligned directly with
the indication mark located on the label. (See illustration above)
This TFT display features a Power LED Dimmer function which control the light intensity of the power light
indicator. There are two different solutions for this feature.
Note:
1- Intelligent Auto Power LED Dimmer which control the light intensity based on your environment
lightning. This can also be manually adjusted using the Led Adjust knob on the rear side of the
display.
2- The light intensity is regulated according to the backlight, that is according to the brightness
knob. With the exception that when the backlight brightness is zero, the power led is just visible
in dark environment. This means that the power led is not visible in daylight when the brightness
knob is turned fully to the left.
If there is a led adjustment knob at the connection area of the display as described in INSTALLATION
AND RECOMMENDATIONS chapter, the manner of operation described in paragraph one applies. For
displays produced after the creation date of this manual, paragraph two applies. For displays produced
before year 2002, paragraph one applies.
The user can assign various display functions as hot keys (increase/decrease).
This will enable the user to quickly adjust the brightness, image size, contrast or other functions to
control the image. To assign these hot keys, enter the UTILITIES MENU/DIRECT ACCESS menu and
change them to the desired hot key function. Default hot keys are set to increase/decrease volume.
User Controls
IND100064-1
24
Operation
MENU
USER CONTROLS:
UP / DOWN Buttons
The On Screen Display (OSD menu) controls are located under the metal hatch on the left side
of the display. To begin understanding the menu and its usage, just follow these steps for a quick start.
1: Press the MENU button. The OSD menu will show all the available functions you
can adjust or control.
2: You can move to the next icon by pressing MENU.
3: Select options within icon menu by pressing UP or DOWN buttons.
The selected option will turn yellow.
4: Use + or - buttons to increase/decrease values.
5: Move the selection left or right by using + or - buttons. The selected option will turn green.
6: To confirm the selection, press + button. To abort press - button.
OSD MENU:
The On Screen Display (OSD menu) contains several functions that will let the user to adjust
or setup the display to their preferred setting. The functions are shown as easy understandable icons.
Some of the menus have sub-menus, use + to access and MENU to go back to the previous menu.
The OSD menu consists of 4 modes: (Icon beside function indicates if its available in that mode)
1
2
3
4
Mode 1 - Available functions in RGB / DVI* MODE Simplified OSD Menu - (Logo will appear)
User can adjust the most common functions needed to operate the display.
*Some functions are not available in DVI mode
Mode 2 - Available functions in RGB / DVI* MODE Advanced OSD Menu - (No logo will appear)
User can access more advanced functions. (Service menu)
*Some functions are not available in DVI mode
Mode 3 - Available functions in VIDEO MODE Simplified OSD Menu - (Logo will appear)
User can adjust the most common functions needed to operate the display.
Mode 4 - Available functions in VIDEO MODE Advanced OSD Menu - (No logo will appear)
User can access more advanced functions. (Service menu)
RGB/DVI MODE = When RGB/DVI signal (i.e OS or radar / charts) are displayed full screen.
VIDEO MODE = When video signal (i.e CAMERA / VCR / DVD) are displayed full screen.
To access the Advanced OSD Menu, you must press and hold the DOWN button while turning power on.
When picture appears, release the DOWN button and press MENU to access the Advanced functions.
If you have the Memorized state version of the OSD menu, use the same procedure to switch between Advanced
or Simplified modes. For more information about Memorized state, see the NOTES section in this manual.
WARNING !! ONLY A QUALIFIED SERVICE ENGINEER SHOULD ACCESS SERVICE MENU.
PERFORMANCE OF THE DISPLAY MAY BE SERIOUSLY AFFECTED.
User Controls
IND100064-1
25
Note that to be in RGB / DVI MODE, a computer signal must be present in full screen, i.e Windows or
other operating system/radar system. Having a PIP view simultaneously will not interfere or change
the menu structure in any way.
Frequency
Phase
Picture Type
Motion
Up/Down [select]
Still
0
15
+/- [modify]
Mode 2 - Function layout in RGB / DVI MODE Advanced OSD Menu: (Service menu)
Note that to be in RGB / DVI MODE, a computer signal must be present in full screen, i.e Windows or
other operating system/radar system. Having a PIP view simultaneously will not interfere or change
the menu structure in any way.
Brightness
Contrast
50
50
Up/Down [select]
User Controls
IND100064-1
+/- [modify]
26
Video Adjustment
Color
Tint
Sharpness
Picture Type
Video Type
Motion
DVD
Up/Down [select]
Still
VCR
0
0
3
+/- [modify]
Mode 4 - Function layout in VIDEO MODE Advanced OSD Menu: (Service menu)
Note that to be in VIDEO MODE, a video signal must be present in full screen, i.e from a camera,
VCR or DVD player.
0
15
Up/Down [select]
User Controls
IND100064-1
+/- [modify]
27
BRIGHTNESS:
CONTRAST:
COLOR TEMPERATURE:
Selecting this function will enable the user to modify the warmness of the picture.
Higher temperature = cooler picture. Lower temperature = warmer picture.
User can select between 9500K, 8000K, 6500K, and 5000K color temperature measured in
Kelvin degrees. Press + to access the sub-menu, where the RGB values can be adjusted.
Use + and - buttons to adjust these values, and MENU to exit. (Saving is done automatically)
1 2
FREQUENCY:
PHASE:
PICTURE TYPE
VIDEO ADJUSTMENT:
Selecting this function will enable the user to modify the color saturation of the
picture, tint and sharpness.
3 4
COLOR:
TINT:
SHARPNESS:
PICTURE TYPE
VIDEO TYPE
VIDEO SYSTEM:
Selecting this function will enable the user to select video system and input signals.
3 4
AUTO
NTSC / NTSC 4.43
PAL / PAL M
SECAM
User Controls
IND100064-1
28
STATUS:
Selecting this function will display graphic information such as resolution and
frequency.
1 2
3 4
1 2
PICTURE IN PICTURE:
Selecting this function will enable the user to configure PIP window size, input signal
source, horizontal and vertical position and more.
PIP SIZE
PIP SOURCE
: Select PIP window size. Choose between OFF, SIZE1, SIZE2 or SIZE3.
: Select video source to be displayed in PIP window.
Choose between AUTO, COMP, SVID:
AUTO
COMP
SVID
HORIZONTAL POSITION:
VERTICAL POSITION:
ROTATION:
Selecting this function will enable the user to rotate the image to either
landscape or portrait format.
3 4
User Controls
IND100064-1
29
NORMAL, LETTERBOX,
LETTERBOX WITH SUBTITLES,
NONLINEAR SCALING MODES
3 4
3 4
2
3 4
3 4
2
HORIZONTAL CLIPPING:
HORIZONTAL OFFSET:
HORIZONTAL STRETCH:
VERTICAL CLIPPING:
VERTICAL OFFSET:
VERTICAL STRETCH:
FILL SCREEN
: Enable full screen expansion for lower resolution image.
FILL TO ASPECT RATIO
: Enable full screen expansion for lower resolution image
according to aspect ratio.
LETTERBOX
: Stretches a letterboxed picture to full screen.
LETTERBOX WITH SUBTITLES : Stretches and pans a letterboxed picture to full screen, which enables
viewing of subtitles in bottom.
NONLINEAR SCALING MODES: (Press + to access the sub-menu)
3 4
HORIZONTAL CLIPPING:
HORIZONTAL OFFSET:
HORIZONTAL STRETCH:
VERTICAL CLIPPING:
VERTICAL OFFSET:
VERTICAL STRETCH:
1 2
3 4
LANGUAGE:
Available languages are: English, Danish and Simplified Chinese. This will affect all
text and messages in the OSD menus.
User Controls
IND100064-1
30
1 2
3 4
2
DPMS
DISPLAY INPUT
AUTO SOURCE SELECT
GAMMA
1 2
3 4
FREEZE
1 2
3 4
* By pressing the assigned hot key, the sequence of the selected input video source are:
Analog RGB / Component / Video / Composite Video / S-Video. (Note: Component Video is not implemented)
Direct Access 1 default setting is VOLUME
Direct Access 2 default setting is NO FUNCTION
1 2
1 2
3 4
LOAD (FACTORY) DEFAULTS: (Press + to access the sub-menu. NOTE: Only on newer models)
LOAD USER DEFAULT
SAVE USER DEFAULT
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT
User Controls
IND100064-1
31
TEST PATTERN
1 2
3 4
VIDEO SOURCE:
Selecting this function will enable the user to select the type of input signal to show
fullscreen. Available inputs are: Analog RGB, Component Video*, Composite Video,
S-Video and DVI. (*Component Video is not implemented in our products.)
Pressing + will activate the input, and pressing - will detect automatically.
1 2
3 4
VOLUME:
This function is not implemented in displays, and have no operational effect.
1 2
3 4
EXIT MENU:
Selecting this function will exit the OSD menu.
Press + to exit and save the current settings.
Note:
The OSD settings will also automatically be stored in memory when the OSD exit on user timeout.
User Controls
IND100064-1
32
Preset
Signal
SXGA displays (NON-DVI)
Graphic/Video
Modes Timings
Supported
Mode
Resolution
Clk [MHz]
25.175
25.175
25.175
Horizontal freq
[KHz]
31.469
31.469
31.469
Vertical freq
[Hz]
70
70
70
E1_70
E1_70
E1_70
640x350
640x350
640x350
E1_85
E1_85
E1_85
640x350
640x350
640x350
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85
E2_70
E2_70
E2_70
640x400
640x400
640x400
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70
E2_85
E2_85
E2_85
640x400
640x400
640x400
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85
T_70
T_70
T_70
720x400
720x400
720x400
28.322
28.322
28.322
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70
T_85
T_85
T_85
720x400
720x400
720x400
35.500
35.500
35.500
37.927
37.927
37.927
85
85
85
V_62
V_62
V_62
736x480
736x480
736x480
28.200
28.200
28.200
31.403
31.403
31.403
62
62
62
V_60
V_60
V_60
640x480
640x480
640x480
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
60
60
60
V_67
V_67
V_67
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
67
67
67
V_72
V_72
V_72
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
72
72
72
V_75
V_75
V_75
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
75
75
75
V_85
V_85
V_85
640x480
640x480
640x480
36.000
36.000
36.000
43.269
43.269
43.269
85
85
85
SV_56
SV_56
SV_56
800x600
800x600
800x600
36.000
36.000
36.000
35.156
35.156
35.156
56
56
56
SV_60
SV_60
SV_60
800x600
800x600
800x600
40.000
40.000
40.000
37.879
37.879
37.879
60
60
60
SV_72
SV_72
SV_72
800x600
800x600
800x600
50.000
50.000
50.000
48.077
48.077
48.077
72
72
72
SV_75
SV_75
SV_75
800x600
800x600
800x600
49.500
49.500
49.500
46.875
46.875
46.875
75
75
75
SV_85
SV_85
SV_85
800x600
800x600
800x600
56.250
56.250
56.250
53.674
53.674
53.674
85
85
85
X_60
X_60
X_60
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
65.000
65.000
65.000
48.363
48.363
48.363
60
60
60
21
33
IND100104-1
Sync Mode
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
56.476
56.476
56.476
70
70
70
X_72
X_72
X_72
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
57.515
57.515
57.515
72
72
72
X_75
X_75
X_75
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
78.750
78.750
78.750
60.023
60.023
60.023
75
75
75
X_87I
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
X_85
X_85
X_85
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
94.500
94.500
94.500
68.677
68.677
68.677
85
85
85
SX_60
SX_60
SX_60
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
108.000
108.000
108.000
63.981
63.981
63.981
60
60
60
SX_72
SX_72
SX_72
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
78.125
78.125
78.125
72
72
72
SX_75
SX_75
SX_75
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
79.976
79.976
79.976
75
75
75
SX_85
SX_85
SX_85
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
149.844
149.844
149.844
91.146
91.146
91.146
85
85
85
NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
X_87I
X_87I
34
IND100104-1
22
Preset
Signal Timings SXGA displays (DVI)
Graphic/Video Modes Supported
Mode
Resolution
Clk [MHz]
25.175
25.175
25.175
Horizontal freq
[KHz]
31.469
31.469
31.469
Vertical freq
[Hz]
70
70
70
E1_70
E1_70
E1_70
640x350
640x350
640x350
E1_85
E1_85
E1_85
Sync Mode
Digital Separate Sync
Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)
640x350
640x350
640x350
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85
E2_70
E2_70
E2_70
640x400
640x400
640x400
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70
E2_85
E2_85
E2_85
640x400
640x400
640x400
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85
T_70
T_70
T_70
720x400
720x400
720x400
28.322
28.322
28.322
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70
T_85
T_85
T_85
720x400
720x400
720x400
35.500
35.500
35.500
37.927
37.927
37.927
85
85
85
V_62
V_62
V_62
736x480
736x480
736x480
28.200
28.200
28.200
31.403
31.403
31.403
62
62
62
V_60
V_60
V_60
640x480
640x480
640x480
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
60
60
60
V_67
V_67
V_67
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
67
67
67
V_72
V_72
V_72
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
72
72
72
V_75
V_75
V_75
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
75
75
75
V_85
V_85
V_85
640x480
640x480
640x480
36.000
36.000
36.000
43.269
43.269
43.269
85
85
85
SV_56
SV_56
SV_56
800x600
800x600
800x600
36.000
36.000
36.000
35.156
35.156
35.156
56
56
56
SV_60
SV_60
SV_60
800x600
800x600
800x600
40.000
40.000
40.000
37.879
37.879
37.879
60
60
60
SV_72
SV_72
SV_72
800x600
800x600
800x600
50.000
50.000
50.000
48.077
48.077
48.077
72
72
72
SV_75
SV_75
SV_75
800x600
800x600
800x600
49.500
49.500
49.500
46.875
46.875
46.875
75
75
75
SV_85
SV_85
SV_85
800x600
800x600
800x600
56.250
56.250
56.250
53.674
53.674
53.674
85
85
85
X_60
1024x768
65.000
48.363
60
31
35
IND100104-7
1024x768
1024x768
65.000
65.000
48.363
48.363
60
60
X_70
X_70
X_70
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
56.476
56.476
56.476
70
70
70
X_72
X_72
X_72
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
57.515
57.515
57.515
72
72
72
X_75
X_75
X_75
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
78.750
78.750
78.750
60.023
60.023
60.023
75
75
75
X_87I
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
X_85
X_85
X_85
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
94.500
94.500
94.500
68.677
68.677
68.677
85
85
85
SX_60
SX_60
SX_60
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
108.000
108.000
108.000
63.981
63.981
63.981
60
60
60
SX_72
SX_72
SX_72
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
78.125
78.125
78.125
72
72
72
SX_75
SX_75
SX_75
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
79.976
79.976
79.976
75
75
75
NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
X_87I
X_87I
36
IND100104-7
32
Resolution
Clk [MHz]
Sync Mode
E1_70
E1_70
E1_70
640x350
640x350
640x350
25.175
25.175
25.175
E1_85
640x350
31.500
37.861
85
E1_85
E1_85
640x350
640x350
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
85
85
E2_70
640x400
25.175
31.469
70
E2_70
E2_70
640x400
640x400
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
70
70
E2_85
640x400
31.500
37.861
85
E2_85
E2_85
640x400
640x400
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
85
85
T_70
T_70
T_70
720x400
720x400
720x400
28.322
28.322
28.322
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70
T_85
T_85
T_85
720x400
720x400
720x400
35.500
35.500
35.500
37.927
37.927
37.927
85
85
85
V_62
V_62
V_62
736x480
736x480
736x480
28.200
28.200
28.200
31.403
31.403
31.403
62
62
62
V_60
V_60
V_60
640x480
640x480
640x480
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
60
60
60
V_67
640x480
31.500
37.500
67
V_67
V_67
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
67
67
V_72
V_72
V_72
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
72
72
72
V_75
640x480
31.500
37.500
75
V_75
V_75
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
75
75
V_85
640x480
36.000
43.269
85
V_85
V_85
640x480
640x480
36.000
36.000
43.269
43.269
85
85
SV_56
800x600
36.000
35.156
56
SV_56
SV_56
800x600
800x600
36.000
36.000
35.156
35.156
56
56
SV_60
800x600
40.000
37.879
60
SV_60
SV_60
800x600
800x600
40.000
40.000
37.879
37.879
60
60
SV_72
800x600
50.000
48.077
72
SV_72
SV_72
800x600
800x600
50.000
50.000
48.077
48.077
72
72
SV_75
800x600
49.500
46.875
75
SV_75
SV_75
800x600
800x600
49.500
49.500
46.875
46.875
75
75
SV_85
800x600
56.250
53.674
85
SV_85
SV_85
800x600
800x600
56.250
56.250
53.674
53.674
85
85
30
37
IND100104-8
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
65.000
65.000
65.000
48.363
48.363
48.363
60
60
60
X_70
X_70
X_70
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
56.476
56.476
56.476
70
70
70
X_72
X_72
X_72
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
57.515
57.515
57.515
72
72
72
X_75
X_75
X_75
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
78.750
78.750
78.750
60.023
60.023
60.023
75
75
75
X_87I
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
X_85
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768
94.500
68.677
85
X_85
X_85
1024x768
1024x768
94.500
94.500
68.677
68.677
85
85
SX_60
1280x1024
108.000
63.981
60
SX_60
SX_60
1280x1024
1280x1024
108.000
108.000
63.981
63.981
60
60
SX_72
1280x1024
135.000
78.125
72
SX_72
SX_72
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
78.125
78.125
72
72
SX_75
1280x1024
135.000
79.976
75
SX_75
SX_75
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
79.976
79.976
75
75
UX_60
UX_60
UX_60
1600x1200
1600x1200
1600x1200
112.288
112.288
112.288
75.000
75.000
75.000
60
60
60
NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
X_87I
X_87I
38
IND100104-8
31
Resolution
Clk [MHz]
25.175
25.175
25.175
Horizontal freq
[KHz]
31.469
31.469
31.469
Vertical freq
[Hz]
70
70
70
E1_70
E1_70
E1_70
640x350
640x350
640x350
E1_85
E1_85
E1_85
Sync Mode
Digital Separate Sync
Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)
640x350
640x350
640x350
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85
E2_70
E2_70
E2_70
640x400
640x400
640x400
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70
E2_85
E2_85
E2_85
640x400
640x400
640x400
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85
T_70
T_70
T_70
720x400
720x400
720x400
28.322
28.322
28.322
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70
T_85
T_85
T_85
720x400
720x400
720x400
35.500
35.500
35.500
37.927
37.927
37.927
85
85
85
V_62
V_62
V_62
736x480
736x480
736x480
28.200
28.200
28.200
31.403
31.403
31.403
62
62
62
V_60
V_60
V_60
640x480
640x480
640x480
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
60
60
60
V_67
V_67
V_67
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
67
67
67
V_72
V_72
V_72
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
72
72
72
V_75
V_75
V_75
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
75
75
75
V_85
V_85
V_85
640x480
640x480
640x480
36.000
36.000
36.000
43.269
43.269
43.269
85
85
85
SV_56
SV_56
SV_56
800x600
800x600
800x600
36.000
36.000
36.000
35.156
35.156
35.156
56
56
56
SV_60
SV_60
SV_60
800x600
800x600
800x600
40.000
40.000
40.000
37.879
37.879
37.879
60
60
60
SV_72
SV_72
SV_72
800x600
800x600
800x600
50.000
50.000
50.000
48.077
48.077
48.077
72
72
72
SV_75
SV_75
SV_75
800x600
800x600
800x600
49.500
49.500
49.500
46.875
46.875
46.875
75
75
75
SV_85
SV_85
SV_85
800x600
800x600
800x600
56.250
56.250
56.250
53.674
53.674
53.674
85
85
85
X_60
1024x768
65.000
48.363
60
33
39
IND100104-2
1024x768
1024x768
65.000
65.000
48.363
48.363
60
60
X_70
X_70
X_70
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
56.476
56.476
56.476
70
70
70
X_72
X_72
X_72
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
57.515
57.515
57.515
72
72
72
X_75
X_75
X_75
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
78.750
78.750
78.750
60.023
60.023
60.023
75
75
75
X_87I
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
X_85
X_85
X_85
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
94.500
94.500
94.500
68.677
68.677
68.677
85
85
85
SX_60
SX_60
SX_60
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
108.000
108.000
108.000
63.981
63.981
63.981
60
60
60
SX_72
SX_72
SX_72
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
78.125
78.125
78.125
72
72
72
SX_75
SX_75
SX_75
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
79.976
79.976
79.976
75
75
75
UX_60
UX_60
UX_60
1600x1200
1600x1200
1600x1200
112.288
112.288
112.288
75.000
75.000
75.000
60
60
60
NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
X_87I
X_87I
40
IND100104-2
34
User Controls
STD Products
41
Operation
POWER SWITCH:
This TFT display features a Instant-ON/Delay-OFF switch, which ensures that the display is not turned off
by user accident.
Assignable Hotkeys
Power Switch
Brightness Knob
This TFT display features a 100% dimmable image, which means it is capable of displaying a completely
black image when the BRIGHTNESS knob is turned fully to the left.
ASSIGNABLE HOTKEYS:
42
UP / DOWN Buttons
USER CONTROLS:
1: Press the MENU button. The OSD Menu shows the functions menu.
2: To modify the values or access to its submenu, use the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+).
3: To select another function use the Select Buttons / Up or Down to navigate up or down.
Note:
- The image quality depends on the computer or video card you are using.
- Select a crisp and bright image for display while adjustment takes place.
- The modified settings is automatically saved on menu exit. The user can also
decide whenever to deactivate this function. This means the user has to save the settings
manually by selecting the Exit Menu function and choosing save.
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS:
HF=48.73kHz
Selected function
VF=60.0Hz
Status line
43
Tuning
17
Use this function to fine tune the data sampling position (adjust display quality).
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the value. The slider on screen will also
move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value. Range 0 to 31
Autosetup
Use this function to automatically set up the display area like positions, image size, tuning etc.
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate auto setup.
Image Adjustments> (Sub-menu)
In this sub-menu the user can adjust the horizontal position, vertical position, horizontal size, sharpness
and the 3 component RGB (Red, Green, Blue) color saturations of the display area.
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu which contains these functions:
32
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the display area horizontally (left or right).
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 0 to 58
31
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the display area vertically (up or down).
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 0 to 56
1340
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will expand or shrink the display area from center horizontally.
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 1318 to 1358
Sharpness
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will adjust the sharpness level of the display area.
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 0 to 3
44
Red
18
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the red color level. The slider on
screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value.
Range 0 to 35
Green
18
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the green color level. The slider on
screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value.
Range 0 to 35
Blue
18
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the blue color level. The slider on
screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value.
Range 0 to 35
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will reset any modifed RGB settings back to the previous
setting before the user entered this sub-menu.
Back>
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit this sub-menu with the modified settings
intact.
45
31
30
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the OSD Menu horizontally (left or right).
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 0 to 62
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the OSD Menu vertically (up or down).
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 0 to 60
Transparency
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will adjust the OSD Menu transparent level in a stepwise
manner. The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a
numerical value. Range 0 to 3
Time Out
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will modify the timeout of the OSD Menu. The parameter
selected will be highlighted. Values are in seconds before the OSD Menu will automatically disappear
from the display area. Available parameters are: 10/20/30/45/60/cont
Choosing cont (never auto exit) requires that the user manually exits the menu.
Auto Save
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will choose whenever the modified settings will be
automatically saved when the OSD Menu exits. The parameter selected will be highlighted.
-When set to Off the user will manually have to save the modfied settings using the Exit Menu
function and choosing save.
-When set to On all settings modified will automatically be saved when the user exist the menu, or
the menu exits itself based on a timeout value.
Back>
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit this sub-menu with the modified settings
intact.
46
On this sub-menu the user can view various technical information for the internal graphics controller and
the OSD Menu software. Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu:
Display type
Shows the suggested display technology the user is running. Also detects what resolution the user is
running on the display area. Example: TFT LCD 1024x768
Shows the internal graphic controller model and its serial number.* Example: ACL-1024
* (Note: This is not the same as the display product serial number from Hatteland Display AS)
Bios version
Shows the BIOS version of the OSD Menu software. Example: 00.03-00.03
Run time
Shows the uptime for the display itself. The user can reset this internal clock by pressing the
Adjust Button (+) and hold it for 5 seconds.
Example: 480h00m (480 hours and 0 minutes)
Back>
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit this sub-menu with the modified settings
intact.
47
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will select between Text or Graphics
The parameter selected will be highlighted. Leave this setting to Graphics for best results.
Allow the user to define the hot-keys (-) or (+) / Up or Down ) to one of the OSD functions.
When the user presses one of the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) or Select Buttons / Up or Down the
assigned hot-key will increase / decrease the value without the user entering the OSD Menu itself.
This can be very time consuming if the user has to modify any of the OSD functions quickly.
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu which contains these functions:
Brightness
Contrast
Back>
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit the sub-menu one level with the
modified settings intact and saved.
The same procedure applies here as above on: Direct Access 1>
The user can now assign the Select Buttons / Up or Down to the selected OSD function.
Language
Allow the user to configure the OSD Menu language for all the OSD Menu and its submenus
including any messages. Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu
which enable the user to select the preferred language. The parameter selected will be highlighted.
Available languages are: English, Italian, Francais, Espanol, Svenska, Nederlands, Deutsche.
Back>
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit the language sub-menu with the
modified settings intact and saved. Pressing it once more will also exit out to the main menu.
Exit Menu
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will save the settings and exit the menu.
Pressing the Adjust Button (-) will exit the menu but does not save the modifed settings.
48
Resolution
Clk (MHz)
V_60
SV_56
SV_60
X_60
640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768
25.175
36.000
40.000
65.500
Horiz.Freq(KHz)
31.469
35.156
37.879
48.363
49
Vert.Freq(Hz)
59.940
56.250
60.317
60.004
Sync Gate
Digital Separate Sync.
Digital Separate Sync.
Digital Separate Sync.
Digital Separate Sync.
50
Specifications
51
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
TFT Technology:
Physical Dimensions:
TFT Characteristics:
Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
640 x 480
0.33 (H) x 0.33 (V) mm
20 ms (typical), black to white
300:1 (typical)
350 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 70 deg. (H), 40 deg. (V)
211.2 (H) x 158.4 (V) mm
262,144 colors (6-bit max)
Environmental Considerations:
Operating
Storage
Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
Available Options:
Power Specifications:
Accessories:
Touchscreen
On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
Mode Status LED
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)
Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 48,3 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz *
Resolutions:
VGA
User Controls:
Synchronisation:
Sync Signal:
Separate synchronisation only
Auto detects VGA, non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm
JH 10TBR
JH XXTRO STD
JH 10TSV
Touch Screen
=
=
=
=
Bracket *
Bracket *
Sun Visor *
Factory mounted
Power Consumption:
Operating
: 60 W (max)
(*Not tested, but expected to be the same as corresponding model JH 10T06 MMD)
52
IND100129-11
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
TFT Technology:
Physical Dimensions:
TFT Characteristics:
Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
640 x 480
0.33 (H) x 0.33 (V) mm
20 ms (typical), black to white
300:1 (typical)
350 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 70 deg. (H), 40 deg. (V)
211.2 (H) x 158.4 (V) mm
262,144 colors (6-bit max)
:
:
:
:
:
:
Accessories:
Touchscreen
Synchronisation:
User Controls:
Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm
On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
Mode Status LED
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)
Environmental Considerations:
Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz to 85 Hz
Operating
Storage
Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video
Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
Available Options:
JH 10TBR
JH XXTRO STD
JH 10TSV
Touch Screen
=
=
=
=
Bracket *
Bracket *
Sun Visor *
Factory mounted
Power Specifications:
Power Consumption:
Operating
: 60 W (max)
Standard: 100cm
Steering: 70cm
53
IND100129-10
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
TFT Technology:
Physical Dimensions:
TFT Characteristics:
Pixel number
Pixel pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1024 x 768
0.297 (H) x 0.297 (V) mm
25 ms (typical), black to white
400:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
304.1 (H) x 228.1 (V) mm
16.7 millions
Synchronisation:
Sync Signal:
Separate synchronisation only
Auto detects VGA -> XGA, non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm
Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 48,3 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz *
User Controls:
On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)
Environmental Considerations:
Operating
Storage
Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
: 640 x 480
: 800 x 600
: 1024 x 768 *
Available Options:
JH 15TBR
JH 15TRO
JH 15TSV
Power Specifications:
Power Consumption:
Operating
: 40 W (max)
(*Not tested, but expected to be the same as corresponding model JH 15T05 MMD)
54
IND100129-52
= Bracket *
= Rotary Bracket *
= Sun Visor *
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
TFT Technology:
Physical Dimensions:
TFT Characteristics:
Pixel number
Pixel pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1024 x 768
0.297 (H) x 0.297 (V) mm
25 ms (typical), black to white
400:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
304.1 (H) x 228.1 (V) mm
16.7 millions
:
:
:
:
:
:
Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control
Synchronisation:
Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Auto detects VGA -> SXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm
User Controls:
Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz * to 85 Hz
Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)
On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Environmental Considerations:
Operating
Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
Storage
Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video
* Recommended for optimum picture quality
Power Specifications:
Power Supply Options:
115VAC/60Hz or 230VAC/50Hz
12-24 VDC
Power Consumption:
Operating
: 40 W (max)
Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
Available Options:
JH 15TBR
JH 15TRO
JH 15TSV
JH XPR
Touch Screen
=
=
=
=
=
Bracket *
Rotary Bracket *
Sun Visor *
External Power Relay
Factory mounted
Steering: 85cm
Steering: 100cm
55
IND100129-49
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
TFT Technology:
Physical Dimensions:
TFT Characteristics:
Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1280 x 1024
0.294 (H) x 0.294 (V) mm
15 ms (typical), black to white
700:1 (typical)
300 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
376.32 (H) x 301.056 (V) mm
16.7 millions (depending on graphics card)
Synchronisation:
Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Auto detects VGA -> SXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm
Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control
:
:
:
:
:
:
User Controls:
On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)
Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz * to 85 Hz
Environmental Considerations:
Operating
Storage
Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA
:
:
:
:
Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video
* Recommended for optimum picture quality
Power Specifications:
Power Consumption:
Operating
: 100 W (max)
Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
Available Options:
JH MMD BR
= Bracket *
JH MMDRO
= Rotary Bracket *
JH 19TSV
= Sun Visor *
JH VESA 18T04 = Vesa Bracket *
JH VBUF
= Video Buffer (1)
JH SCOM
= Remote Control
JH XPR
= External Power Relay
ECDIS Version = JH 19T02 MMD E1/E2 (E1=AC / E2=DC)
ECDIS w/buzzer= JH 19T02 MMD E11/E12 (E11=AC / E12=DC)
Touch Screen = Factory mounted
Steering: 85cm
Steering: 65cm
56
IND100129-50
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
TFT Technology:
Physical Dimensions:
TFT Characteristics:
Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1280 x 1024
0.312 (H) x 0.312 (V) mm
25 ms (typical), black to white
300:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
399.36 (H) x 319.49 (V) mm
16.7 millions (depending on graphics card)
:
:
:
:
:
:
Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control
Synchronisation:
User Controls:
Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Auto detects VGA -> SXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm
On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)
Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz * to 85 Hz
Environmental Considerations:
Operating
Storage
:
:
:
:
Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
Available Options:
Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video
Power Specifications:
Power Supply Options:
115VAC/60Hz & 230VAC/50Hz
24 VDC
Power Consumption:
Operating
: 100 W (max)
JH 20T03 MMD-A1
JH MMD BR
JH MMDRO
JH 20TSV
JH VESA 20T03
JH VBUF
JH SCOM
JH XPR
ECDIS Version
Touch Screen
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Bracket *
Rotary Bracket *
Sun Visor *
Vesa Bracket *
Video Buffer (1)
Remote Control
External Power Relay
JH 20T03 MMD E1
Factory mounted
Standard: 200cm
57
IND100129-5
Steering: 135cm
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
TFT Technology:
Physical Dimensions:
TFT Characteristics:
Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1600 x 1200
0.255 (H) x 0.255 (V) mm
16 ms (typical), black to white
700:1 (typical)
300 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 89 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
408.0 (H) x 306.0 (V) mm
16.7 millions (depending on graphics card)
Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control
Synchronisation:
:
:
:
:
:
:
User Controls:
Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Auto detects VGA -> UXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm
On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)
Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31.469 kHz to 75 kHz
Vertical
: 56 Hz* to 75 Hz
Environmental Considerations:
Operating
Storage
Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA
UXGA
:
:
:
:
:
Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
Available Options:
Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video
Power Specifications:
Power Consumption:
Operating
: 100 W (max)
JH MMD BR
= Bracket *
JH MMDRO
= Rotary Bracket *
JH 20TSV
= Sun Visor *
JH VESA 20T03 = Vesa Bracket *
JH VBUF
= Video Buffer (1)
JH SCOM
= Remote Control
JH XPR
= External Power Relay
ECDIS Version = JH 20T06 MMD E1/E2 (E1=AC / E2=DC)
ECDIS w/buzzer= JH 20T06 MMD E11/E12 (E11=AC / E12=DC)
Touch Screen = Factory mounted
58
IND100129-59
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
TFT Technology:
Physical Dimensions:
TFT Characteristics:
Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Active Display Area :
Max Colors
:
1600 x 1200
0.294 (H) x 0.294 (V) mm
20 ms (typical), black to white
600:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
(@ CR > 10)
470.4 (H) x 352.8 (V) mm
16.7 millions (depending on graphics card)
Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control
:
:
:
:
:
:
Synchronisation:
User Controls:
Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Auto detects VGA -> UXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm
On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31.469 kHz to 75 kHz
Vertical
: 56 Hz* to 75 Hz
* Recommended 60Hz for optimum picture quality. 56 Hz only in 800x600
:
:
:
:
:
Behind hatch:
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)
Environmental Considerations:
Operating
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
Available Options:
Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video
* Recommended for optimum picture quality. (60 Hz only)
Power Specifications:
Power Supply Options:
115VAC/60Hz & 230VAC/50Hz
24 VDC
Power Consumption:
Operating
: 100 W (max)
(1) The JHVBUF is tested at resolutions up to 1600 x 1200. Both separate sync and
composite sync is supported. The VGA output signal is at same resolution and sync as
the input. The output is working even if the main display is turned off. (Power supply
must be connected though)
Standard: 260cm
Steering: 160cm
59
IND100129-7
JH 23TBRT01A1= Bracket *
JH MMDRO
= Rotary Bracket *
JH 23TSV
= Sun Visor *
JH VESA 23T01 = Vesa Bracket *
JH VBUF
= Video Buffer (1)
JH SCOM
= Remote Control
JH XPR
= External Power Relay
ECDIS Version = JH 23T02 MMD E1/E2 (E1=AC / E2=DC)
ECDIS w/buzzer= JH 23T02 MMD E11/E12 (E11=AC / E12=DC)
Touch Screen = Factory mounted
60
Technical Drawings
61
4,50
309
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
256
339
322
SIDE VIEW
313
BACK VIEW
10
4701
10
11
12
11
1:1.5
Size: A1 Format
Scale:
-Drawing number:
Approved by:
12
Revision:
JH10T06STD-A1
Mechanical DesignerProjection:
16-12-2002
Date:
ISOMETRIC VIEW
42
FRONT VIEW
146
55
14
54
226
15
42
42
IND100132-13
62
230
Standard Version
42
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-13
63
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Standard Version
IND100132-12
64
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-12
65
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Standard Version
IND100132-72
66
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-72
67
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Standard Version
IND100132-71
68
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-71
69
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Standard Version
IND100132-73
70
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-73
71
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Standard Version
IND100132-5
72
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-5
73
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Standard Version
IND100132-82
74
6,50
539
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
JH23T02MMD-A1
534
568
584
FRONT VIEW
281
126
SIDE VIEW
ISOMETRIC VIEW
7
165
11
4701
Mechanical DesignerProjection:
10
18-12-2002
Date:
13
1:3
Size: A1 Format
Scale:
148
11
543
BACK VIEW
10
148
13
13
148
14
72
501
14
110
114
IND100132-7
75
110
Revision:
12
12
A000176-1
Drawing number:
Approved by:
--
505
Standard Version
114
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Bracket(s) Version
76
175
129
66
43
20
0
TOP VIEW
FRONT VIEW
320
345
360
385
442
50
BOTTOM VIEW
557
85
SIDE VIEW
18
23
IND100132-7
6
6
8
10
ROOF MOUNTING
556
536
32
4701
12
11
1:3
Size: A1 Format
Scale:
--
Revision:
12
A000176-1
Drawing number:
Approved by:
JH23T02MMD-A1
Mechanical DesignerProjection:
10
11
BACK VIEW
18-12-2002
Date:
10
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
77
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
IND100132-47
78
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
IND100132-46
79
20"
18"
19"
17"
46,97
18,00
6,50
197,06
237,06
347,06
396,56
237,06
277,06
362,63
412,13
261,57
301,62
411,57
461,07
50,00
165,53
173,32
34,72
42,50
66,97
296,34
304,13
IND100132-69
80
197,78
ThisdocumentisthepropertyofJakobHattelandDisplayAS.
Thisdocumentandanyauthorizedreproductionthereof,mustnotbeusedin
anywayagainsttheinterestofJakobHattelandDisplayAS.
Anyauthorizedreproduction,inwholeorinpart,mustincludethislegend.
348,59
19,70
42,70
65,70
11
11
10
10
ExampleAssemblyBracket17"
10
11
10
10
11
11
12
Konstr./Tegnet
4701
11
Projeksjon
1:2
Mlest.(A1Format)
12
Aluminium 2mm
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Materiale
Erstattetav
ID
P000202-1
3D001BKD-A4
P000175-1
P000180-1
P000175-2
P000180-2
P000199-1
M4 X 0.7 X 10
P000197-1
P000200-1
M6 X 1 X 20 HEX
A000067-1
ExampleExplodedViewConfigurationBracket17"
JakobHattelandDispla
y
msosen
N-5578NedreVat
s
Dato
17-01-2002
10
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
IND100132-43
81
IND100132-44
32
28
98
117
47,50
23
34
ARB M6 * 4 stks.
533
R 3,25 * 2 stks.
6,50 * 2 stks.
384
411
455
448
176,50
R5
4701
Konstr./Tegnet
02-04-2002
485,50
499
510
Dato
480
Projeksjon
Pos.nr
1
Antall
1
1:3
P000460-1
Beskrivelse
Adapterplate 19" TFT -> 21" CRT
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
Erstattet av
ID
P000460-1
Materiale
Aluminium
356,50
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
IND100132-67
83
VESA Bracket
4
4 mounting holes
VESA Bracket - Backcover
M6x12 screws
98
242
Date:
100
10
Mechanical DesignerProjection:
11
11
Size: A1 Format
Scale:
Approved by:
--
Revision:
12
84
10
Drawing number:
12
H
1:3
222
75
130
160
IND100132-45
157
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
85
2
""
"
!
1"2!
IND100132-80
1"
Water Cover
"
%&'()
!"#
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com
*++
,-&.$/0
$
86
INB100005-1 (Rev 7)
General - Appendix
87
Basic Trouble-shooting
COMMON ERRORS: (Applies for Display products and Panel / Maritime / Rack Computers)
If for some reason there should be something wrong with the picture quality or no picture present,
check the symptoms carefully and try to cure it with the hints below:
NO PICTURE / LED BEHAVIOUR:
If there is no light at all in the LED at the FRONT, check power cables. If the LED in front is green
then check if the brightness knob is turned to the right (max brightness). If still no picture, check
if there is a VGA signal on the External VGA connector. If you have a picture on the external VGA
connector please look in BIOS documentation/chapter for correct display settings in BIOS.
Lack of image is most likely to be caused by incorrect connection, lack of power, or wrong BIOS
settings.
SCROLLING / UNSTABLE IMAGE:
Signal cable may not be completely connected to computer or TFT display.
Check the pin assignments and signal timings of the display and your video card with respect to
recommended timing and pin assignments. Make sure that the video card is compatible and that it
is properly seated / installed on the computer.
DISPLAY AREA IS NOT CENTERED / SIZED CORRECTLY
Make sure that a supported video mode has been selected on the display, or on the
video card / system. If it is impossible to position the image correctly, ie the image adjustment
controls will not move the image far enough, then test it again using another graphics card for the
PC system. This situation can occur with a custom graphics card that is not close to standard
timings or if something is in the graphics line that may be affecting the signal, such as a signal
splitter (please note that normally a signal splitter will not have any adverse effect).
If it is impossible to change to the correct resolution/color depth, check if you have the right VGA
driver installed in your system.
IMAGE APPEARANCE:
A faulty TFT panel can have black lines, pixel errors, failed sections, flickering or flashing image.
Incorrect graphics card refresh rate, resolution or interlaced mode will probably cause the image
to be the wrong size, it may scroll, flicker badly or possibly even no image is present. Sparkling on
the display may be a faulty TFT panel signal cable.
CONTINUED FAILURE:
If unit after unit keeps failing, consider and investigate whether you are short circuiting the
equipment or doing something else seriously wrong.
DEW CONDENSATION BEHIND GLASS:
Power on the TFT product and set brightness to 100%. Turn off any automatic screensavers on
PC or similar. During minutes the dew will be gone. To speed up the process, use a fan heater for
a reasonable time. Do not overheat the TFT product.
General - Appendix
IND100077-8
88
Tests
Certificated by
JH 10T06 STD Ax
JH 10T06 MMD Ax
JH 15T05 MMD Ax
JH 19T02 MMD Ax
GL - Germanischer Lloyd
ABS - American Bureau of Shipping
DNV - Det Norske Veritas
ClassNK - Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
KR - Korean Register Of Shipping
LRS - Lloyd's Register of Shipping
BV - Bureau Veritas
JH 20T03 MMD Ax
JH 15T05 STD Ax
JH 20T06 MMD Ax
JH 23T02 MMD Ax
General - Appendix
IND100077-10
89
Tests
Certificated by
JH 12T01 MMC A4
JH 15T05 MMC A1
JH 19T02 MMC A1
JH 23T02 MMC A1
General - Appendix
IND100077-10
90
Declaration of Conformity
We, manufacturer
Jakob Hatteland Display A/S
msosen, N-5578 Nedre Vats, Norway
declare under our sole responsibility that the
MMD, MMC, STD and MIL products
is in conformity with the following standards
in accordance with the EMC Directive
Signature:........................................................
Frode Grindheim
Technical Director
Jakob Hatteland Display A/S
Signature:........................................................
Arne Kristiansen
Development Engineer
Jakob Hatteland Technology A/S
Before returning goods, please contact your system supplier before sending anything directly
to JHD. When you return products after loan, test, evaulation or products subject for credit,
you must ensure that all accessories received from our warehouse is returned to JHD.
This applies to cables, powermodules and additional equipment except screws or similar, user
manual, datasheets or other written paper documents. Furthermore, the product must not have any
minor / medium or severe scratches, chemical spills or similar on the backcover, front frame or
glass.
This is needed to credit the invoice 100%. Missing parts will not be subject for credit, and you will
not get total credit for returned product. You will either be charged separately or the amount is
withdrawn from the credit. If you noticed that our product missed accessories upon receival, we
are of course open for further investigation and positive solutions. If you decide to ship the missing
items on the after hand, you will get 100% credit for that particular invoice or items received at JHD
incoming goods control. Please contact our sales personnel if additional questions.
Current prices apply as per May 2004:
Signal Cable DSUB 15P Male or Female - Approx 1,8meters
Price:
Price:
Price:
Price:
General - Appendix
IND100077-14
92
Terms
The Hatteland Group - Terms Of Sale And Delivery:
1) APPLICATION
The terms of sale and delivery include the following companies: Autostore AS, Jakob Hatteland Assembly AS,
Jakob Hatteland Computer AS, Jakob Hatteland Display AS, Jakob Hatteland Logistics, Jakob Hatteland Supply AS
and Jakob Hatteland Technology AS.
2) PRICE
a) The price is per each, if nothing else has been stated, VAT not included. Price is based on the prices from our
suppliers, current custom rates, taxes, rate of exchange and international raw material prices. We reserve ourselves
the rights to adjustments in case of alternation on the above mentioned.
b) Included in the price is the suppliers standard packing. In case of re-packing/smaller quantities we reserve
ourselves the right to add an additional sum for warrantable packing according to CECC 0015 (Basic inspection for
protection of electrostatic sensitive devices)
3) VALIDITY
If nothing else has been stated in our quotation, the offer is valid for 30 days from the date of quotation.
4) PACKAGE QUOTATION
A package quotation means that all the components offered, must be ordered by us. If one component or more are
removed from the quotation, the prices given in the package quotation are not valid.
5) TERMS OF PAYMENT
Cash on delivery or payment in advance. Net granted for companies, schools and institutions only, according to
agreement. In case of too late payment 1.5% interest/month will be charged. Seller has mortage rights in the goods
delivered until the purchase price, additional interests and charges have been paid in full. Accepted bill is not
considered as payment until it has been honoured in full.
6) TIME OF DELIVERY
The quoted time of delivery is based on information from our suppliers. We disclaim any responsibility for the
consequences of any delay or cancellation from our suppliers. Belated delivery gives not solely the right for
cancellation.
7) DELIVERY POINT OF TIME
Goods are considered delivered to customer when handed over to charterer.
8) FREIGHT / PACKING / FORWARDING FEE
Jakob Hatteland Display AS charge NOK 50,- in forwarding fee for orders below NOK 1000,-.
For orders below NOK 1000,- Jakob Hatteland Supply AS charge freight according to expenses, and NOK 25,- for
packing. For handling requested beyond ordinary hours NOK 250,- is charged. Express service is charged with NOK
100,- + freight charges. All the companies charge freight according to expenses for orders above NOK 1000,-. VAT
not included.
9) COMPLAINT
By receipt customer must check goods for obvious defects which have to be claimed within 8 days from receipt.
Otherwise acceptance of complaint can not be counted on.
10) GUARANTEE / SERVICES
Time of guarantee is calculated from our date of shipment, and applies to the extent that we are covered by our
suppliers guarantee regulations. The guarantee does no longer apply if:
I) there has been encroached upon the goods without sellers consent
II) terms of payment is not fulfilled
III) the goods have been damaged due to unskilled treatment
IV) components which are sensitive for static electricity have not been unpacked and treated in a secure way.
Minimum requirements: CECC 00015s standards for handling of such components. The guarantee does not include
fair wear and tear.
General - Appendix
IND100077-7
93
Terms
11) RESPONSIBLITY
Seller undertake to deliver faultless and functional capable goods according to existing technical specifications.
Seller disclaim responsibility for any damage or loss which directly or indirectly may be caused due to failure or defect
with the delivered goods, if carelessness from the seller can be limited up to the cost of the goods. The suppliers
responsibility for defects with the supplied goods do not include secondary damage or loss.
12) CANCELLATION / RETURN
Binding sales contract is concluded when we have confirmed customers purchase order. Any disagreements in our
order confirmation must be reported to seller within 6 days. The agreement can not be altered without our permission,
after acceptance from our supplier. If goods are wanted to be returned, a Return No must be assigned from seller.
Returned goods without a Return No will not be accepted. By return of stock listed goods, 20% return fee is charged.
Returned goods are shipped on customers account and risk.
13) LOAN, RENT and DEMO
When borrowing of goods for demo/test, the date of return must be added to the document. If no date has been
stated, date of return is two weeks from the date of the document. Before return, seller must be contacted for a
Return No (RTK). Goods which have been sold with an agreed right of return within stated terms, shall also have a
Return No. The Return No must be obtained before the stated date of return. Returned goods without a Return No, or
which have not been packed in original packing, will not be accepted.
14) LIMITATIONS
If any of our suppliers claim limited delivery terms towards us, our terms of delivery will be restriced according to
those.
15) SOFTWARE
Sold or borrowed software is not allowed to be copied or spread in other ways, without a written permission.
16) RE-EXPORT
Goods delivered from seller may be subject to special rules of exportation in their suppliers native country. Buyer is
responsible to obtain necessary permissions for further export/re-sale.
17) QUESTION IN DISPUTE
To settle any dispute the Karmsund Herredsrett is approved the legal venue.
General - Appendix
IND100077-7
94
Terms
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CONSIGNEE
1) CONTROL
Control the goods immediately by receipt. Examine the quantity towards the invoice/packinglist/shipping documents.
Look for outward defects on the packing which may indicate damage on or loss of contents. Control the container and
the seals for any defects.
2) SECURING EVIDENCE
When defects on the goods have been found, evidence must be secured, and seller must be informed. Call the
transporter and point out the defects. Add a description of the defects on the goods receipt, the forwarders copy of
the way-bill or on the driving slip.
3) RESCUE
Bound the damage. Try to restrict the damage and the loss. Seller will compensate expences incurred due to
reasonable security efforts in addition to damage and loss.
4) COMPLAINT
Write immediately a complaint to the transporter or his agent. Forward immediately the complaint to the transporter or
his agent, and hold the transporter responsible for the defects. The complaint must be sent at the latest:
- for carriage by sea:
within 3 days
- for overland / air transportation
within 7 days
5) DOCUMENTATION
For any claims the following documentation is required, and must be forwared to the company or their agent:
invoice, way-bill and/or bill of landing, and/or statement of arrival, inspection document, besides a copy of the letter of
complaint to the transporter.
General - Appendix
IND100077-7
95
Notes
General Notes: (For all products)
- The unit is type approved according to EN60945 (1997), 4.4, equipment category b) protected
from the weather.
- Other type approvals applies for the different products.
Please see Testing & Approvals Overview section in this manual for more information.
- Use of brightness and push buttons may inhibit visibility of information at night.
For ECDIS systems the brightness knob indication mark should be aligned directly with the
indication mark located on the label. (See Physical Overview or Operation section elsewhere in
this manual)
VGA BIOS Firmware Verify: (On MMD and similar products only)
To verify your BIOS Firmware version, the version number is displayed in the UTILITIES menu in
the right top corner. If no version number shows, you may have a BIOS Firmware below V1.00
This manual currently applies for these BIOS Firmware Versions:
V0.xx / V1.00 / V1.10 / V1.2 / V1.2xx / V1.3xx / V1.5xx / V1.6xx
As the available functions are nearly indentical between older products and V1.6xx, there should
be no critical need to update the BIOS Firmware. In such case, consult your local technician or
sales/technical personnel at Hatteland Display if problems arise during the installation or within
usage of the product, or lack of support for your signal refresh rate etc.
VGA BIOS Firmware Versions: (On MMD and similar products only)
On products from V0.xx to V1.1xx = The advanced version of the OSD menu by startup default.
On products from V1.2xx to V1.5xx = The simplified version of the OSD menu by startup default.
On products from V1.6xx = The memorized state version of the OSD menu by startup default.
Advanced/Service Menu:
You will have a full set of functions available for your personal perference. Only for experienced
users.
Simplified Menu:
You will have a limited set of functions available for your personal perference. For the common
user.
Memorized State Menu:
The menu will either be advanced or simplified upon startup of display. If user changes from
simplified to advanced menu or visa versa, then this will be memorized in memory and it stays in
that mode until user changes it back again. This is only active on VGA BIOS Firmware versions
from V1.6xx and above.
General - Appendix
IND100077-6
96
Notes
97
IND100077-24
Revision History
Rev.
By
Date
Notes
SE
09 May 03
Pressed ver.
SE
16 Jan 04
Pressed ver.
SE
14 May 04
Pressed ver.
SE
11 Aug 04
SE
29 Sep 04
Added note and updated label for ECDIS systems in OPERATION and NOTES sections.
(MMD products only)
Added Sunvisor drawing for JH 10T06 MMD
SE
22 Dec 04
SE
25 Jan 05
Pressed ver.
SE
10 Feb 05
SE
17 Mar 05
10
SE
15 Jun 05
Pressed ver.
11
SE
18 Nov 05
General - Appendix
IND100077-11
98
Contact Information
Main office, Vats / Norway:
Jakob Hatteland Display AS
msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats
Norway
Tel: +47 5276 3700
Fax: +47 5276 5444
Sales office, Oslo / Norway:
Jakob Hatteland Display AS
Gjerdrums vei 12
N-0484 Oslo
Norway
Tel: +47 5276 3700
Fax: +47 2258 6790
Sales office, Frankfurt / Germany:
Jakob Hatteland Display GmbH
Werner Heisenberg Strasse 12
D-63263 Neu-Isenburg
Germany
Tel: +49 6102 370 954
Fax: +49 6102 370 968
www.hatteland.com
Thank you for choosing our quality products !
User Manual
for
HP Deskjet D2360
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-416003-01MU
Unrestricted
1.0
- BLANK PAGE -
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-416003-01MU
Unrestricted
1.0
Hewlett-Packard Company
notices
The information contained in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
All rights reserved. Reproduction,
adaptation, or translation of this
material is prohibited without prior
written permission of Hewlett-Packard,
except as allowed under copyright
laws.
The only warranties for HP products
and services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying
such products and services. Nothing
herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty. HP
shall not be liable for technical or
editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Acknowledgements
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, and Windows
are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
TrueType is a U.S. trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
Adobe, AdobeRGB, and Acrobat are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Terms
The HP Deskjet printer is also referred
to as the HP Deskjet, HP printer, or
printer.
Accessibility
Your HP printer provides a number of
features that make it accessible for
people with disabilities.
Visual
The printer software is accessible for
users with visual impairments or low
vision through the use of Windows
accessibility options and features. It
also supports most assistive
technology such as screen readers,
Braille readers, and voice-to-text
applications. For users who are color
blind, colored buttons and tabs used in
the software and on the HP printer have
simple text or icon labels that convey
the appropriate action.
Mobility
For users with mobility impairments, the
printer software functions can be
executed through keyboard
commands. The software also supports
Windows accessibility options such as
StickyKeys, ToggleKeys, FilterKeys,
and MouseKeys. The printer doors,
buttons, paper trays, and paper guides
can be operated by users with limited
strength and reach.
Support
For more details about the accessibility
of this product and HP's commitment to
product accessibility, visit HP's Web
site at: www.hp.com/accessibility.
Contents
1
2
3
4
5
Welcome.................................................................................................................3
Special features.....................................................................................................5
Get started..............................................................................................................6
The printer at a glance ...........................................................................................6
Buttons and lights ...................................................................................................7
Paper tray ...............................................................................................................9
Print cartridges .....................................................................................................12
Ink-backup mode ..................................................................................................13
Connect to the printer.........................................................................................15
USB ......................................................................................................................15
Print using the Photosmart Express button.....................................................16
About the Photosmart Express button ..................................................................16
About the HP Photosmart Express software ........................................................16
Print photos.........................................................................................................17
Print borderless photos ........................................................................................17
Print photos with a border ....................................................................................19
HP Real Life Digital Photography options ............................................................21
Photo print cartridge .............................................................................................21
Exif Print ...............................................................................................................22
Store and handle photo paper ..............................................................................22
Save money when printing photos .......................................................................23
Print other documents........................................................................................24
Print e-mail ...........................................................................................................24
Print documents ....................................................................................................25
Print letters ...........................................................................................................26
Print envelopes .....................................................................................................27
Print postcards ......................................................................................................28
Print index cards and other small media ..............................................................29
Print labels ............................................................................................................30
Print CD/DVD tattoos ............................................................................................30
Print transparencies ..............................................................................................31
Print brochures .....................................................................................................32
Print greeting cards ..............................................................................................33
Print booklets ........................................................................................................34
Print posters .........................................................................................................36
Print iron-on transfers ...........................................................................................37
Printing tips..........................................................................................................39
Printing shortcuts ..................................................................................................39
Fast/Economical printing ......................................................................................39
Select a paper type ..............................................................................................40
Change the print speed or quality ........................................................................40
Print resolution ......................................................................................................41
Maximum dpi ........................................................................................................41
Print in grayscale ..................................................................................................42
Set the page order ................................................................................................42
Welcome
Welcome to the HP Deskjet D2300 series Help. Use the information in the following table
to find out how to do something. You can also use the table of contents pane on the left
to locate information.
Section
Description
Special features
Get started
Learn how to operate the printer and use and replace the
print cartridges.
Print photos
Learn how to print a variety of documents, including email, greeting cards, envelopes, labels, posters,
booklets, transparencies, and iron-on media.
Printing tips
Printer software
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Chapter 1
(continued)
Section
Description
Supplies
Specifications
HP inkjet supplies
recycling program
Special features
Congratulations! You have purchased an HP Deskjet printer that is equipped with several
exciting features:
Get started
Paper tray
Print cartridges
USB port
Chapter 3
Pressing the Print Cancel button cancels the current print job.
Note Pressing the Print Cancel a second time causes the printer to resume
printing.
Paper tray
For information about the paper tray, select one of these topics.
2.
Chapter 3
3.
4.
If you are printing in the Fast Draft mode, fold out the tray extension stop.
5.
10
3.
4.
11
Chapter 3
5.
6.
Print cartridges
Three print cartridges can be used with the printer.
Note Your printer might be packaged with only a tri-color print cartridge. For
better results, install a black print cartridge in addition to the tri-color print
cartridge. You can print without a black print cartridge but doing so can cause the
printer to print more slowly and printed colors to differ from those you would see
if a black print cartridge and a tri-color print cartridge were installed.
To order print cartridges, go to www.hp.com. Choose your country/region, and
then click Buy or Online Shopping.
For information about using the print cartridges, see the following topics:
12
Everyday printing: Use the black and tri-color print cartridges for everyday print
jobs.
Quality color photos: For more vibrant colors when printing color photographs or
other special documents, remove the black print cartridge and install a photo print
cartridge. The photo print cartridge, in combination with the tri-color print cartridge,
provides you with virtually grain-free photos.
Selection number label: Look at the label on the print cartridge that you are replacing.
Printer documentation: For a list of print cartridge selection numbers, see the
reference guide that came with the printer.
Print Cartridge Ordering Information dialog box: For a list of print cartridge selection
numbers, open the printer Toolbox, click the Estimated Ink Level tab, and then click
the Print Cartridge Information button.
If a print cartridge runs out of ink, the printer can operate in ink-backup mode. For more
information, see Ink-backup mode.
For information about installing a replacement print cartridge, see Installation
instructions.
Ink-backup mode
Use the ink-backup mode to operate the printer with only one print cartridge. The inkbackup mode is initiated when a print cartridge is removed from the print cartridge cradle.
13
Chapter 3
Result
Note HP does not recommend using the photo print cartridge for ink-backup
mode.
14
USB
USB
The printer connects to the computer with a universal serial bus (USB) cable. The
computer must be running Windows 98 SE or later to use a USB cable.
Note For best printing performance, use a USB 2.0 compatible cable.
For instructions about connecting the printer with a USB cable, see the setup poster that
came with the printer.
Note A USB cable might not be packaged with your printer.
15
16
Print photos
The printer software offers several features that make printing digital photos easier and
improve photo quality.
Learn how to print photos
Use the photo print cartridge for great colors and virtually grain-free photos.
Use HP Real Life technologies to touch up photos. For more information, see HP
Real Life Digital Photography options.
Print an Exif Print-formatted photo if you have Exif Print-enabled software.
Prevent photo paper from curling by following the photo paper storage and handling
guidelines.
Use HP Everyday Photo Paper to save money and ink when printing photos.
17
Chapter 6
3.
4.
5.
Place the photo paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should
face down and the short edge should point towards the printer.
If you are using photo paper that has a tear-off tab, verify that the tab is pointing
away from the printer.
Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.
Print
Note If your software program includes a photo printing feature, follow the
instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow these
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the photo in a software program that allows editing, such as HP Photosmart
software.
Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Photo printing-borderless,
and then select the following options:
Print quality: Normal or Best
Note For maximum dpi quality, go to the Paper/Quality tab, and then
click Maximum dpi in the Print quality drop-down list.
18
5.
6.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
19
Chapter 6
4.
5.
Small photos
Large photos
Print
Note If your software program includes a photo printing feature, follow the
instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow these
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the photo in a software program that allows editing, such as HP Photosmart
software.
Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Photo printing-with white
borders, and then select the following options:
Print quality: Normal or Best
Note For maximum dpi quality, go to the Paper/Quality tab, and then
click Maximum dpi in the Print quality drop-down list.
5.
6.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
20
The photo print cartridge can be purchased separately if it is not included with your
printer.
To install the photo print cartridge
To install the photo print cartridge, remove the black print cartridge from the printer,
and then install the photo print cartridge in the right side of the print cartridge cradle.
21
Chapter 6
In the Paper type drop-down list, select the appropriate photo paper type.
Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Exif Print
Exif Print (Exchangeable Image File Format 2.2) is an international digital imaging
standard that simplifies digital photography and enhances printed photos. When a photo
is taken with an Exif Print-enabled digital camera, Exif Print captures information such
as exposure time, type of flash, and color saturation, and stores it in the image file. The
printer software then uses this information to automatically perform image-specific
enhancements to create outstanding photos.
To print Exif Print-enhanced photos, you must have the following items:
22
Storage
Keep unused photo paper in a plastic bag. Store the packaged photo paper on a flat
surface in a cool place.
When you are ready to print, remove only the paper that you plan to use immediately
from the plastic bag. When you have finished printing, return any unused photo
paper to the plastic bag.
Do not leave unused photo paper in the paper tray. The paper might start to curl,
which can reduce the quality of your photos.
Handling
Always hold photo paper by its edges. Fingerprints on photo paper can reduce print
quality.
If the corners of the photo paper curl more than 10 mm (0.4 inch), flatten the paper
by putting it in the storage bag, and then gently bending it in the opposite direction
of the curl until the paper lies flat.
Photo paper should be flat before it is printed on.
23
Documents
Letters
Envelopes
Postcards
Index cards
Labels
CD/DVD tattoos
Transparencies
Brochures
Greeting cards
Booklets
Posters
Iron-on transfers
Printing tips: Minimize your cost and effort while maximizing the quality of your printouts
with printing tips.
Printer software: Learn about the printer software.
Print e-mail
Guidelines
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 100 sheets of plain paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place plain paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.
24
3.
4.
Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click General everyday printing
or Fast/Economical printing, and then specify the following print settings:
Paper type: Plain paper
Paper size: An appropriate paper size
4. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Print documents
Guidelines
For draft documents, use Fast/Economical printing.
Save paper with two-sided printing.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 100 sheets of paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place plain paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.
25
Chapter 7
3.
4.
Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.
Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click General everyday
printing, and then specify the following print settings:
Paper type: Plain paper
Paper size: An appropriate paper size
4. Select the following print settings:
Print quality if you want a print quality other than Normal.
Print on both sides if you want to print on both sides of the paper.
For more information, see Two-sided printing.
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Print letters
Guidelines
For information about printing an envelope for your letter, see envelopes.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 100 sheets of paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place plain paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.
Note If you are using letterhead paper, the letterhead should face down and
point toward the printer.
26
3.
4.
Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Presentation printing, and
then specify the following print settings:
Paper type: Plain paper
Paper size: An appropriate paper size
4. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Print envelopes
Guidelines
Avoid using envelopes that have the following features:
Clasps or windows
Thick, irregular, or curled edges
Shiny or embossed coatings
Wrinkles, tears, or other damage
You can print a single envelope or multiple envelopes.
Align the envelope edges before inserting the envelopes in the paper tray.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 10 envelopes.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place the envelopes in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should
face down. The flap should be on the left side.
27
Chapter 7
3.
4.
Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then select the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate envelope size
Type is: Plain paper
3. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Print postcards
Guidelines
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 20 postcards.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place the cards in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down and the short edge should point toward the printer.
3. Push the cards into the printer until they stop.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the cards.
28
Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate card size
Type is: An appropriate card type
Print quality: Normal or Best
3. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Note If an out-of-paper message is displayed, see Out of paper message for
help in resolving the problem.
Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate card size
Type is: Plain paper
3. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Note If an out-of-paper message is displayed, see Out of paper message for
help in resolving the problem.
29
Chapter 7
Print labels
Guidelines
Use only paper, plastic, or clear labels that are designed specifically for inkjet
printers.
Use only full sheets of labels.
Avoid using labels that are sticky, wrinkled, or pulling away from the protective
backing.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 15 sheets of labels (use only Letter or A4size sheets).
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Fan the edges of the label sheets to separate them, and then align the edges.
3. Place the label sheets in the right side of the tray. The label side should face down.
4. Push the sheets into the printer until they stop.
5. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the sheets.
Print
Note If your software program includes a label printing feature, follow the
instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow the
instructions below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
30
Guidelines
See the instructions that are included with the CD/DVD tattoo for the most current
printing tips.
To avoid damaging the printer, do not feed a CD/DVD tattoo through the printer more
than once.
Make sure the CD/DVD tattoo covers the entire backing sheet with no exposed
spaces. Separating any part of the CD/DVD tattoo from the protective backing sheet
before printing could damage the printer.
Avoid using a CD/DVD tattoo that is pulling away from the protective backing, or that
is wrinkled, curled, or damaged in any way.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 1 sheet of CD/DVD tattoo paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place one sheet of CD/DVD tattoo paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be
printed on should face down.
3. Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.
Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings:
Size is: 5x7in.
Type is: HP CD/DVD Tattoo
Print quality: Best
3. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Print transparencies
Guidelines
For great results, use HP Premium Inkjet Transparency Film.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 20 transparencies.
31
Chapter 7
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place the transparencies in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed should
face down and the adhesive strip should face up and toward the printer.
3. Carefully push the transparencies into the printer until they stop, so that the adhesive
strips do not catch on one another.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the transparencies.
Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Presentation printing, and
then specify the following print settings:
Paper type: An appropriate transparency film
Paper size: An appropriate paper size
4. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Print brochures
Guidelines
Open the file in a software program and assign the brochure size. Ensure that the
size corresponds to the paper size on which you want to print the brochure.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 30 sheets of brochure paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place the paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.
32
3.
4.
Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
3. Specify the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate paper size
Type is: An appropriate HP inkjet paper or other paper type
Note Not all paper sizes and types are available for borderless printing.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
33
Chapter 7
4.
5.
Print
Note If your software program includes a greeting card printing feature, follow
the instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow
the instructions below.
1.
2.
3.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Print booklets
Booklet printing automatically arranges and resizes the pages of a document so that
when the document is folded into a booklet, the page order is correct.
For example, when a four-page booklet is printed on both sides of the paper, the pages
are reordered and printed like this:
Guidelines
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 80 sheets of paper.
34
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place plain paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.
3. Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.
Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Two-sided, Duplex, printing.
4. In the Booklet layout drop-down list, click one of the following binding options:
Left edge booklet
Right edge booklet
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
6. When prompted, reload the printed pages in the paper tray as shown below.
7.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
35
Chapter 7
Print posters
Guidelines
For poster printing, sections of the poster are automatically arranged on individual
sheets that can be taped together. After the sections of a poster have been printed,
trim the edges of the sheets and tape the sheets together.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place plain paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.
3. Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.
Print
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate paper size
Type is: Plain paper
3. Click the Finishing tab, and then select the number of sheets for the poster.
4. Click the Basics tab, and then specify the orientation.
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
36
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Place the iron-on transfer paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed
on should face down.
3. Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.
Print
Note If your software program includes an iron-on transfer printing feature,
follow the instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise,
follow the instructions below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
37
Chapter 7
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
38
Printing tips
Save time
Save money
Printing shortcuts
Use printing shortcuts to print with print settings that you use often. The printer software
has several specially designed printing shortcuts that are available in the Printing
Shortcuts list.
Note When you select a printing shortcut the appropriate printing options are
automatically displayed. You can leave them as is or change them.
Printing shortcuts
Use the Printing Shortcuts tab for the following print tasks:
Fast/Economical printing
Use Fast/Economical printing to produce draft-quality printouts quickly.
39
Chapter 8
Documents
E-mail
Presentation printing
Use Presentation printing to print high-quality documents, including:
Letters
Brochures
Transparencies
40
Best provides the best balance between high quality and speed and can be used
for high quality prints. For most documents, the Best setting prints more slowly than
the Normal setting.
Maximum dpi optimizes the dots per inch (dpi) that the HP Deskjet prints. Printing
in maximum dpi takes longer than printing with other settings and requires a large
amount of disk space. For more information, see Maximum dpi.
Print resolution
The printer software displays the print resolution in dots per inch (dpi). The dpi varies
according to the paper type and print quality that you select in the printer software.
To view the print resolution
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
3. In the Type is drop-down list, select the type of paper that you have loaded.
4. In the Print quality drop-down list, select the appropriate print quality setting for
your project.
The print resolution dpi is displayed beneath the Print quality drop-down list.
Maximum dpi
Use maximum dpi mode to print high-quality, sharp images.
To get the most benefit from maximum dpi mode, use it to print high-quality images such
as digital photographs. When you select the maximum dpi setting, the printer software
displays the optimized dots per inch (dpi) that the HP Deskjet will print.
Printing in maximum dpi takes longer than printing with other settings and requires a
large amount of disk space.
Note If a photo print cartridge is also installed, the print quality is enhanced. A
photo print cartridge can be purchased separately if it is not included with the
HP Deskjet.
To print in Maximum dpi mode
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
3. In the Type is drop-down list, select the appropriate paper type.
4. In the Print quality drop-down list, click Maximum dpi.
The print resolution is displayed in maximum dpi beneath the print quality setting.
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
41
Chapter 8
Print in grayscale
To print in grayscale
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Color tab.
3. Select the Print in grayscale check box, and then select a grayscale option.
4. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
4.
Back to front: The last page of the document will be on top when the document
is finished printing. You have to reorder the printed pages.
Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
42
Resize a document
Use the printer software to print a document that is formatted for one paper size on
another paper size. Doing this can be useful if you do not have the correct paper size
available.
For example, if you have created a document that is formatted for letter-size paper, but
you do not have any letter-size paper available, you can print the document on another
paper size that is available.
To resize a document for a different paper size
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Effects tab.
3. Select the Print document on check box, and then select the target paper size in
the drop-down list.
The target paper size is the size of the paper on which you are printing, not the size
for which the document was formatted.
4. Select the Scale to fit check box.
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Print preview
Use the print preview function to view a printout on your computer before printing a
document. If the printout does not look correct, you can cancel the print job and adjust
the print settings as needed.
To preview a printed document
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Basics tab.
3. Select the Show print preview check box.
43
Chapter 8
4.
5.
Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Before the document prints, a preview is displayed.
Do one of the following:
Click OK to print the document.
Click Cancel to cancel the print job. Adjust the print settings as needed before
printing the document.
Two-sided printing
Use two-sided printing, also called duplexing, to print on both sides of the paper. Printing
on both sides of the paper is not only economical, but environmentally conscious as well.
To print a two-sided document
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Two-sided, duplex printing.
4. In the Print on both sides drop-down list, click Manually.
5. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
The printer prints the odd-numbered pages first.
6. After the odd-numbered pages have been printed, reload the printed pages with the
printed side facing up.
7.
44
Portrait
Landscape
6.
45
Printer software
46
To save time when printing, set the default print settings to options that you use often.
That way, you do not have to specify the options every time you use the printer.
To change the default print settings
1. Double-click the HP Digital Imaging Monitor icon on the right side of the Windows
taskbar.
2.
3.
47
Chapter 9
48
49
10
Maintenance
Selection numbers
When buying replacement print cartridges, look for the print cartridge selection number.
50
Selection number label: Look at the label on the print cartridge that you are replacing.
Printer documentation: For a list of print cartridge selection numbers, see the
reference guide that came with the printer.
Print Cartridge Information dialog box: For a list of print cartridge selection numbers,
open the printer Toolbox, click the Estimated Ink Level tab, and then click the Print
Cartridge Information button.
Ink-backup mode
The printer can operate with only one print cartridge installed. For more information, see
Ink-backup mode.
Installation instructions
To install a print cartridge
1. Press the Power button to turn on the printer.
2. Open the printer cover.
The print cartridge cradle moves to the center of the printer.
3. Push down on the print cartridge.
4. Slide the print cartridge out of the cradle.
51
Chapter 10
5.
Remove the replacement print cartridge from its packaging and carefully remove the
plastic tape. Hold the print cartridge so that the copper strip is on the bottom and
facing toward the printer.
Caution Do not touch the print cartridge ink nozzles or copper contacts.
Touching these parts will result in clogs, ink failure, and bad electrical
connections. Do not remove the copper strips. They are required electrical
contacts.
6.
52
Ink nozzles
Copper contacts
Slide the print cartridge firmly into the cradle at a slight upward angle until you feel
resistance.
7.
8.
9.
For information about storing print cartridges, see Maintain print cartridges.
For information about recycling empty print cartridges, see HP inkjet supplies recycling
program.
Warning Keep both new and used print cartridges out of the reach of children.
Calibrate color
Perform a color calibration if the colors in photos that are printed with the photo print
cartridge consistently look incorrect.
Before performing a color calibration, align the print cartridges, and then reprint the photo.
If the color is still incorrect, perform a color calibration.
53
Chapter 10
To calibrate color
1. Load Letter or A4 unused plain white paper in the paper tray.
2. Verify that both a tri-color print cartridge and a photo print cartridge are installed in
the printer.
3. Open the printer Toolbox.
4. Click Calibrate Color.
5. Click Start, and then follow the onscreen instructions.
The Estimated Ink Level tab also contains print cartridge ordering information. To view
this information, click the Print Cartridge Information button.
54
Surface
Remedy
Skin
White fabric
Color fabric
Caution Always use cold water to remove ink from fabric. Warm or hot water
can set the ink into the fabric.
Distilled water (tap water can contain contaminants that can damage the print
cartridge)
Cotton swabs or other soft, lint-free material that will not stick to the print cartridge
55
Chapter 10
3.
4.
Copper contacts
Repeat this process until no ink residue or dust appears on the swab.
Insert the print cartridges in the HP Deskjet, and then close the cover. For more
information, see Installation instructions.
Maintenance tips
Storage tips
Print cartridge protector
Maintenance tips
Keep all print cartridges in their sealed packages until they are needed. Print
cartridges should be stored at room temperatures (15 to 35 C or 59 to 95 F).
Do not remove the plastic tape covering the ink nozzles until you are ready to install
the print cartridge in the printer. If the plastic tape has been removed from the print
cartridge, do not attempt to reattach it. Reattaching the tape damages the print
cartridge.
Storage tips
56
When you remove print cartridges from the printer, store them in an airtight plastic
container.
Make sure that the ink nozzles are face down but are not in contact with the
container.
Caution Do not drop the print cartridge. Dropping the print cartridge can
damage it.
Printer Toolbox
The printer Toolbox contains a number of useful tools to enhance the performance of the
printer.
Use the printer Toolbox to perform the following tasks:
57
Chapter 10
58
11
Troubleshooting
Installation problems
Printer does not print
Paper jam
Paper problems
Printer is stalled
Print cartridge problems
Photos do not print correctly
Print quality is poor
Document is misprinted
Problems with borderless documents
HP Photosmart Express software is not installed
Error messages
Power light is on or flashing
Document prints slowly
If you continue to have problems
Installation problems
If the software installation program stops or fails, check the following topics for more
information:
59
Chapter 11
7.
Quit any antivirus programs or other software programs that are running on the
computer.
Note To quit an antivirus program, follow the manufacturers instructions.
8.
9.
60
2.
3.
4.
61
Chapter 11
Make sure the power cord is firmly connected to the printer and plugged into a power
outlet.
Check the USB cable. If you are using an older cable, it might not be working
properly. If you experience problems, the USB cable might need to be replaced. Also
verify that the cable does not exceed 3 meters (9.8 feet) in length.
Check the connection from your printer to your computer. Verify that the USB cable
is securely plugged into the USB port on the back of your printer. Make sure the
other end of the USB cable is plugged into a USB port on your computer. After the
cable is connected properly, turn your printer off and then on again.
If you are connecting the printer through a USB hub, make sure the hub is turned
on. If the hub is on, try connecting the printer directly to your computer.
Try connecting the USB cable to another USB port on your computer. After you
check the connections, try restarting your computer. Turn your printer off and then
on again.
Note For best printing performance, use a USB 2.0 compatible cable.
2.
62
Paper jam
To clear a paper jam
1. Remove the paper from the paper tray.
2. If you are printing labels, verify that a label did not become detached from the label
sheet while passing through the printer.
3. Turn off the printer.
4. Remove the rear access door. Press the handle to the right, and then pull out the
door.
5.
Remove the paper jam from the back of the printer, and then replace the rear access
door securely.
6.
If the paper jam cannot be removed from the back of the printer, raise the printer
cover, remove the paper jam from the front of the printer, and then lower the cover.
Caution Remove the paper jam carefully as it is possible to damage the
printer when removing paper from the front.
7.
63
Chapter 11
8.
9.
Paper problems
Paper weight
Paper might be loaded improperly
Paper weight
The printer might print on multiple sheets of paper at once if the paper is under the
recommended paper weight. Use paper that is within the recommended specifications.
64
Printer is stalled
If the printer stalls while printing a document, raise the printer cover, and then disconnect
the power cable from the back of the printer.
Caution First, check for any loose or broken parts in the printer. If you find loose
or broken parts, go to www.hp.com/support.
If there are no loose or broken parts, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check for and remove any obstacles, such as packing tape or materials, that prevent
the print cartridges from moving back and forth.
Make sure the print cartridges are installed securely in the print cartridge cradle.
For more information, see Installation instructions.
Make sure the tri-color print cartridge is installed in the left side of the cradle and the
black or photo print cartridge is installed in the right side of the cradle.
Check for and clear any paper jam.
For more information, see Paper jam.
Lower the printer cover.
Connect the power cable to the back of the printer, and then turn on the printer.
65
Chapter 11
3.
4.
5.
6.
Warranty date
Selection number
Check the list of print cartridges that can be used in the printer.
a. Open the printer Toolbox.
b. Click the Estimated Ink Levels tab.
c. Click the Print Cartridge Information button and view the list of print cartridge
selection numbers.
The reference guide that came with the printer also shows the print cartridge
selection numbers.
Check the warranty date on the print cartridge.
If the print cartridge has the wrong selection number, or if the warranty has expired,
install a new print cartridge. For more information, see Installation instructions.
Close the printer cover.
If the Power light is not flashing, then the problem is fixed.
If the Power light is flashing, visit HP Technical Support at www.hp.com/support.
66
3.
4.
5.
Reinstall the print cartridge. For more information, see Installation instructions.
If the Power light is not flashing, the problem is solved.
If the Power light is flashing, go to step 4.
Manually clean the print cartridge.
Reinsert the print cartridge in the printer and close the printer cover.
If the Power light is still flashing, the print cartridge is faulty and must be replaced.
Note You can print with one print cartridge in ink-backup mode if you do not
have a replacement print cartridge available. For more information, see Inkbackup mode.
6.
If the Power light continues to flash after replacing the print cartridge, visit HP
Technical Support at www.hp.com/support.
Verify that the photo paper is placed in the paper tray with the side to be printed on
facing down.
Slide the paper forward until it stops.
Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.
Do not press the guide so firmly against the paper that the paper bends or curls.
67
Chapter 11
Tab
Setting
Size is: An appropriate paper size
Paper/Quality
Print is faded
68
The protective piece of plastic tape might still be attached to the print cartridges.
Verify that the plastic tape has been removed from the print cartridges.
The print cartridges might be out of ink. Replace one or both empty print cartridges.
For more information, see View estimated ink levels.
Document is misprinted
Verify that only one type of paper is placed in the paper tray, and that the paper has
been placed in the tray correctly.
Verify that the paper guide fits firmly against the edge of paper.
Reprint the document.
Setting
Basics
Paper/Quality
Effects
Finishing
69
Chapter 11
If parts of the document are still missing, the printer settings might be overridden by the
software program print settings. Select the appropriate print settings from within the
software program.
Slide the flap inside the envelope before loading it in the printer.
Confirm that the paper guide fits firmly against the edge of the envelope.
Reprint the envelope.
Verify that the paper size that is specified in the Paper Size drop-down list on the
Printing Shortcuts tab matches the size of the paper that is loaded in the paper
tray.
Select the appropriate paper type in the Paper Type drop-down list on the Printing
Shortcuts tab.
If printing in grayscale, select High Quality under Print in Grayscale on the
Color tab.
Do not print borderless documents in ink-backup mode. Always have two print
cartridges installed in the printer when printing borderless documents.
For more information, see Ink-backup mode.
70
Verify that no problem exists with the source image. For example, if you are printing a
scanned image, verify that the image was not crooked when it was scanned.
If the problem is not caused by the source image, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that the photo paper is not curled. If the photo paper is curled, place the paper in
a plastic bag and gently bend it in the opposite direction of the curl until the paper lies
flat. If the problem persists, then use photo paper that is not curled.
For instructions about preventing photo paper from curling, see Store and handle photo
paper.
71
Chapter 11
If the border appears above the tear-off tab, then align the print cartridges.
printer in the CD drive. Follow the onscreen instructions to install the HP Photosmart
Express software.
Error messages
73
Chapter 11
74
Power light
If the Power light is on, the printer is either printing or ready to print.
If the Power light is off, the printer is off.
If the Power light is flashing, see the following information.
75
Chapter 11
2.
Verify that the computer hard disk space, RAM, and processor speed meet the
system requirements.
The system requirements are listed in the reference guide that came with the printer.
Make space available on the hard drive by deleting unwanted files.
76
HP support
Support process
HP support by phone
Support process
If you have a problem, follow these steps
1.
2.
3.
4.
HP support by phone
Placing a call
Call HP support while you are in front of the computer and the HP Deskjet. Be prepared to provide
the following information:
Device model number (located on the label on the front of the device)
Device serial number (located on the back or bottom of the device)
Messages that appear when the situation occurs
Answers to these questions:
77
Appendix A
78
Supplies
Order the following supplies with your HP Deskjet.
Paper
To order media such as HP Premium Paper, HP Premium Inkjet Transparency Film, or HP Greeting
Cards, go to www.hp.com.
Choose your country/region, and then click Buy or Online Shopping.
USB cables
C6518A HP USB AB 2-meter cable
79
Technical information
Printer specifications
Environmental product stewardship program
Regulatory notices
Printer specifications
The HP Deskjet has the following specifications and requirements.
Physical specifications
Printer dimension (without the tray extended): 140 mm high x 467 mm wide x 190 mm deep (5.51
inches high x 16.57 inches wide x 7.48 inches deep)
Printer weight (without print cartridges): 2.5 kg (5.51 lbs)
Software compatibility
Windows compatible (98 SE, Me, 2000, and XP)
Memory
384 KB integrated memory
Minimum system requirements
Operating system
Processor
RAM
Hard disk
space
Pentium II or equivalent
64 MB
200 MB
Note For best printing performance, use a USB 2.0 compatible cable.
For more information, visit HPs Commitment to the Environment Web site at:
www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/index.html
This section contains the following topics:
Paper use
Plastics
Material safety data sheets
Recycling program
HP inkjet supplies recycling program
Energy consumption - Energy Star
Paper use
This product is suited for the use of recycled paper according to DIN 19309 and EN 12281:2002.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability
to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of product life.
Recycling program
HP offers an increasing number of product return and recycling programs in many countries/regions,
and partners with some of the largest electronic recycling centers throughout the world. HP
conserves resources by reselling some of its most popular products. For more information regarding
recycling of HP products, please visit:
For more information regarding recycling of HP products, please visit:
www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/recycle/
ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered service mark of the U.S. EPA. As an ENERGY STAR partner,
HP has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.
For more information on ENERGY STAR guidelines, go to the following Web site:
www.energystar.gov
81
Appendix C
Regulatory notices
FCC statement
LED indicator statement
Notice to users in Korea
FCC statement
The United States Federal Communications Commission (in 47 CFR 15.105) has specified that the
following notice be brought to the attention of users of this product.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Modifications (part 15.21): The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or
modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
For further information, contact the Manager of Corporate Product Regulations, Hewlett-Packard
Company, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, CA 94304, (650) 857-1501.
82
Index
A
accessibility 2
after the support period 78
aligning print cartridges 53
B
booklet printing 34
borderless printing 70
bound two-sided printing 44
brochure printing 32
buttons
Photosmart Express
button 8
Power button 7
Print Cancel button 8
C
calling HP support 77
CD/DVD tattoo printing 30
cleaning
print cartridges
automatically 53
print cartridges manually
55
printer body 54
clearing the print queue 62
color calibration 53
custom paper size 42
D
default print settings 46
default printer 46
digital photos 21
document is misprinted
document is printed offcenter or at an angle 69
document printing 25
document prints slowly
complex documents are
printing 75
ink-backup mode 75
Maximum dpi selected 75
multiple programs are
open 75
printer software is
outdated 76
system requirements 76
HP Photosmart Software Help
dpi, maximum 41
duplexing 44
E
e-mail printing 24
energy consumption 81
Energy Star 81
envelope printing 27
environment
Environmental product
stewardship program
80
error messages
other errors 73
out of paper message 64
print cartridge errors 73
estimated ink level 54
Exif Print 22
F
fast/economical printing
FCC statement 82
39
G
general everyday printing 40
grayscale printing 42
greeting card printing 33
H
Hewlett-Packard Company
notices 2
HP Photosmart software
downloading 49
I
index card printing 29
Ink Status window 48
ink, removing ink from skin and
clothing 54
ink-backup mode 13
installation
program stops 59
installing print cartridges 50
iron-on transfer printing 37
L
label printing
30
if no error message
appears 75
presentation printing 40
print cartridge problems
incorrect print cartridge 66
print cartridges
aligning 53
cleaning automatically 53
cleaning manually 55
faulty 66
installing 50
maintaining 56
not installed properly 66
ordering information 54
photo print cartridge 21
problem message 66
selection numbers 50
used with the printer 12
print preview 43
print quality
blank pages print 69
print queue, clearing 62
print resolution 41
print settings
changing 47
default settings 46
print speed 40
printer does not feed paper
64
printer features 6
printer is not printing 61
printer is stalled 65
printer maintenance 50
printer name does not
appear 61
printer prints on multiple sheets
at once 64
printer properties 47
printer software
downloading updates 49
printer specifications 80
printer Toolbox 57
printer troubleshooting 59
printing
4800 x 1200 optimized
dpi 41
booklets 34
borderless photos 17
bound two-sided printing
44
brochures 32
CD/DVD tattoos 30
custom paper size 42
84
digital photos 21
documents 25
e-mails 24
envelopes 27
Exif Print 22
fast/economical 39
general everyday printing
40
grayscale 42
greeting cards 33
high quality 41
index cards and small
media 29
iron-on transfers 37
labels 30
letters 26
maximum dpi 41
multiple pages on single
sheet 43
other documents 24
photos 17
photos with a border 19
Photosmart Express
button 16
postcards 28
posters 36
presentation printing 40
print preview 43
print quality 40
print resolution 41
print settings 47
print speed 40
resizing documents 43
selecting a paper type 40
setting the page order 42
software 46
tips 39
transparencies 31
two-sided printing 44
with one print cartridge 13
Printing Shortcuts tab 39
printing tips 39
problems with borderless
documents
for small photo paper with a
tear off tab 72
R
Real Life technologies 21
recycle
ink cartridges 81
regulatory notices
FCC statement 82
Index
two-sided printing
44
U
Unknown Device message 60
updates
downloading for software
49
HP Photosmart software
49
USB
cable 79
connecting to the printer
15
W
What's This help 48
85
86
User Manual
for
DOT MATRIX PRINTER
OKI MICROLINE 280 Elite
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-416001-01MU
Unrestricted
1.0
- BLANK PAGE -
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-416001-01MU
Unrestricted
1.0
ML280 ELITE
user's guide
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete,
accurate, and up-to-date. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for the results of
errors beyond its control. The manufacturer also cannot guarantee that changes in
software and equipment made by other manufacturers and referred to in this Guide will
not affect the applicability of the information in it. Mention of software products
manufactured by other companies does not necessarily constitute endorsement by the
manufacturer.
While all reasonable efforts have been made to make this document as accurate and
helpful as possible, we make no warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, as to the
accuracy or completeness of the information contained herein.
The most up-to-date drivers and manuals are available from the Oki Europe website:
http://www.okieurope.com
Copyright 2004. All rights reserved.
Oki and Microline are registered trademarks of Oki Electric Industry Company Ltd.
Energy Star is a trademark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency.
Hewlett-Packard, HP, and LaserJet are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard
Company.
Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Apple, Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc.
Other product names and brand names are registered trademarks or trademarks of
their proprietors.
As an Energy Star Program Participant, the manufacturer has
determined that this product meets the Energy Star guidelines for
energy efficiency.
This product complies with the requirements of the Council Directives
89/336/EEC (EMC) and 73/23/EEC (LVD) as amended where applicable
on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to
electromagnetic compatibility and low voltage.
PREFACE > 2
CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Using this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Online usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Printing pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Contents and unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Removing the shipping restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installing/replacing the ribbon cartridge . . . . . . . . . . 11
Ribbon cartridge handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installing the platen knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Adjusting the head gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fitting the paper separator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setting up your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
For AC models:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
For DC models:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Rear feed continuous form fan-fold paper . . . . . . . 17
Bottom feed continuous form fan-fold paper . . . . 20
Top feed single sheet paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Testing your printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Computer connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Parallel (LPT) connection, IEEE 1284 . . . . . . . . . . . 23
USB connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Serial connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Operating your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Front panel operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Setting printer defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Entering the MENU mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Default menu selections - AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the pull tractor unit (if fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Using the cut-sheet feeder (if fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Manual loading with the cut-sheet
feeder installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cut-sheet feeder controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CONTENTS > 3
CONTENTS > 4
WARNING!
A warning appears in this manual like this. A warning provides
additional information which, if ignored, may result in a risk of
personal injury.
NOTE
A note appears like this. A note provides additional information to
supplement the main text.
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on purchasing this Oki printer!
In this chapter you will find a summary of the main features of your
printer followed by some advice on how to use this Users Guide to get
the most from your printer.
The ML280 Elite is an entry level 9 pin dot-matrix printer. It is fast,
robust, compact and light. Outstanding reliability, compact size and
ease of use make it ideal for industrial workstation applications, as
well as customer service points in wholesale, retail and service
environments.
NOTE
The information in this manual is supplemented by the extensive
online help facility associated with the printer driver software.
INTRODUCTION > 6
Online usage
This manual is intended to be read on screen using Adobe Acrobat
Reader. Use the navigation and viewing tools provided in Acrobat.
You can access specific information in two ways:
l
In the list of bookmarks down the left hand side of your screen,
click on the topic of interest to jump to the required topic. (If
the bookmarks are not available, use the Table of Contents.)
Printing pages
The whole book, individual pages, or sections may be printed. The
procedure is:
1.
From the toolbar, select [File], then [Print] (or press the
Ctrl + P keys).
2.
(b)
INTRODUCTION > 7
(c)
3.
Click on OK.
INTRODUCTION > 8
GETTING STARTED
Location
l
Keep your packing materials and carton in case you ever need
to ship or transport the printer.
3
5
4
2
1
6
8
10
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Printer
Ribbon Cartridge
Power Cord(s)
Platen Knob
Sheet Separator
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
9
Installation Safety booklet
Pan European limited Warranty
Manual CD
Driver CD
Setup Guide
Do not plug the printer into the AC supply until the following steps
have been completed:
Remove any packing tape. Insert your hand in the top cover
slot (2) and remove the access cover (1) by lifting it.
2
2.
3.
2.
WARNING!
If you are replacing the ribbon Cartridge, the printhead may be HOT!
3.
1
2
4.
Press gently on the ribbon cartridge until you feel it click into
place.
CAUTION!
Do not remove the ribbon shield (X in graphic above) from the
ribbon!
5.
Turn the take-up knob (a) in the direction of the moulded arrow
to take up any ribbon slack.
a
6.
CAUTION!
Incorrect setting of the print head gap can cause print head damage
or ribbon jams. To avoid these problems set the print head gap for the
type of stationery being used.
To adjust the print head gap, move the coloured lever located to the
left of the ribbon cartridge (a), to the correct position for the type of
stationery being used......
Weight
Lever position
1, 2
2.
3.
For AC models:
1.
Plug the power cord into the back of the printer, then into a
grounded AC outlet.
2.
For DC models:
With the printer switched OFF.....
1.
WARNING!
Observe polarity of connection!
2.
Plug the power cord into the back of the printer and lock by
twisting the collar of the connector clockwise.
3
2
3.
Loading paper
Three types of paper can be used with your printer:
l
When using fan-fold paper, adjust the distance between the sprocket
pins at the ends of the platen to the holes in the paper. Fan-fold paper
can be fed from the rear of the printer, or, if a slotted stand is
available, from underneath.
2.
1
3.
Move the Bail arm lever (2) (on the left-hand side of the
printer) to the front of the machine to lift the Bail bar.
4.
Move the Paper lever (3) (on the right-hand side of the printer)
to the front of the machine, to the fan-fold symbol.
5.
3
5
Turn the Platen knob (5) to advance the paper until it appears
in front of the platen.
7.
Move the Bail arm lever (2) to the rear of the machine to lower
the Bail bar.
8.
Use the Platen knob (5) to advance the paper to the first
printing line.
9.
2.
3.
4.
Move the Bail arm lever (2) (on the left-hand side of the
printer) to the front of the machine to lift the Bail bar.
5.
Move the Paper lever (3) (on the right-hand side of the printer)
to the front of the machine, to the fan-fold symbol.
6.
7.
8.
Use the Platen knob to gently pull the paper up until it appears
in front of the platen, and above the Bail bar
9.
Move the Bail arm lever to the rear of the machine to lower the
Bail bar (6).
10.
Use the Platen knob (5) to advance the paper to the first
printing line.
11.
3
2
1.
2.
Move the Paper lever (1) (on the right-hand side of the printer)
to the rear of the machine, to the Blank sheet of paper symbol.
3.
4.
5.
NOTE
If letter size paper is used, set the cut sheet guide to the line mark on the
paper separator. 80 character width text (10cpi) is then positioned
centrally on the paper.
6.
Insert a single sheet along the Cut Sheet guide until it reaches
the pinch roller. Be sure to keep the paper inside the platen
ends, otherwise the built-in sprocket rollers will tear it.
7.
Move the Bail arm lever (2) towards the front of the machine,
into the open position. The sheet of paper will be pulled
around the platen.
8.
Close the Bail arm lever (2) ensuring that the paper has been
positioned correctly.
9.
10.
The sprockets can be released and moved out from the platen
if required.
2.
Hold down the LINE FEED button and turn the printer ON.
The printer will begin its test print.
3.
To stop the test, press the SELECT button or turn the printer
OFF.
F/W XX.XX
CG XX.XX
42434401YR-00
HSD 10CPI
!$%^&*()0123456789:;<=>@aABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]abcdefghijklm
nopqrstuvwxyz
NOTE
The top of each print test contains information about your printer model.
Be sure to have a copy of the printout handy if you have to call for service.
Computer connections
NOTE
It is not recommended that you connect serial/USB and parallel
cables to the printer simultaneously.
CAUTION!
Make sure the printer and computer are both turned OFF.
1.
2.
3.
USB connection
l
Requires a USB 1.1 cable, maximum length 19.7 ft. (5 m), not
supplied.
NOTES
For connection to a PC running Windows 98 or above (not Windows
95 upgraded to Windows 98).
1.
2.
If you have turned the computer and printer OFF, turn them
back ON.
Serial connection
The Serial Interface Board is an option on this printer and is supplied
with installation and setup instructions. Once this board has been
installed, the serial interface settings will appear in the printer menu
and may need to be adjusted to match your PC.
CAUTION!
Make sure the printer and computer are both turned OFF.
1.
2.
Plug the cable into the serial ports of both your PC and printer
and tighten the thumbscrews (1).
Printer drivers
Printer drivers enable your computer to communicate with the printer.
As with most printer manufacturers, Oki creates printer drivers for use
with popular types of software, such as Microsoft Windows operating
systems, from Windows 95 onwards. Installing a printer driver is
normally a simple process of making a selection within the software.
If a driver is not available by name for your printer, contact the
software manufacturer and ask if they can supply an updated version
of their software with additional drivers. Alternatively, check the
driver availability on the Oki Europe Web Site at:
www.okieurope.com
If you are using bespoke software or software created specifically for
your company, it is unlikely that the CDs supplied with this software
will include drivers for your printer. In this instance you will have to
choose a driver as closely compatible as possible. Compatible drivers
contain printing codes that will operate your printer. They may not
offer the special features of an original driver, but they will allow you
to perform normal printing tasks.
Okis printers contain more than one printer emulation selectable via
the menu system. See the table below for compatible drivers.
However, please note that the emulations listed toward the bottom of
this list are more basic and offer fewer of the printers features.
Microline
Emulation
IBM Emulation
Epson LQ Emulation
ML280 Microline
ML280 IBM
IBM Graphics Printer
ML280 Epson
Epson FX80
Epson FX
FORM
FEED
TOF
SET
SELECT
ALARM
POWER PITCH
10
NLQ
MODE
12
UTILITY
17
HSD
The Front Panel has 9 indicators and 6 buttons. The function of each
is as follows:
Indicators
SELECT
ALARM
POWER
PITCH
MODE
Buttons
LINE FEED
Advances the paper one line for each press.
FORM FEED Advances the paper to the next top of form (TOF) or ejects any single
sheet paper from the printer.
TOF SET
Sets new top of form (TOF) position.
SELECT
Places printer ON or OFF line
PITCH
Changes the character pitch setting (cpi)
MODE
Changes the print style setting.
2.
Press the SELECT button to print the complete menu. This will
detail the current default settings.
3.
Press the LINE FEED button to select the relevant group that
needs to be changed (the group is the left-hand column on the
MENU printout).
4.
Press the FORM FEED button to select the relevant item within
the selected group (the Item is the centre column on the MENU
printout).
5.
6.
Once you have reached the setting that you want, press either
the LINE FEED button (for the next group) or the FORM FEED
button (for the next item) to be changed.
Follow steps to 3 to 5 until all your required settings have been
changed.
7.
NOTE
Important, do not exit the menu mode by switching off the printer, as this
will not save any changes you have made.
Item
Setting
IBM
Utility
SSD
10 CPI
No
Normal
Single
Set II
ASCII
Unslashed
USA
No
6 LPI
No
12"
Uni-directional
64K
No
0
Semi Operation
No
Yes
No
Yes
17.1 CPI
20 CPI
Valid
No
17.1
RPS
Normal
Buffer Print
+5V
Enable
A
B
2.
A
B
3.
Adjust the right tractor to the paper width by pulling its lock
lever forward, sliding the tractor to the desired position, then
pushing the lock lever backward to lock it in place.
4.
Pull the paper under the Bail bar and up to the level of the
tractor unit.
5.
Open the sprocket covers and slide the paper release lever
forward.
A
B
6.
7.
4
5
2
1
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
Move the left paper guide (2) to the position where you wish to
set the left-hand edge of the sheet, making sure that this
paper guide is not set to the right of the paper out sensor (the
groove in the platen).
4.
5.
Insert the paper stack into the hopper and push it against the
left paper guide, making sure that the paper fits under the
corner separators.
6.
7.
Push both paper guide locking levers upward into the locked
position.
8.
Push the paper set lever (1) gently backward into the set
position.
Gently insert the paper from directly above the front sheet
support.
2.
3.
NOTE
The manually set sheet is printed automatically, even when other sheets
are loaded in the hopper. When the FORM FEED button is pressed, the
manually inserted sheet will be fed from the cut-sheet feeder.
CAUTION!
l Do not manually feed paper if a sheet is being fed from the
hopper. Simultaneous feeding of paper will result in a paper
jam.
l To manually feed a sheet of paper, you must use the FORM FEED
button to feed the paper. If the paper is being fed manually and
is positioned using the platen knob rather than the FORM FEED
button, it may be ejected just before printing begins (use the
Platen Knob for fine adjustment only).
2.
3.
4.
Replace the paper roller back into the stand, with the disc on
the left side.
5.
Feed the paper over the roller on the stand. NOT UNDER!
6.
7.
Feed the paper down behind the platen and use platen knob to
bring paper through the printer.
Lift the bail arm as paper comes round to front of platen. (The
paper release lever needs to be in the top position to perform
this step.)
8.
9.
Move the paper release lever toward the front of the machine.
Align the paper so that the exit and entry paper edges align.
Return the paper release lever to the rear position to re-apply
pressure on platen.
10.
11.
Replace the access cover. Fit the cover tabs into the slots at the
printer front. Lower the cover carefully, making sure the paper
fits through the front slot in the access cover.
12.
13.
Turn the platen knob to move the paper to the point where you
want printing to start. (Many word processing packages
automatically allow for a top margin of 25.4mm (1 inch)).
Paper roll
Platen
b
d
MAINTENANCE
Replacing the ribbon cartridge
See Installing/replacing the ribbon cartridge on page 11.
Loading paper
See Loading paper on page 17.
MAINTENANCE > 37
TROUBLESHOOTING
General information
Here are some general things to check before proceeding with
detailed troubleshooting.
l
Does the paper being used meet the specifications for this
product?
Are the correct printer drivers being used for the printer?
NOTE
Settings in your software application will normally override any
settings in your printer driver.
Problem
My word processor files do not print the way I have the menu and front
panel set.
Solution
Remember: The note above!
Before sending a file to the printer, many word processors send either
an initialization string or an I-Prime signal to the printer.
TROUBLESHOOTING > 38
The initialization string contains codes that override the panel and
menu settings. To change your printer to ignore the reset code, enter
the Menu Mode, go to the Set-Up group and change the setting for
Reset Inhibit to Yes.
The I-Prime signal will automatically override any front panel settings
you have made. To eliminate this problem, enter the Menu Mode, go
to the Parallel Interface group and change the setting for I-Prime to
Invalid.
For more information on changing menu settings, see Changing the
Menu Settings in Chapter 3.
Problem
Nothing happens when I turn ON the printer.
Solution
Check the power cord connection to the outlet and to the printer. If
you are using a power strip, make sure it is turned ON, and that the
fuse hasnt blown or that the circuit breaker hasnt tripped. If the
solution is not obvious call for service.
Problem
The printer does not print when the computer sends data.
Solutions
1.
2.
3.
Problem
I'm getting strange symbols, incorrect fonts, etc., when I try to print a
document.
TROUBLESHOOTING > 39
Solutions
1.
2.
3.
Problem
Ink smears on the paper when I print narrow columns.
Solutions
The head gap could be too close. Check that the head gap is set
correctly (see the table in Adjusting the head gap in the Getting
Started section).
Problem
I've installed a new ribbon and the printing is smeared and streaked.
Solution
The ribbon shield (1) is either loose or missing.
TROUBLESHOOTING > 40
Problem
There are dots missing in my printouts (typically, tops and /or bottom
of characters missing).
Solution
The head gap may not be set correctly. Try moving the headgap lever
to a lower setting. If that doesnt help, the printhead may be
damaged; call for service.
Problem
The ALARM light is flashing.
Solution
Try turning the printer OFF and then back ON again. If the light still
blinks, call for service.
Problem
The Print Quality and Character Pitch keys on the front panel don't
work.
Solution
The Operator Panel Function in the printer menu can be used to
disable these buttons (Limited Function). If the printer is part of a
customized system or if it is used by a number of people, the system
manager may have used this option to make sure the printer is always
set properly.
Check with your system manager before changing any menu settings.
Problem
My printer keeps indicating Paper out when there is paper installed.
Solution
The most likely cause is that the paper sensor groove in the platen is
not being covered by paper. Re-align paper to cover the sensor
groove.
Problem
When I am using continuous feed paper, the sprocket holes are torn,
causing alignment problems.
TROUBLESHOOTING > 41
Solution
The most likely cause is that the paper lever is set to friction feed.
Move the lever to Fan-fold (to the front of the printer).
2.
Use the platen knob to back the paper all the way out of the
printer.
CAUTION!
Make sure the printer is turned OFF before you open the access cover.
WARNING!
The printhead may be HOT!
3.
Open the access cover, move the bail arm lever toward the
front of the printer and remove any torn paper.
TROUBLESHOOTING > 42
4.
5.
defective paper
misaligned paper
Defective Paper
Replace the defective paper with a fresh stack.
Misaligned Paper
1.
2.
Use the platen knob to back the paper all the way out of the
printer.
3.
4.
WARNING!
l Always ensure that the printer is switched OFF and that the
power supply lead is disconnected.
l If the printer has been recently used, the printhead may be HOT!
TROUBLESHOOTING > 43
2.
3.
4.
5.
TROUBLESHOOTING > 44
2
1
Item
Part number
Comment
09002303
40673402
YS4011-1272P001
YS4011-1273P001
YS4100-1187P001
4YA4025-1401G002 Life - 200 million characters
42594601
42017901
Options
1
2
3
4
Option
Part number
09002363
09002334
09000689
09002353
09002357
09000685
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Print Method
Printhead
Emulations (co-resident)
Print Speed
High Speed Draft (HSD)
Utility (UTL)
Near Letter Quality (NLQ)
333cps*
250cps*
62.5cps*
* cps = characters per second
Paper Specifications
Type
Cut Sheets
Single part Continuous
Multi Part Continuous
Maximum thickness
Maximum number of
sheets
Feed
Top only
Rear/Bottom
Rear/Bottom
Weight
Width (range)
16 to 21lb. (60 to 81g/m)
14 to 20lb. (53 to 75g/m) 3 to 9.5 inches
14 to 20lb. (53 to 75g/m) 3 to 9.5 inches
0.28mm (0.11 inches)
4 (original plus 3 copies) carbonless
Reliability
Ribbon Life (black)
Printhead Life
Mean Time Between
Failures (MTBF)
Mean Time to Repair
(MTTR)
SPECIFICATIONS > 47
Item
Interfaces:
Standard:
Optional:
Specification
Centronics parallel, IEEE-1284 compliant
USB 1.1
RS-232C Serial
RS-422
Current Loop
SPECIFICATIONS > 48
INDEX
A
H
Humidity.....................................47
I
Impact Mode...............................30
Initialization string......................38
Installing the Ribbon Cartridge ....11
I-Prime ................................ 30, 38
Language Set..............................30
Limited Operation .......................41
LINE FEED ............................ 27, 28
Line Spacing ...............................30
Loading Paper.............................17
G
Graphics.....................................30
O
Operator Panel............................30
Operator Panel Function..............41
Page Length................................30
paper lever .................... 18, 20, 21
Paper out Override ......................30
Paper Separator..........................21
Paper Specifications ...................47
Parallel (LPT) Connection.............23
Parallel Interface
I-PRIME Signal.......................38
Pin 18.........................................30
PITCH .........................................27
POWER .......................................27
Power Connection ................ 16, 23
Print Method...............................47
Print Registration ........................30
Print Speed.................................47
INDEX > 49
Printer Drivers.............................30
Printer Suppress Effective ...........30
Printhead ...................................47
Z
Zero Character ............................30
R
Rear feed continuous form fan-fold
paper .......................................17
Receive Buffer Size .....................30
Removing the shipping
restraint ...................................10
Reset Inhibit ...............................30
Ribbon Shield ...................... 13, 40
RS-232C Serial Interface .............48
RS-422 .......................................48
S
S1 Select Pitch (10 CPI) ...............30
S1 Select Pitch (12 CPI) ...............30
SELECT .......................................27
SELECT and FORM FEED ...............28
SELECT and LINE FEED .................28
Serial Cable Connection ..............25
Serial Interface Option ................39
Setting Printer Defaults ...............29
Skip Over Perforation ..................30
Software
Embedded commands ...........40
Software vs. printer
settings ..............................38
T
Time Out Print.............................30
TOF SET ............................... 27, 28
Top feed single sheet paper ........21
Tractor Feed unit .........................21
U
Unpacking ....................................9
USB Connection ..........................24
Using the Cut-Sheet Feeder .........33
Using the Cut-sheet Feeder..........33
Using the pull Tractor Unit ...........31
Using the Roll Paper Stand ..........35
INDEX > 50
ML280 ELITE
Central House
Balfour Road, Hounslow
TW3 1HY
United Kingdom
tel +44 (0) 20 8219 2190
Fax +44 (0) 20 8219 2199
07051001 ISS.01
User Manual
for
Ultrasonic Anemometer, WindObserver II
and
Winddisplay, OMC-139
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-652003-01MU
Unrestricted
- BLANK PAGE -
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-652003-01MU
Unrestricted
WindObserver II
Ultrasonic Anemometer
User Manual
Doc No. 1390-PS-0004
Issue 16
WindObserver II Anemometer
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 2
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FOREWORD...................................................................................................... 6
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... 6
FAST TRACK SET-UP..................................................................................... 6
SPECIFICATION ............................................................................................... 7
PRE-INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 8
5.1.
5.2.
Equipment supplied...............................................................................................8
Installation requirements .......................................................................................8
6.
INSTALLATION...............................................................................................10
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.
6.7.
7.
8.
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.
8.6.
8.7.
8.8.
8.9.
8.10.
NMEA Format......................................................................................................28
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 3
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
8.11.
9.
CONFIGURING ...............................................................................................31
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.
9.6.
9.7.
9.8.
9.9.
9.10.
9.11.
Communications settings....................................................................................35
Baud rate........................................................................................................ 35
Duplex mode .................................................................................................. 35
Data and parity options .................................................................................... 35
ASCII Message terminator ............................................................................... 36
9.12.
9.13.
10.
10.1.
10.2.
10.3.
10.4.
10.5.
10.6.
Cleaning ..............................................................................................................38
Servicing..............................................................................................................38
Fault-finding.........................................................................................................38
Returning unit ......................................................................................................39
Status (error) codes ............................................................................................39
Bench test............................................................................................................39
Integrity Check Chamber (ICC) ........................................................................ 40
Integrity & Zero Wind Check ............................................................................ 40
11.
APPENDICES..................................................................................................42
11.1.
11.2.
11.3.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 4
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
11.4.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 5
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
1.
FOREWORD
Thank you for purchasing the WindObserver II manufactured by Gill Instruments Ltd.
The unit has no customer serviceable parts and requires no calibration or maintenance.
To achieve optimum performance we recommend that you read the whole of this manual
before proceeding with use. Do NOT remove black rubber transducer caps.
Gill products are in continuous development and therefore specifications may be subject to
change and design improvements without prior notice.
The information contained in this manual remains the property of Gill Instruments and
should not be copied or reproduced for commercial gain.
2.
INTRODUCTION
The Gill WindObserver II wind sensor is a very robust, lightweight unit with no moving
parts, outputting wind speed and direction. The units of wind speed, output rate and
formats are all user selectable.
The WindObserver II is available with or without de- icing heating (recommended if icing
is likely), and with or witho ut analogue outputs.
The WindObserver II can be used in conjunction with a PC, datalogger or other device,
provided it is compatible with the RS422 output or the analogue outputs. Multiple units
can be networked if required.
Alternatively, the WindObserver II is designed to connect directly to the Gill WindDisplay
unit to provide a complete wind speed direction system without any configuration required
by the user.
The output message format can be configured in Polar, UV (2-axis), NMEA (0183
Version 3), Tunnel formats, and as either a Continuous output or Polled (requested by
host system) , detailed in full in Section 8 Message Formats & Options.
WindObserver II may be configured using WindCom software which is available, free of
charge, from the Gill website www.gill.co.uk, or by using standard communications
software on a PC. This is explained in Section 9 Configuring.
3.
If you are in a hurry to try out the WindObserver II, are familiar with Gill equipment, and
coupling to a PC using RS422, go to the following sections :
Section 6 Installation
Section 8 Message Formats & Options
Section 9 Configuring
After you have successfully set up the WindObserver II, we strongly advise that you then
go back and read the rest of the manual to ensure that you get the best results from the
WindObserver II.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 6
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
4.
SPECIFICATION
Measurement
Output
Parameters
Units
Averaging
Wind Speed
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Offset
Direction
1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 10Hz
UV, Polar, NMEA, Tunnel
m/s, Knots, MPH, KPH ft/min
Flexible 1-3600 seconds
0 - 65m/s (0-145mph)
2%
0.01m/s
0.01m/s
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Sonic Temperature Output
Range
Anemometer Status
0 - 359
2
1
Starting Threshold
Dead Band Wind Direction
Power Requirement
0.01 m/s
None
Anemometer only
Heating - Optional
Digital Output
Communication
Baud rates
Formats
Analogue Output - Optional
Quantity
Scale
Type
V output resistance
4-20mA loading
Dimensions
Size
Weight
Materials
External Construction
Environmental
Moisture protection
Operating temperature
Humidity
Precipitation
EMC
-40C to + 70C
Supplied as part of standard message
Icing
Standards
IP66 (NEMA4X)
-55C to +70C (heated version)
5% to 100% RH
300mm/hr
BS EN 50081-1: 1992 (Emissions class B)
BS EN 50082-2: 1992 (Immunity)
FCC class A
MILSTD810E Method 521.1 Procedure 1
Traceable to UK national standards
Site Calibration
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 7
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
5.
PRE-INSTALLATION
5.1.
Equipment supplied
or
or
or
and
and
and
and
5.2.
Installation requirements
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 8
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Mounting Bracket
A mounting bracket is required (not provided) which will attach to the WindObserver II
via the four tapped holes in the base of the unit. Always ensure that the gasket supplied is
fitted to the base of the anemometer.
It is important that the gasket supplied forms a water tight seal on the base of the
anemometer.
In the event that the mounting bracket supplied by the customer is not flat or does not
form complete support for the anemometer base; the customer must fit a mounting ring as
shown in Figure 2.
See Section 6.7 for mounting details.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 9
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
6.
INSTALLATION
Do NOT remove the black rubber transducer caps. Warranty is void if the
blue security seal is damaged or removed.
All the time the WindObserver II is not in its final location, it should be
protected from damage by keeping it in the original packaging as long as
possible, treating it as a delicate instrument.
If an Intrinsically Safe (IS) device is required, the I.S. WindObserver must be
used - the WindObserver II is NOT an IS device.
6.1.
Installation Guidelines
The WindObserver II has been designed to meet and exceed the stringent standards listed
in its specification. Operating in diverse environments all over the world, WindObserver II
requires no calibration or adjustment whatsoever.
As with any sophisticated electronics, good engineering practice should be followed to
ensure correct operation.
Always check the installation to ensure the WindObserver II is not affected by
other equipment operating locally, which may not conform to current standards,
e.g. radio/radar transmitters, boat engines, generators etc.
Guidelines
Avoid mounting in the plane of any radar scanner a vertical separation of
at least 2m should be achieved.
Radio transmitting antennas, the following minimum separations (all round)
are suggested
VHF IMM 1m
MF/HF 5m
Satcom 5m (avoid likely lines of sight)
Ensure the product is correctly earthed in accordance with this manual
Use cables recommended by Gill, keeping the length below the maximum allowed
(SeeSection 6.3) Where the cables are cut and re-connected (junction boxes, plugs
and sockets) the cable screen integrity must be maintained, to prevent the EMC
performance being compromised.
Earth loops should not be created earth the system in accordance with the
installation guidelines. (SeeSection 6.4)
Ensure the power supply operates to the WindObserver II specification at all times.
Avoid turbulence caused by surrounding structures that will effect the accuracy of the
WindObserver II such as trees, masts and buildings. The World Meteorological
Organisation make the following recommendation:
The standard exposure of wind instruments over level open terrain is 10m above
the ground. Open terrain is defined as an area where the distance between the
sensor and any obstruction is at least 10 times the height of the obstruction.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 10
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
6.2.
Note : Prior to physically mounting the WindObserver II in its final location, we strongly
recommend that a bench system test is carried out to confirm the system is configured
correctly, is fully functional and electrically compatible with the selected host system and
cabling (preferably utilising the final cable length). The required data format, units,
output rate, and other options should also all be configured at this stage. If an Integrity
Check Chamber (ICC) has been purchased refer to Section 10.6.
6.3.
Cabling
Cable type
A RS422 compatible cable should be used, with the number of twisted pairs matching the
application. If both the (optional) Heating and Analogue outputs are utilised, then a 9 pair
cable is required.
Generic description Twisted pairs with drain wire, screened with aluminised tape,
with an overall PVC sheath. Wire size 7/0.2mm (24 AWG)
The table shows some suitable manufacturers references; other manufactures equivalents
can be used.
Table 1
Belden
Batt electronics
No. of pairs Gill ref.
ref.
ref.
2
9729
3
026-02660
9730
91030
4
026-03156
9728
91199
9
026-02663
8774
91009
Cable length
The typical maximum length at 9600 baud is 1km (3200ft), using the recommended cable.
If any problems of data corruption are experienced (due to, for example, a high local
electrical noise level), then a lower baud rate should be used. Alternatively, a thicker or
higher specification cable can be tried. See also Section 6.1
Cabling and junction box
The WindObserver II unit is fitted with a flying 9 pair cable attached (1.5m or 10m long).
This must be terminated in a suitable terminal box to IP66 or better, fitted with glands to
prevent moisture ingress.
The cable type from the terminal box to the host system must be as specified above. If any
cable is likely to be exposed to mechanical damage, it must be enclosed in a suitable
conduit or cable tray. The cable must be securely fixed with cable clamps or equivalent,
such that the cable is not under stress at the cable glands.
The gland area at the base of the WindObserver II should not be directly exposed to
moisture, as whilst the gland is sealed when mated, the anemometer is vented to air at the
base to avoid pressure build up. If an IP66 rating is essential or the unit is mounted other
than right way up use the gasket provided in the mounting kit.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 11
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
6.4.
Connections
Important
Do NOT join any of the cores of the cable together. Joining cores
could damage the unit permanently. Any cores not used should be isolated.
Do NOT connect the units 0V, he ating ve, analogue output 0V or digital 0V to the
screen or earth.
The screens of each pair are joined together inside the anemometer - these should be
joined to the cable screen(s) of any further cable run. Avoid long grounding loops. Digital
OV should be used in conjunction with RS422 TX RX lines in order to improve noise
immunity. Each pair in the cable is labelled with its pair number.
Table 2
Conductor colour
Designation
Pair 1
green
RS422_TXB (+)
black
RS422_TXA (-)
Pair 2
white
RS422_RXB (+)
black
RS422_RXA (-)
Pair 3
red
Supply V+
black
Supply VPair 4
blue
Digital 0v
black
Not used (isolate)
Pair 5
yellow
Heater + *
black
Heater *
Pair 6
brown
Analogue Ch 1 voltage output *
black
Analogue Ch 1 current output *
Pair 7
orange
Analogue Ch 2 voltage output *
black
Analogue Ch 2 current output *
Pair 8
white
Analogue Ch 3 voltage output *
red
Analogue Ch 3 current output *
Pair 9
green
Analogue 0 volt reference/current return *
red
Analogue 2.5 volt reference *
Screens
Chassis ground
Earthing or grounding
To ensure correct operation, and for maximum protection against lightning, the
anemometer MUST be correctly earthed (grounded) via its mountings. Inadequate
earthing will degrade anemometer performance, particularly in the presence of radio
frequency interference.
See Fig 1 Suggested mounting bracket and earthing (grounding) arrangements
The unit MUST be connected to an appropriate grounding point with a minimum of 6mm
copper wire, via the M5 base screws. The cable screens must be joined with any cable
screen continuing from the units cable via a junction box. The primary earth for the
anemometer must be provided via the base screws and not via the cable screens.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 12
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
WindObserver II
9 pair cable
Pair
Signal names
no.
TXB (+)
1
TXA ()
WindDisplay
colour
green
black
CONNECTED INTERNALLY
Supply V+
Supply V-
Heater + *
Heater - *
Cable 2 or 3
twisted pairs
Screen and
drain wires
Signal
names
TXD +
TXD
Terminal
nos.
RS422+
RS422-
Ground (Earth)
red
black
+
O
yellow
black
+
-
2
1
Heater power
supply
see Section 6.6
* If fitted
Default Settings
The factory default settings are:
A0 B3 C1 E1 F1 G0000 H1 J1 K1 L1 M2 NA O1 P1 T1 U1 V1 X1 Y1 Z1
See Section 9 Configuring for further details
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 13
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
WindObserver II
9 pair cable
PC with RS422
or RS485 input
Cable - 3 or 4
twisted pairs
Signal names
Pair
no
Colour
TXB (+)
TXA (-)
green
black
RXB (+)
RXA (-)
RXB (+)
RXA (-)
white
black
TXB (+)
TXA (-)
Digital OV
blue
Signal Ground
CONNECTED INTERNALLY
Supply V+
Supply V-
Heater + *
Heater - *
Screen and
drain wires
Signal names
Ground (Earth)
red
black
DC Power
+ supply 9-30V
see section 6.6
yellow
black
+
-
Heated power
supply
see section 6.6
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 14
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Networking units
Before coupling units into a network:
WindObserver II
9 pair cable
Signal names
PC with RS485
card
Pair
Colour
no
TXB (+)
RXB (+)
1
2
green
white
TXA (-)
RXA (-)
1
2
black
black
Digital OV
blue
CONNECTED INTERNALLY
Supply V+
Supply V-
Heater +
Heater -
Cable - 2 or 3
twisted pairs
.. ..
Signal names
T / RXB (+)
T / RXA (-)
Signal Ground
Screen and
drain wires
Ground (Earth)
red
black
DC Power
+
supply 9-30V
see section 6.6
yellow
black
+
-
Heated power
supply
see section 6.6
To Next Unit
Note : Each unit in the ne twork will require its own power supplies.
Please refer to section 8.3.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 15
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
6.5.
Analogue connections
When using the analogue outputs it is advisable to use a low pass filter to remove any high
frequency noise present.
The analogue signals can be susceptible to external interference if unprotected. The
anemometer cable has individual screens covering each channels signal wires. The
continuing cable connected to the anemometer must be of equal or greater cross sectional
area as the anemometer cable and must be ind ividually screened or screened pairs.
Note that connections can also be made to a PC or other device as described in the
preceding section.
Connections for 5V output
Anemometer
Pair 9
Green
0v Ref
Anemometer
Pair 9
Red
2.5V Ref
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 16
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Anemometer
Pair 9
Green
0v
6.6.
300 max
Power supplies
9 to 30v DC
60mA max. 50mA average
Heating
If fitted, the heating module requires a separate power supply.
Either
22 30V DC @ 3A
or
24V AC RMS 10% @ 3A AC RMS
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 17
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
6.7.
Mechanical installation
Before installing, a bench system test is recommended (see Section 6.2).
All the time the WindObserver II is not in its final location, it should be
protected from damage by keeping it in the original packaging as long as
possible, treating it as a delicate instrument.
Location
It is important to ensure that the WindObserver II is mounted in a position clear of any
structure which may obstruct the airflow or induce turbulence.
Do NOT mount the WindObserver II in close proximity of high powered radar or radio
transmitters. A site survey may be required if there is any doubt about the strength of
external electrical noise. ( See Section 6.1 )
Orientation
Normally the WindObserver II is mounted vertically with the cable exit at the bottom.
Alternatively, the unit may be mounted in any orientation, but note that if the unit is
mounted with the cable uppermost ,the gasket provided in the mounting kit must be used.
Mounting bracket
A suggested mounting bracket is shown in Fig 1 below.
It is recommended that the WindObserver II mounting bracket is manufactured from
stainless steel 316, to prevent possible galvanic corrosion.
It is also recommended that the supplied gasket is always fitted to ensure IP66 rating and
to prevent galvanic corrosion if the mounting bracket is not manufactured from stainless
steel 316.
Stainless steel 316 fixings must be used.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 18
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 19
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Alignment
The anemometer should be set to point North (or to another known reference direction),
using the North alignment indicator on the base of the instrument. See Figure 2.
If the unit is used in a tunnel, (and the Tunnel format is used), the unit would normally be
aligned with the N S axis in the horizontal plane.
Figure 2 North marker and UV polarity definition (UV format) and Mounting Ring
SEE FIG.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 20
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
7.
The WindObserver II is designed to link directly to the Gill WindDisplay unit to provide a
complete wind speed and direction system.
When coupled to a WindDisplay, the WindObserver II must be used as supplied,
set to the factory de fault settings. It must NOT be reconfigured.
After coupling to a WindDisplay, the Wind Speed units and the Averaging period can be
selected using the WindDisplay controls. See the WindDisplay User Manual.
Note that although the WindDisplay can display wind speed in various units, these are
calculated within the WindDisplay. The data coming to the WindDisplay must be in
metres/sec (the factory default output setting).
Figure 3 WindDisplay
The WindDisplay has been designed to provide anemometer power (approximately 15V
@40mA).
If the WindObserver II has a de-icing heater fitted, this will need a separate power supply.
( See Section 6.6 )
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 21
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
8.
On first applying power to the WindObserver II, it will be in Measurement Mode, and it
will output wind measurement information in one of nine configurations as described
below.
Setting the output format, units, other parameters, options and the communication settings
are all carried out in the alternative Configuration Mode.
See Section 9 CONFIGURING for details of how this is done.
The factory default settings are shown here in bold, and for convenience some
Configuration codes (as used to set the configuration) are shown in blue boxes.
For example M3 .
8.1.
The wind speed measurements can be output in one of the following formats:
UV, Polar, Customer formats (NMEA and Tunnel).
8.2.
Output formats
The UV and Polar wind speed parameters are output in either ASCII or binary.
These parameters can be transmitted continuously or polled from the user.
Polar is also available in continuous NMEA format.
Figure 4 Output formats
Output format
ASCII
ASCII
Binary
Binary
Tunnel
NMEA
8.3.
UV
Polar
UV
Polar
Output
Continuous
Polled
Continuous
Polled
Polled
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Tri-state o/p
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Configuration code
M1
M3
M2
M4
M9
M7
M8
M6
M5
Networking
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 22
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
RS485 I/F
(USB)
SWITCH
HYPER-TERMINAL
B (Full-D)
WObsII
RS422 I/F
(USB)
b (4-wire)
One PC (with two USB ports) can be used for both Terminals, although two may be less
confusing.
Note: Power must not be disconnected from the anemometer throughout this procedure.
2) Assuming the unit is set for Full Duplex, connect 9-way at [b] disconnect 9-way at
[a]. Set Switch to position [b] (4 wire).
3) On Terminal B, enter CONFIGURATION MODE. Set Half Duplex (E2). The
CONFIRM> prompt will appear.
4) Disconnect 9-way [b] and connect 9-way [a]. Set Switch to position [a] (2 wire).
5) On Terminal A, type E <ENTER> to confirm.
6) The unit should now be configured in Half Duplex mode.
Configuring WindObserver II for Full Duplex Operation.
1) Assuming the unit is set for Half Duplex, disconnect 9-way [b] and connect 9-way
[a]. Set Switch to position [a] (2 wire).
2) On Terminal A, type E1 to select Full Duplex. The CONFIRM> prompt will
appear.
3) Disconnect 9-way [a] and connect 9-way [b]. Set Switch to position [b] (4 wire).
4) On Terminal B type E <ENTER> to confirm.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 23
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
8.4.
Units
8.5.
Abbreviation
m/s
knots
MPH
kph
fpm
Output rate
The output frequency can be set between 1 and 10 per second. The wind speed is sampled
every 25ms, each axis being sampled sequentially..
8.6.
Averaging
The Averaging Period can be set from zero to 3600 secs. (1 hour). The default setting is
zero. When averaging is enabled, data is output at a rate determined by the averaging
period. The data is an average of valid data collected during the averaging period.
8.7.
Options
8.8.
ASCII UV format
U axis wind speed
Units
<STX>A,+000.04,-000.02,M,+345.01,+022.36,00,<ETX>25
Start of
string
Unit
identification
Speed of
sound
Temperature
Status
End of
string
Check
sum
where
U axis wind speed
V axis wind speed
Units
Units
Metres per second (m/s)
Knots (knots)
Miles per hour (MPH)
Kilometres per hour (kph)
Feet per minute (fpm)
Start of string
Unit identification
Speed of sound
Temperature
ASCII value 2
Letter A Z (default A)
In metres per second (if enabled)
Sonic temperature in degrees C (if enabled)
Status
Value
0
60
Any other value
End of string
Check sum
ASCII value 3
Exclusive OR of all characters between Start of String
and End of String reported as ASCII hex.
Status
OK
Heating enabled and OK if enabled
Warning or fault condition
- see Section 10.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 25
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Wind speed
Units
<STX>B,121,000.08,M,+344.66,+021.76,00,<ETX>06
Start of
string
Unit
identification
Speed of
sound
Temperature
Status
End of
string
Check
sum
where
8.9.
Wind direction
Wind speed
Binary UV format
U axis wind speed
Units
Speed of sound
Temperature
Status
where
U axis wind speed
V axis wind speed
Units
Units
Metres per second (m/s)
Knots (knots)
Miles per hour (MPH)
Kilometres per hour (kph)
Feet per minute (fpm)
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 26
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Start of string
Speed of sound
Temperature
Status
Value
0
60
Any other value
Status
OK
Heating enabled and OK
Warning or fault condition
- see Section 10.5
Wind direction
Units
Speed of sound
Temperature
Status
where
Wind direction
Wind speed
Direction
Units
Status
Other parameters
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 27
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Wind direction
Wind speed
Units
Checksum
delimiter
Start of string
Instrument
type
Wind
measurement
Status
Check
sum
where
Wind direction
Wind speed
Units
M
N
P
K
F
Start of string
Instrument type
Wind measurement
Status
$
IIMWV
R
Relative wind measurement
A
Valid measurement
V
Invalid measurement
Exclusive OR of all characters between $ and *
reported as ASCII hex.
Check sum
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 28
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Channel 1
U
Magnitude
Magnitude
U
Channel 2
V
Direction
Direction
U direction*
Channel 3
Status or Temperature
Status
If channel 3 is configured for Status, the output will be 0v (or 4mA) if the unit is an OK
condition. In a fault condition, error code 01, 02, or 04, the output will be +5v (or 0mA).
See Section 10.5 for the list of Error Codes.
Temperature
If channel 3 is configured for Temperature, it reports the temperature if it is between 40
and +70C, scaled from +0.7V to +5V (6.25mA to 20mA). Temperatures outside this
range are reported as errors by setting the output to 0V (4mA).
Tunnel mode
In Tunnel mode, Channel 2 gives the direction of the wind along the U axis, where a U
vector (=wind from the N direction) is represented by 0v (or 4mA), and a +U vector
(=wind from the S direction) by 5v (or 20mA).
Scaling
All analogue outputs are in m/s and can be scaled to have a full scale deflection of 10 to
70 units.
In Polar mode the sign should be ignored. Only the + sign is effective.
In all cases zero Wind Speed is represented by 0V or 4mA.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 29
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Standard
Wraparound
Standard
Wraparound
0
2.5
5.0
n/a
0
1.67
3.33
5.0
4.00
12.00
20.00
n/a
4.00
9.33
14.67
20.00
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 30
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
9.
CONFIGURING
WindCom may be used to configure WindObserve r II. This is an easy to use menudriven package, available as a free download at www.gill.co.uk .
Alternatively, you may use terminal emulator software such as Hyperterminal or
Terminal.
This section describes the commands used to change settings when using terminal
emulator software. For a fuller descriptions of the settings and options see Section 8 Message Formats & Options
Keystrokes are shown thus :- D 3 ENTER
9.1.
9.2.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 31
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
9.3.
We strongly recommend that, as a standard procedure, you use this command ( D3 ) prior
to, and after, changing any settings. It shows the current settings for all the alterable
settings. We suggest you note down your settings, so that you can easily return to them.
Enters Configuration Mode (from Continuous mode)
or
*N
Enters Configuration Mode (from Polled mode)
D 3 ENTER
The WindObserver II responds with the current settings.
The factory default settings are
A0 B3 C1 E1 F1 G0000 H1 J1 K1 L1 M2 NA O1 P1 T1 U1 V1 X1 Y1 Z1
*
9.4.
Q ENTER
Changing settings
To change a setting, first go into Configuration mode and then refer to the sections below.
Enter the Configuration code of the new setting required, followed by ENTER.
If successful, the new setting will be echoed back as a message by the WindObserver II.
For example, to change the message format to NMEA, enter M 5 ENTER .
The WindObserver II will reply with M5. When the unit is returned to the Measurement
mode, it will be in NMEA format.
Note : The factory-set (default) settings are shown in bold in the following sections.
9.5.
Output format
Output format
ASCII UV Continuous
ASCII UV Polled (tri-state) *
ASCII Polar Continuous
ASCII Polar Polled(tri-state) *
ASCII Polar Polled
Binary UV Continuous
Binary Polar Continuous
Tunnel Continuous
NMEA Continuous
Configuration code
M1
M3
M2
M4
M9
M7
M8
M6
M5
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 32
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
9.6.
Unit Identifier
9.7.
Units
Units
metres/sec
(m/s)
knots
(knots)
miles / hour
(MPH)
kilometre/hour
(kph)
feet / minute
(fpm)
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
Configuration
code
9.8.
Output rate
9.9.
10
P1
P3
P2
P4
P5
P6
Averaging
Enter the required averaging period in seconds as a four figure number (nnnn) between
zero and 3600.
Gnnnn
9.10. Options
Speed of Sound (SOS) and Temperature
Setting
Report SOS
Report Sonic temperature
Report SOS andSonic temperature
Disable both
Configuration code
A1
A2
A3
A0
NMEA
Setting
NMEA string IIMWV
NMEA string WIMWV
Configuration code
K1
K2
Configuration code
V1
V2
45 Offset
Setting
Align U axis with
transducer axis
Align U axis +45
to transducer axis
Reverses Polar
Direction
Align @ 45 from
North
Configuration
code
Notes
X1. Aligns U axis with North/South axis.
X1
X2
X3
X4
Figure 4 shows the polarity of U and V if the wind components along the U and V axis are
blowing in the direction of the respective arrows.
-U
N
-V
+V
S
+U
Figure 4 UV Polarity
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 34
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Configuration code
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Configuration code
E1
E2
Configuration code
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 35
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Configuration code
CR LF
LF
L1
L2
Configuration code
Status
Temperature
Y1
Y2
Scaling
Setting
Configuration code
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z7
Configuration code
C1
C2
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 36
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Configuration code
J0
J1
J2
J3
Item
Command
code
D1
Unit configuration
D3
Analogue ID
(if present)
Anemometer
power supply
voltage
Integrity check
D2
Typical response
E000694
2.07
current configuration :
A0 B3 C1 E1 F1 G0000 H1 J1 K1
L1 M2 NA O1 P1 T1 U1 V1 X1 Y1
Z1
D4
GI1390 fitted.
D5
+29.8
D6
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 37
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
10.2. Servicing
There are no moving parts or user-serviceable parts requiring routine maintenance.
Opening the unit or breaking the security seal will void the warranty and the calibration.
In the event of failure, prior to returning the unit to your authorised Gill distributor, it is
recommended tha t :
All cables and connectors are checked for continuity, bad contacts, corrosion etc.
A bench test is carried out as described in Section 10.6.
You contact your supplier for advice
10.3. Fault-finding
Symptom
No output
Corrupted output
One way
communication
Failed / Incorrect
WindObserver II
ouput, data
invalid flag
Solution
Check DC power to WindObserve r II, cable and connections.
Check comms settings of WindObserver II (as detailed in Section
9) and host system match, including correct Com port
Check unit is in Continuous mode
Check that in- line communication devices are wired correctly.
NOTE: It is us ual for Anemometer TX + to be connected to
converter device RX +
Check comms settings of WindObserver II and host system
match.
Try a slower baud rate.
Check cable lengths and type of cable.
Check wiring is in accordance with the manual.
Check that transducer path is not blocked
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 38
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Status
Condition
OK
Sufficient samples in average period
OK and heating
Sufficient samples in average period
enabled
OK
NMEA data valid
Axis 1 failed
Insufficient samples in average period on U axis
Axis 2 failed
Insufficient samples in average period on V axis
Axis 1 and 2 failed
Insufficient samples in average period on both axes
NVM error
NVM checksum failed
ROM error
ROM checksum failed
System gain at max.
Inaccurate results likely
Marginal system gain
Results OK, but marginal operation
Measurement average building
Heating current tripped or electronic failure
Thermistor open circuit
Heating element open circuit
NMEA data invalid
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 39
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
If there has been no significant changes to The WindObserverII head configuration then
*PASS* will confirm correct operation.
Alterations to the head geometry will result in a *FAIL* message. If this occurs please
contact Gill Instruments.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 41
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
11. APPENDICES
11.1. Glossary & Abbreviations
Item
CAL
CR
CRLF
CSV
ENG
ESC
ETX
FAC
fpm
GND
HEX
I/P
IP66
KPH
LF
m/s
MAG
MAX
MPH
NEMA
NMEA 0183
(version 3)
No:
NVM
O/P
PC
PCB
POR
PROCOMM
ROM
RS232
Meaning
Calibration
Carriage Return
Carriage Return Line Feed
Comma Separated Variable
Engineering
ESCape key on keyboard used to stop any process that is being
executed
End of string character
Factory
Feet per minute
GrouND
HEXadecimal
InPut
Protection Classification
Kilometres per Hour
Line Feed
Metres per second
MAGnitude - scalar reference to wind speed
MAXimum
Miles per Hour
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Marine Electronics Association standard for interfacing
marine electronic navigational devices
Number
Non-Volatile Memory
Output
IBM compatible Personal Computer
Printed Circuit Board
Power On Reset
Terminal emulator software package
Read Only Memory
Communications standard
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 42
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
Item
RS422
RS485
RTS
RX
RXD
S/W
SOS
SEC
STX
TERM
TX
TXD
+VE
-VE
WindCom
WRT
Meaning
Communications standard
Communications standard
Request To Send
Receive
Received Data
SoftWare
Speed Of Sound
SECond
Start of string character
TERMinal
Transmit
Transmitted Data
Positive
Negative
Gill software used to configure WindObserver II
With Respect To
11.2. Guarantee
For terms of guarantee contact your supplier.
Warranty is void if the red security seal covering base nuts is damaged or broken, or the
transducer caps have been damaged.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 43
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 44
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
to which this declaration relates, are in conformity with the protection requirements of Council Directive
89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws relating to electromagnetic compatibility.
This Declaration of Conformity is based upon compliance of the product with the following harmonized
standards:
EN50081 - 1
EN50082 - 2
Signed by:
A.C.R. Stickland Director
Date of issue:
28/11/2000
Place of issue:
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 45
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
130,00
113,50
80,00
63,50
X1
C
101,60
PG13,5
12 3456 78
PG13,5
PG13,5
1: RED, +V
2: BLACK, -V
3: YELLOW, HEATER+ (OPTION)
4: BLACK, HEATER- (OPTION)
5: GREEN, TX+
6: BLACK, TX7: WHITE, RX+
8: BLACK, RX-
A
DIPL. ING HOUM A.S
SIZE
SCALE
FSCM NO
YES
DWG NO
REV
E\HB\GILL\WOII.VSD
2
SHEET
1 OF 1
Winddisplay
OMC-138/139
Users Manual
Ver. No. 1.07
(pdf version)
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
Contents
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1. Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2. Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Cable layout without heater
2.2.2 Power supply settings . . . .
2.2.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4. Daisy chaining . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
3
3
3
4
5
6
3. Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Internal hardware settings . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Analogue output . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Serial in/output . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Settings via frontpanel . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1Units and averaging settings
3.2.2 Lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Deviation setting . . . . . . . .
3.3 Settings possible via the RS232 port.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
10
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5. Setting up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Input device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Vector range settings . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Instrument output device . . . . . . .
5.4 Analogue output range settings . .
5.5 RS232 output settings . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Baudrate RS232 port . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Currentloop/RS422 output settings
5.8 Baudrate Currentloop/RS422 . . . .
5.9 Averaging of channels . . . . . . . . .
5.10 Device options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11 Show all settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
1. General
The Obsermet digital wind display OMC-138 is a combined display
for wind speed and wind direction. The OMC-138 is provided with
a digital LED indicator for speed, and a double ring of 36 LEDs
actual and average direction information.
A second three digit display located in the lower right corner
provides gust information.
The front panel is provided with three buttons for adjusting the
brightness of the LEDs. testing all the LED displays and entering
a set menu for adjusting display settings.
The OMC-138 will accept the output-signals directly from the series
OMC-160 and OMC-170 wind sensors, without the need of
additional interfaces. It provides the power supply to the wind
sensor, and "daisy-chain" connections are available for additional
indicators. As an option, the OMC-138 can provide analogue
output signals for speed and direction. Those can be 4...20 mA or
0...1 volt.
The display is housed in a 144x144 mm. DIN-size casing suitable
for flush mounting in a console or display panel. Unit depth is
63mm.
The signal transmission of the daisy chain is: 20mA current loop,
300 Baud, ASCII-code.
The OMC-138 can display the wind speed in various scales i.e.
Miles per hour (mph). Meters per second (m/s). Knots. kilometers
per hour (km/h) and Beaufort. In addition the analogue output for
wind speed and direction can be transmitted using a variety of
averaging periods between 1 and 600 seconds.
Principle characteristics.
Power supply
Power supply optional
Speed display
Gust display
Direction display
Direction average
Input signal
Input optional
Output
Output (optional)
Dimensions
Weight
Scale
Brightness control
Readout units
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Page 2
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
2. Installation
2.1. Mechanical
Panel mounting of the OMC-138 display requires a panel cut-out of 137 mm square. Maximum
panel thickness 5 mm. Rear access must be provided, for fixing of the tightening clamps and
connecting the electric cabling. The depth of the unit is 63 mm and an additional clearance of 8 mm
should be allowed for the cable connections.
2.2. Electrical
All Obsermet displays utilize a common terminal strip for the connections to the wind sensors and
the ancillary displays and/or recorders. The signal cable between sensor and display is a 4-core
cable with 2 cores for power to the sensor and 2 cores for signal transmission. To reduce
interference the cable must have a common screen. This screen should be grounded to earth in the
junction box of the wind sensor. In this way the cable may run distances up to 1 kilometer.
Recommended cable: 2 (or 3) twisted pairs with common screen, core size 0.75 mm2.
In the case that the wind sensor is provided with a heater. 2 extra cores are required for power
supply to the heater. The size of the heater cable depends on the cable length. (For more details
see manual wind sensor)
The OMC-138 display unit provides the 15 Volts DC. power supply to the microprocessor
transmitter in the wind sensor. The power consumption of the sensor transmitter electronics is
approx. 65 mA. This power supply should not be used for the optional heaters in the sensor. These
sensor-heaters must be powered independently from the display unit.
Page 3
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
As an option the OMC-138/139 can be delivered for 12 Vdc, If the unit has to be modified to work
with 12 Vdc the transformer has to be removed. With the transformer removed it becomes possible
to install a DC/DC converter on the location of the transformer. The DC/DC converter converts the
12 Volt supply voltage up to 24 Vdc.
Page 4
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
2.2.3. Connections
All connections to the OMC-138 display
are made to the rear of the display as
shown on the drawing on the right.
Page 5
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
Recommended cable: 1 twisted pair with common screen, core size 0.75 mm2.
Page 6
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
3. Commissioning
Before switching ON the mains, check that the power supply is correct as indicated on the
identification label on the rear of the equipment.
With no signal cable connected, switch on the display and observe the front panel LED,s. The
system will perform a led test all led are switched on and off one by one. When the test is finished
the display shows on the led circle no information and on both speed displays only "---" is shown.
This is because no sensor information is received by the display.
Check the voltage at terminals [1] and [21 on the rear panel this should be 15 Volts DC. With all
cabling correctly connected, the display will show the wind speed and wind direction directly as
transmitted by the OMC-160 wind sensor.
Adjustment cannot be made as the sensor-signal is digitally transmitted.
When there is no serial information received from the wind sensor the watchdog circuit in the
display unit starts to switch the 15 Volt supply voltage to the sensor ON and OFF. The supply
voltage is 10 seconds ON and if none information is received from the wind sensor the supply
voltage is switched OFF for 5 seconds. If this is happening during the commissioning check the
wiring to the wind sensor.
When the display is fully operational and the and the sensor information is not received for more
than 5 seconds the display starts flashing indicating that the sensor information is not longer
received by the display unit.
The OMC-138 is also available as OMC-139. The OMC-139 is made to be used on board of ships.
The front panel of the OMC-139 is different, the degree scale is made from 0...180 degrees on both
sides of the scale.
If from the speed display inside the led circle the decimal point between the hundred and the ten
display is ON the Eeprom has been damaged. Settings for proper operation are most probably lost.
The display must be returned to the factory.
Extension (optional)
The display can provide information of wind speed and direction in the NMEA-183 format.
The display can be used with a Gill wind sensor
The display can be used with an Irdam wind sensor
The display can be used with Vector wind sensors (12 Vdc supply possible)
Adjusting brightness on remote location. (not when Vector sensors are used)
The display can provide 0...1 Volt or 4...20 mA output signals
Page 7
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
Page 8
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
Page 9
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
Users interval time, 3 different times can be set, direction, speed and gust. When for gust a
time of 0 is selected the gust can be reseted by pushing the menu button and the arrow
down button at the same time.
Scaling analogue outputs. For the analogue outputs it is possible to set the span of the
signal. 4...20 mA can be 0...40 m/s or 50 m/s. For the direction a choice can be made
between 360 or 540 or 720 degrees.
Average time for analogue output signals, For the 2 available analogue outputs it is possible
to set a average time. This is done to prevent analogue recorder to paint the paper.
Page 10
Obsermet division
4
OMC-138/139 Manual
Selection of sensor type, a selection can be made between the following inputs.
a. Obsermet sensors OMC-160. OMC-170 and OMC-165 (standard)
b. Gill sensors RS422 (optional)
c. Irdam sensor RS422 (optional)
d. Vector puls/potmeter (optional)
When pulse/potmeter is selected it is possible to set the scaling factors for the input signals.
Repeat the sensor message on the RS232/422 or select NMEA-183 output signal.
4. Maintenance
The Obsermet OMC-138/139 digital display unit has no moving parts, and requires no routine
maintenance. If required, the perspex display front can be cleaned with a cloth, slightly moistened
with a soft detergent. Care must be taken that no liquid enters the display unit. Solvents should not
be used, and scratches should be avoided.
Fuses: Glass fuses 5x20 mm,
40 mA for 230 Vac.
80 mA for 115 Vac
250 mA for 24 Vdc
The fuse can be reached as follows,
Switch of the main supply and disconnect all the wiring on the rear of the display.
Remove the four 2.5 mm screws on the rear of the display.
Remove the front window, pull on a corner with both hands.
With holding the front down, the whole case can be removed now.
The fuse can be reached now. The fuse is placed on the PCB where all the wires are connected to.
Page 11
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
5. Setting up procedure
During final testing in the factory the
OMC-138/139 is setup for the system it is
manufactured for.
If at a later stage the settings have to be
changed then this can be done by the user in
the following way.
Connected a cable to the RS232 connector at
the rear of the instrument.Connected the other
end of the cable to a PC.
Start on the PC a terminal program like
"Terminal" under Windows or "Hyper terminal"
under windows 95.
6 - Test Instrument
Select the proper transmission speed, the
speed is as a standard set to 9600 bps. This
setting might be set differently, if no response
from the instrument when pressing the ENTER
button on the keyboard try a different transmission speed.
If contact is established with the display the above shown menu will appear on your computer
screen.
5.1 Input device
With the given options the OMC-138 can be
set to customers needs.
If "Select input device" is selected the menu
on the right will appear on the screen. The
menu shows the actual setting (astrixs in front
of the option) and it shows the options that are
not available because they were not ordered.
That option are followed by the word disabled.
In the menu shown on the right the vector
sensors are selected as input.
Page 12
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
Page 13
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
Page 14
Obsermet division
5.6 Baudrate RS232 port
The communication speed of the RS232 port
can be set to one of the shown speeds.
Make a selection by typing the number in front
of the required speed and press the enter
button.
Change the communication speed of the
device which you are using for further
communication otherwise communication is not
possible anymore.
OMC-138/139 Manual
Page 15
Obsermet division
5.8 Baudrate Currentloop/RS422
If the transmission speed must be changed
and option 6 is selected the menu on the right
is shown.
OMC-138/139 Manual
0 - menu back
1 - 300 baud
2 - 1200 baud
3 * 2400 baud
4 - 4800 baud
5 - 9600 baud
Select option :
Page 16
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
RS232 output
RS232 Baudrate
Currentloop / Rs422 output
Currentloop / RS422 Baudrate
Analog output range direction
Analog output range speed
:
:
:
:
:
:
not in use
9600 baud
Daisy chain
2400 baud
360
40
Average direction
Average speed
Average analog out direction
Max wind speed reset time
:
:
:
:
60
60
60
60
Deviation
: 350
: 1.875
: 358.125
: 1.25
: 60
: 60
Press a key
When this option is selected the above shown screen is displayed showing all the settings
Page 17
Operating instructions
OMC-138/139 Display
Average interval
time window
Unit selection
Window
Gust display
Display indication
LEDs
On the front panel of the display are 3 pushbuttons. Menu, arrow up & arrow
down .
Brightness control:
- Adjust the brightness with the arrow up & arrow down buttons.
Min-Max indication:
-
Unit selection:
-
LED test:
- Press both arrow buttons at the same time.
When the buttons are not touched for 5 seconds, the display will return to normal
operation mode.
User Manual
for
MRUs
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-651002-01MU
Unrestricted
Blank page
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-651002-01MU
Unrestricted
Seatex MRU
User's Manual
Issued: 2004-10-21
Blank page
Notice
All rights reserved. Reproduction of any of this manual in any form whatsoever without
prior written permission from Kongsberg Seatex AS is forbidden.
All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual.
However, should any errors be detected, Kongsberg Seatex AS would greatly appreciate
being informed of them.
The above notwithstanding, Kongsberg Seatex AS can assume no responsibility for any
errors in this manual or their consequences.
Copyright 2004 by Kongsberg Seatex AS. All rights reserved.
Kongsberg Seatex AS
Pirsenteret, N-7462 Trondheim, Norway
Telephone: +47 73 54 55 00
Facsimile: +47 73 51 50 20
Duty phone: +47 73 50 21 11
E-mail: firmapost@kongsberg-seatex.no
www.kongsberg.com
III
Blank page
IV
Revision log
Document ID
MRU-D-001
Rev.
Date
1997-08-28
FOS
1998-03-20
Minor corrections
FOS
1999-01-15
FOS
1999-11-02
2001-03-12
2001-11-17
2002-11-12
FOS
2004-06-24
FOS
2004-10-21
FOS
9
10
11
Approved
(sign)
FOS
Blank page
VI
Table of contents
1.
INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................. 1
1.1 About this manual ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 References .................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms..................................................................... 2
1.3.1 Definitions .......................................................................................................... 2
1.3.2 Abbreviations and acronyms .............................................................................. 3
2.
3.
INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................ 27
4.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION...................................................................................... 29
4.1 Design principles........................................................................................................ 29
4.1.1 Six degrees of freedom motion......................................................................... 29
4.1.2 Gravity erection of orientation ......................................................................... 31
4.1.3 How to compute velocity/position.................................................................... 33
4.1.4 Magnetic north seeking .................................................................................... 35
4.1.5 Magnetic disturbances ...................................................................................... 36
4.1.6 Frames for measurements of motion entities.................................................... 36
4.1.6.1 Definition of frames and variables ..................................................... 37
4.1.6.2 Used reference frames ........................................................................ 39
4.2 Construction ............................................................................................................... 41
4.2.1 Internal sensors ................................................................................................. 43
VII
6.
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................ 67
6.1 Periodic maintenance ................................................................................................. 67
6.1.1 Software upgrades ............................................................................................ 67
6.1.2 Changing the internal lithium battery............................................................... 68
6.1.3 Recalibration..................................................................................................... 68
6.2 Repairs and modifications.......................................................................................... 68
6.2.1 Repair of the MRU ........................................................................................... 69
6.2.1.1 Installing a spare unit ......................................................................... 69
6.2.2 Repair of the MRU Junction Box ..................................................................... 70
6.3 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 70
6.3.1 No contact with the MRU................................................................................. 70
6.3.2 MRU status: Abnormal..................................................................................... 71
6.3.3 MRU status: Unreliable data or not ready........................................................ 72
6.3.4 Large oscillations in the roll and pitch measurements ..................................... 72
6.3.5 Reduced roll or pitch performance ................................................................... 72
6.3.6 Reduced heave performance............................................................................. 73
7.
DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................... 75
8.
PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................... 77
9.
List of illustrations
Figure 1 MRU 6 functional modules........................................................................................ 8
Figure 2 MRU 5 functional modules...................................................................................... 11
Figure 3 MRU 4 functional modules...................................................................................... 13
Figure 4 MRU H functional modules..................................................................................... 15
Figure 5 MRU Z functional modules ..................................................................................... 17
Figure 6 MRU 2 functional modules...................................................................................... 19
Figure 7 The MRU-D functional modules ............................................................................. 21
Figure 8 MRU 1 functional modules...................................................................................... 22
Figure 9 Rigid body motion ................................................................................................... 29
Figure 10 Orientation measurements by utilising accelerometer........................................... 31
Figure 11 A single axis rate gyro based device...................................................................... 32
Figure 12 Computation of velocity/position .......................................................................... 34
Figure 13 Magnetic north seeking.......................................................................................... 35
Figure 14 Right oriented frame .............................................................................................. 37
Figure 15 Geographic frame and body frame ........................................................................ 38
Figure 16 Body/vehicle frame definition ............................................................................... 39
Figure 17 Overview of used frames ....................................................................................... 40
Figure 18 MRU 6 functional modules.................................................................................... 41
Figure 19 MRU 6 mechanical layout ..................................................................................... 42
Figure 20 The Coriolis force rate gyro function .................................................................... 44
Figure 21 The pendulum accelerometer construction ............................................................ 45
Figure 22 The Calibration Certificate for an MRU 6............................................................. 47
Figure 23 The magnetic heading estimation process ............................................................. 54
Figure 24 Relative heave residual in percentage of amplitude for "Hydrographic survey"
filter with damping 0.7 and various average heave periods 5, 10, 15 and 20
seconds .................................................................................................................. 58
Figure 25 Step response in heave with corresponding settling time for "Hydrographic
survey" filter with damping 0.7 and various average heave periods 5, 10, 15 and
20 seconds ............................................................................................................. 58
Figure 26 Relative heave residual as percentage of amplitude for "Hydrographic survey"
filter with average heave period set to 10 seconds with various damping factors
0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8 and 0.9 ........................................................................................ 59
Figure 27 Selection of program mode to install..................................................................... 80
Figure 28 MRC Installation Complete ................................................................................... 80
Figure 29 MRU Configuration Window ................................................................................ 81
IX
Blank page
Introduction
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1
This is a compilation of information on the MRU products released for the user. The manual
is organised into the following chapters:
Chapter 1 Introduction - A brief presentation of this manual with references and
abbreviations.
Chapter 2 Technical data - Presents the technical data of the various MRU models, their
physical dimensions, required power and environment specifications, together
with restrictions in guarantee.
Chapter 3 Installation - Refers to the Installation Manual for the appropriate model
number.
Chapter 4 Technical description - An in-depth description of the design principles and
construction of the MRU. This chapter should be read before the MRU is used in
a new application.
Chapter 5 Operation instructions - Describes the start-up of the MRU, its operation and
how to monitor the performance of the unit.
Chapter 6 Maintenance - Presents how the MRU is to be repaired and serviced with
detailed description on how to troubleshoot the product.
Chapter 7 Drawings - Refers to the Installation Manual for the correct model number.
Chapter 8 Parts list - Lists the parts in the basic delivery and the additional equipment.
In this manual the following remarks are used:
CAUTION
Is used to make the user aware of procedures and operational practice which, if not
followed, may result in degraded performance or damage to the equipment.
Note
A note text has this format and is used to draw the user's attention to special
features or behaviour of the equipment.
1.2
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Introduction
References
General Conditions for the Supply of Products, Orgalime S 2000 with one exception
sheet
MRU-D-091 Installation Manual, MRU 2, rev. 8
MRU-D-092 Installation Manual, MRU 5 & H, rev. 8
MRU-D-093 Installation Manual, MRU 6 & 4, rev. 8
MRU-D-094 Installation Manual, MRU 3 & 1, rev. 7
MRU-D-119 Installation Manual, MRU D & Z, rev. 0
MRU-D-011 Delivery Specific Documents, rev. 2
1.3
1.3.1
Definitions
alignment
attitude
fluxgate
heading
heave
inclinometer
pitch
A rotation about the pitch axis and defined positive when the
bow moves up. Normally pitch means the dynamic pitch
angle motion.
roll
Introduction
starboard
strap down
This means that the inertial sensors are fixed to the vehicle or
sensor instead of fixed to a turnable mechanical platform.
surge
sway
yaw
1.3.2
AHRS
b-frame
CG
EMI
HPR-system
g-frame
h-frame
INS
MP
MRC
MRU
NMEA
P-axis
RMS
R-axis
ROV
Tesla
Y-axis
Introduction
Motion Reference Unit. This is a unit measuring dynamic linear motion and
attitude.
A standard for interchange of information between navigation equipment.
This axis is fixed in the vehicle, and points in the starboard direction
horizontally when the roll angle is zero. Positive rotation about this axis
means that the bow of the vehicle is moving up.
Root mean square.
This axis is fixed in the vehicle, and points in the forward direction
horizontally when the pitch angle is zero. Positive rotation about this axis
means that the starboard side of the vehicle is moving down.
Remotely Operated (underwater) Vehicle.
Unit for magnetic field strength.
This axis is fixed in the vehicle, and points in the downward direction when
the vehicle is aligned horizontally. Positive rotation about this axis is
turning the bow of the vehicle to starboard.
Technical data
2.
TECHNICAL DATA
2.1
General
The MRU products are supplied in a range of models from MRU 1 to MRU 6 as the top
performance model. The capabilities of the various models are:
MRU 6
MRU 5
MRU 4
MRU H
MRU Z
MRU 2
MRU D
MRU 1
Roll/pitch
Heading
Heave
0.02
0.02
0.05
0.05
0.15
0.15
0.35
1.0
5 cm
5 cm
5 cm
5 cm
5 cm
1.2
Acceleration
[m/s2]
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.01
The top model MRU 6 is an inertial attitude and heading reference system (AHRS) with a
dynamic linear motion measurement capability included. The Seatex MRU 6 is primarily
intended for medium accuracy measurement of motion in marine applications where a long
lifetime and no regular maintenance is important. The MRU is not equivalent to a high
performance gyro platform or laser-gyro-based device, but it can compete with low-cost
"strap-down" rate gyro based AHRS.
Internally, the computing algorithms are designed as a "strap down" inertial navigation
system. The unit has a higher performance than simpler devices because it contains 3-axis
angular rate sensors and 3-axis acceleration sensors. The MRU performance in the heave
channel competes with expensive gyro platforms, while the performance in the horizontal
directions is only suitable to measure rather fast motions. The MRU is not intended for
standard inertial navigation purposes.
The MRU 6 outputs absolute roll, pitch and yaw (heading), and relative heave (dynamic).
Acceleration and velocity of the linear motions, as well as angular acceleration and velocity,
are also outputs from the MRU 6 unit. The MRU computes relative (dynamic) surge and sway
motions and the velocities and accelerations of these variables. Performance data of the MRU
6 and the other models are described in chapter 2.4.
Technical data
The MRU sensors can be supplied in a variety of performances and prices to meet the
customer's needs. The table below shows the various performances in relation to the MRU 6.
Overview of capabilities of MRU models
MRU 6
MRU 5
MRU 4
MRU H
MRU Z
MRU 2
MRU D
MRU 1
3
3
Yes
3
3
No
3
3
Yes
3
3
No
3
3
No
2
2
No
2
2
No
1
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Outputs:
Roll and pitch angles
Magnetic heading, static
Heading angle, dynamic only
Roll and pitch angular velocity
Magnetic field in g-frame
Magnetic field in b-frame
Acceleration in b-frame
Heave measurements
Surge and sway measurements
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Inputs:
Speed log
External heading
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Interfaces:
Analog channels, 4
Digital RS-232/422 compatible
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Capability
Primary sensors:
Accelerometers
Angular rate sensors
Magnetometer
Functions:
Full "strap down" function
Free mounting orientation
Lever arm corrections
Sensor temperature comp. &
linearisation & orthogonalisation
Built-in self testing
2.2
Technical data
Operation or troubleshooting of MRU equipment will not imply any risk for heavy lift, high
voltages, explosions or exposure to gas. The MRU complies with IEC 950/EN60950
standards regarding fire, mechanical and heat hazards, radiation and chemical hazards.
2.3
Restrictions in guarantee
The liability of Seatex is limited to repair of MRUs only under the terms and conditions stated
in reference [1] and excludes consequential damages such as customer's loss of profit or
damage to other systems traceable back to MRU malfunction. The warranty does not cover
malfunctions of the MRU resulting from the following conditions:
a) The MRU is not shipped in the original transport boxes.
b) The MRU has been exposed to extreme shock and vibrations.
c) The MRU housing has been opened by the customer in an attempt to carry out repair
work.
d) Over-voltage or incorrect power connection.
2.3.1
2.3.2
Technical data
Permanent damage to the MRU may occur if power is applied to signal pins or the unit is
exposed to over-voltage. Maximum allowed voltage to the MRU is 30 Volts.
Hence, it is imperative that the power connection is always checked whenever new cables and
connectors are used. This can be done by measuring the DC power voltage at the MRU
connector before connecting the MRU. The warranty does not cover burnt out power or signal
I/O circuits. The MRU must be protected by an external fast fuse rated at 1 A or a power
supply with a current limit must be used. The MRU will short circuit a reversed polarity
power supply and blow this fuse without damage to the unit. If such a fuse is not used, the
internal power supply will burn out and the MRU will be permanently damaged.
2.4
Performance data
2.4.1
MRU 6 specification
Function
The MRU 6 outputs roll, pitch and yaw with magnetic north seeking together with relative
dynamic heave, surge and sway measurements. It has accurate measurements of roll, pitch
and heave at high horizontal accelerations. Use of the built-in magnetic north sensor or an
external heading input provides a precise estimation of the angular yaw rate error and the
availability of heading information output at high data rate. The MRU can operate through
360 degrees in all axes.
Technical data
Typical applications are sonar compensation of orientation and heave on ROVs and ships that
require absolute north information, motion sensor for motion control and damping systems for
high speed vessels and advanced ocean wave measurement systems with north information.
Variables Output from the MRU 6
The MRU 6 outputs roll, pitch and yaw angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed to
the vehicle frame. Symmetric Euler parameters of rotation are also available. The unit outputs
relative (dynamic) heave, surge, sway positions, velocities and accelerations in adjustable
frames. The MRU 6 provides a magnetic field in the fixed vehicle frame or geographic frame.
Variables Input to the MRU 6
The unit may be integrated with external input of velocity and heading from external systems.
Commands plus data may be transmitted to the MRU 6 via the RS-232 interface at any time.
In addition, an external one-second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN Pin
or the AUX3 line to enable complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock
system (typical from a GPS system or other highly accurate time source).
Angular Rate Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Angular orientation range: ........................................................................................... Unlimited
Angular rate range:...........................................................................................................150/s
Resolution in all axes: ........................................................................................................0.001
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch, yaw:.......................................................................0.015/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: ...................................................................................... 0.020 RMS
Static accuracy heading (no magn. vehicle influence, <60 latitude):......................... 0.3 RMS
Dynamic accuracy heading (at optimal magnetic conditions, <60 latitude): ................ 1 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): .............................................. 0.020 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.15% RMS
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 30 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: ...........................................................................................0.002 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.02% RMS
Technical data
MRU 5 specification
Function
The MRU 5 is the same as the MRU 6 except that it contains no magnetic sensor. The MRU
unit provides no absolute north information and the measurement drifts slowly in yaw, except
when external heading is input to the MRU 5.
10
Technical data
11
Technical data
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch, yaw:.......................................................................0.015/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: ...................................................................................... 0.020 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): .............................................. 0.020 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.15% RMS
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 30 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: ...........................................................................................0.002 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.02% RMS
Heave Motion Output
Output range:....................................................................................................50 m, adjustable
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Dynamic accuracy:...................................................................5 cm or 5% whichever is highest
Internal Processing
Internal update rate, angular rate sensors:.........................................................................400 Hz
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation estimation cycle frequency: ............................................. 1 Hz, Kalman filter based
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2) When the MRU is exposed to a combined two-axis sinusoidal angular motion with five
minutes duration.
2.4.3
MRU 4 specification
Function
The MRU 4 is built the same way as the MRU 6 but utilises a different type of angular rate
sensors. The MRU 4 is specially designed to accurately measure roll, pitch and heave together
with magnetic heading in environments with extreme horizontal accelerations.
The unit accepts external input of speed and heading information for improved accuracy in
heave, roll and pitch during turns and accelerations.
12
Technical data
13
Technical data
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch, yaw:...........................................................................0.1/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: ........................................................................................ 0.04 RMS
Static accuracy heading (no magn. vehicle influence, <60 latitude):......................... 0.5 RMS
Dynamic accuracy heading (at optimal magnetic conditions, <60 latitude): ............. 1.2 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): ................................................ 0.05 RMS
Scale factor error: ........................................................................................................0.2% RMS
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 30 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: ...........................................................................................0.002 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.02% RMS
Heave Motion Output
Output range:....................................................................................................50 m, adjustable
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Dynamic accuracy:...................................................................5 cm or 5% whichever is highest
Magnetic Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Magnetic sensor input range: ................................................................................... 100 Tesla
Magnetometer resolution (all axes):........................................................................... <10 nTesla
Magnetic sensor noise1:...................................................................................... 0.1 Tesla RMS
Magnetic sensor scale factor error: .............................................................................0.5% RMS
Magnetic signature (at 1 m distance, worst direction typical 10 nTesla): ................. <50 nTesla
Magnetic Output
3-axis terrestrial field in the fixed vehicle or geographic frame: ............................. 100 Tesla
Internal Processing
Internal update rate, angular rate sensors:.........................................................................400 Hz
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation estimation cycle frequency: ............................................. 1 Hz, Kalman filter based
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2) When the MRU is exposed to a combined two-axis sinusoidal angular motion with five
minutes duration.
14
2.4.4
Technical data
MRU H specification
Function
The MRU H is constructed in the same way as the MRU 5 but utilises a different type of
angular rate sensors. The MRU H is specially designed for motion measurements in marine
applications requiring highly accurate heave measurements in environments with extreme
horizontal accelerations.
The unit accepts external input of speed and heading information for improved accuracy in
heave, roll and pitch during turns and acceleration.
15
Technical data
16
2.4.5
Technical data
MRU Z specification
Function
The MRU Z is constructed in the same way as the MRU H but utilises a different type of
linear accelerometers. The limitation compared to an MRU H is that the MRU Z can only be
mounted in one fixed direction relative to the ship and that is with the connector pointing
down. The cost-effective MRU Z model is specially designed for use in marine applications
and is the ideal sensor for heave compensation of echo sounders. The unit incorporates 3-axis
Micro-Electro-Mechanical-Structure (MEMS) sensors for both linear acceleration and angular
rate.
The unit accepts external input of speed and heading information for improved accuracy in
heave, roll and pitch during turns and acceleration.
17
Technical data
18
2.4.6
Technical data
MRU 2 specification
Function
The MRU 2 is specially designed for use in marine applications that require both static and
dynamic roll and pitch measurements. The unit incorporates 2-axis sensors for linear
acceleration and angular rate. The limitation compared to an MRU H which has 3-axis
angular rate and acceleration measurements, is that the MRU 2 is not capable of measuring
heave and can only be mounted in one fixed direction relative to the ship. The MRU 2
achieves high reliability by using sensors with no rotational or mechanical wear-out parts.
19
Technical data
MRU D specification
Function
The cost-effective MRU D model is specially designed for use in marine applications and is
the ideal sensor for roll and pitch measurements on board ships. The unit incorporates 2-axis
Micro-Electro-Mechanical-Structure (MEMS) sensors for both linear acceleration and angular
rate. This unit achieves high reliability by using solid state sensors with no rotational or
mechanical wear-out parts.
This unit has to be mounted in a fixed direction relative to the ship and is best suited for
applications with limited range in roll and pitch. If unlimited mounting orientation and/or
unlimited mounting range is required we recommend one of the MRU models with sensors in
all three axis.
20
Technical data
21
Technical data
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 2
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 40 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: .............................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.05 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ...........................................................................................................1% RMS
Internal Processing
Internal update rate, angular rate sensors:.........................................................................400 Hz
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation estimation cycle frequency: ............................................. 1 Hz, Kalman filter based
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2) When the MRU is exposed to a combined two-axis sinusoidal angular motion with five
minutes duration.
2.4.8
MRU 1 specification
Function
The MRU 1 is a single axis motion sensor with the same external housing, signal processing
electronics and power supply as the MRU 6. This unit measures linear acceleration in one
axis by use of a high quality servo accelerometer. The MRU 1 is capable of synchronising and
time-tagging data to a master system. The MRU 1 has the same thermal accelerometer
modelling and calibration as found in the other MRU models.
22
Technical data
The MRU 1 is the ideal sensor for accurate measurement of vertical and transverse motion.
The sensor is specifically designed for measuring accelerations on board ships or in offshore
structures.
Variables Output from the MRU 1
The MRU 1 outputs linear acceleration in one axis, the Y-axis.
Variables Input to the MRU 1
An external one-second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN line to enable
complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock system (typical from a GPS
system or other highly accurate time source).
Angular Rate Sensors
Number of sensors:...............................................................................................................None
Acceleration Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 1
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 30 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: ...........................................................................................0.002 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.02% RMS
Sensitive axis:.................................................. Y-axis, along length direction of MRU cylinder.
Vibration lowpass filtering (2 order LP-filter):................................... Adjustable, 0.01 to 25 Hz
Period range for integration: ...........................................................................................1 to 25 s
Internal Processing
Internal sample rate at accelerometer:......................................400 kHz (aliasing free sampling)
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2.5
Restrictions in use
The MRU models are designed for marine applications with a linear acceleration less than
30 m/s2 (3g) and an angular rate range less than 150/s. Only relative dynamic position,
velocity and acceleration are available from the models. The MRU is not intended for
standard inertial navigation purposes.
The linear motion measurements are limited by the selection of their motion periods available
in the range 1 to 25 seconds.
Note
Even though the dynamic measurement range of the MRU 5 and H models is
unlimited, the static measurement range is limited to maximum 45. If this limit
is exceeded, an instability may occur. This restriction in use can be avoided by
23
Technical data
2.6
Physical dimensions
2.7
Power
2.8
Environmental specification
24
2.9
Technical data
Other data
25
Technical data
Blank page
26
3.
Installation
INSTALLATION
For description of installation of the MRU, please see the Installation Manual for your MRU
model number, reference [2], [3], [4], [5] or [6].
27
Installation
Blank page
28
Technical description
4.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
4.1
Design principles
This chapter covers basic properties of inertial motion measurement and explains how the
Seatex MRU models are functioning. It also defines the basic principles required to
understand the function of motion measurement devices.
4.1.1
A free moving body or vehicle has six independent degrees of freedom which may be
quantified as:
a) Linear translations in three perpendicular axes directions (x,y,z below).
b) Rotation about three perpendicular axes (shown below as x,y,z).
29
Technical description
Inertial motion measurement can similarly be divided into the following tasks:
a) Inertial orientation measurements.
b) Inertial linear translation measurements.
Inertial orientation measurement requires a gyro-like device which physically measures
angular acceleration, angular velocity or angular displacements. Some sensors physically
measure angular rate, and integrate the rate over time to compute the angular displacement in
the sensor interface. This allows an angular rate sensor to perform like an angular
displacement sensor.
The inertial linear translation measurement requires acceleration measurement. There exists
no inertial sensor that directly measures the physical linear velocity. Consequently, the linear
motion is integrated over time twice to obtain the translations. This puts high requirements on
the accelerometers. Also, the orientation measurement must be very accurate to alleviate the
unavoidable g-component of the acceleration.
Inertial measurement of linear translations are only useful if the orientation of the body or
vehicle is known (for example if the motion is mechanically constrained in some way), or the
orientation is measured. In most cases, orientation measurement cannot be avoided, even if
only the linear acceleration, velocity and translation are measured.
Variables Output from the MRU and Similar Systems
The theoretical maximum number of variables available from an inertial measurement system
is 18. This includes the six accelerations (3 linear, 3 rotational) resulting from the forces
acting on the body. The other 12 are six velocities (3 linear, 3 rotational) and six
displacements (3 linear, 3 rotational).
Most inertial systems can only output some of these variables because the units are dedicated
to a specific application. The MRU can output all 18 variables mentioned above, with some
limitations:
a) Only dynamic (short-term) changes in velocities and positions can be measured.
b) Only dynamic changes in heading (or rotation about a true vertical axis) can be measured
if magnetic heading cannot be used.
c) The angular accelerations are obtained by numeric differentiation of the angular rates.
There are no separate sensors that measure angular acceleration.
The 18 basic output variables can be represented in several ways that are more or less
equivalent. The user can, in principle, compute all the desired variables from these basic 18
variables.
30
4.1.2
Technical description
Most practical Motion Reference Units utilise gravity to locate the vertical direction. The
gravity and the orientation of the system referred to earth down is measured by linear
accelerometers. Since the gravity is a known figure (g = 9.81 m/s2), the measured acceleration
from the accelerometer, a, is used to calculate the orientation of the accelerometer according
to earth down, see the figure below. The orientation angle of the accelerometer according to g
is directly given as:
= arcsin (a/g)
where,
a: measured acceleration by the accelerometer.
g: the gravity.
a
Accelerometer
g
Figure 10 Orientation measurements by utilising accelerometer
An important feature for such systems is to minimise the sensitivity to the horizontal
accelerations of the ship or vehicle. This is a contradiction because the last accelerations
cannot be separated from the g-vector by an accelerometer. A pure, classical inclinometer
directly measures the total acceleration direction. This results in large inclination errors when
horizontal accelerations are present.
The ideal situation is to utilise a Motion Reference Unit that averages the g-vector over an
extremely long period of time in order to obtain an accurate reading of the vertical direction.
A ship or a vessel will only accelerate for a limited time (except if cruising in circles). The
sensitivity to short term horizontal accelerations is restricted by averaging the gravity over
time. The angular erection to the vertical is calculated in the MRU in a complicated way,
since the calculation is carried out for 3 axes in parallel. The erection is performed through
software in the MRU. Figure 11 shows the principle for a simplified 1-axis MRU like device.
The function is:
a) Angular rate is integrated to roll angle.
31
Technical description
32
4.1.3
Technical description
Position and velocity are both computed from acceleration in inertial Motion Reference Units.
If the acceleration measurement was infinitely accurate, it would be sufficient to integrate this
measurement twice to obtain the true position. The basic problem is to subtract the gcomponent of the measured acceleration. It is also important to know the orientation of the
gravity force relative to the ship, and not just the magnitude of the gravity.
Angular rate sensors provide the orientation. The angular rate sensing and the accurate
determination of the orientation of g are the limiting factors concerning the computation of
the linear velocity and position in most motion sensing products. The subtraction of the gvector is easily performed on a stabilised mechanical platform, where the accelerometers are
directly mounted on the platform.
One fundamental property to be aware of is that it is much easier to remove the g-influence in
the vertical component than in the horizontal component of the acceleration vector. A small
error in roll/pitch angle results in the following horizontal acceleration error:
aerr = g
For the vertical direction the same influence is approximately:
aerr = 0.52
where,
is given in radians
aerr is given in m/s2
A small error in the acceleration will be integrated over a long period of time. It is necessary
to low pass filter the integration of the acceleration to velocity and position to some given
values, so that the unavoidable errors are kept under control. This principle is shown for a
single axis in Figure 12. In the Seatex MRU the reference position and reference velocity are
always kept at zero. This means that if the MRU senses no motion, it will slowly reset the
position and velocity to zero. This type of device is best for sensing fast changes in position
and velocity.
33
Technical description
34
4.1.4
Technical description
35
4.1.5
Technical description
Magnetic disturbances
Magnetic compasses operating in magnetic environments are disturbed by the local magnetic
field. The disturbances give larger azimuth errors for larger inclinations (the angle between
the vertical direction (gravity) and the earth magnetic vector), and especially in areas that are
closer to the poles, where the horizontal magnetic field is weaker.
Softmagnetic disturbances distort the earth field. Steel walls and other magnetic materials
change the direction and the magnitude of the earth magnetic field. However, these
disturbances are usually quite stable, since the distorting materials are not moving relative to
the magnetometer. These disturbances may cause an azimuth error of 4-30 degrees if not
compensated for, depending on the magnetic environment on-board the vessel.
Hardmagnetic disturbances from permanent magnets and electrical currents add magnetism to
the earth's field. These can change more easily by temperature changes, shocks, people
carrying magnets passing by etc. Typically, hardmagnetic disturbances can give an azimuth
error of 20-30 degrees if not compensated for depending on the magnetic environment onboard the vessel. Typically, a 1 A electrical current through a long straight wire located a 3
cm distance away from the magnetometer, will set up an equivalent magnetic field to the earth
magnetic field.
This illustrates how sensitive the magnetometer inside magnetic compasses is for magnetic
disturbances. In the MRU 4 and 6 models the magnetic disturbances can be compensated for
by the included software for magnetic neutralisation of the vessel's own magnetic signature.
In chapter 4.2.3.2 it is described how magnetic neutralisation is implemented in the MRU
software.
4.1.6
It is necessary to operate with a unified co-ordinate frame in order to avoid confusion in the
definitions of the outputs from the MRU. Many different definitions are used in industry. The
following basic rules apply:
a) Frames are orthogonal, which means that there are 90-degree angles between the axes.
Frames have a name.
b) The frames are always right-hand oriented as shown in Figure 14. The succession of axes
are X, Y and Z. Translations, velocities and accelerations are positive in the direction of
the axis.
c) Turning is defined as positive around a given axis, when the rotation is clockwise seen
from the origin along a given axis. Rotation X means rotation around the axis X in the
frame.
36
Technical description
37
Technical description
R-axis
Points in the bow direction of a ship and horizontally when pitch angle is
zero.
P:
P-axis
Points in the starboard direction of a ship and horizontally when roll angle is
zero.
Y:
Y-axis
Points down in the direction of gravity when roll and pitch are zero.
38
Technical description
Sensor frame. This frame is defined by the MRU itself (the axes marked on the housing
of the MRU). The s and b-frame are identical if the MRU mounting angles set in the
software configuration, are zero.
39
Technical description
40
4.2
Technical description
Construction
This chapter contains an in-depth description of the function of the top model MRU 6. The
description is intended for potential users who want to see if the MRU is suitable for their
application. The differences between the MRU 6 and the lower model versions are described
in chapter 2.4.
The description of the highest level functions of an MRU 6 are shown in Figure 18 and the
mechanical layout in Figure 18. All functions are located inside the housing of the MRU,
including power supply and all signal processing. The function is similar to an Inertial
Navigation System (INS). This applies to both sensors and processing algorithms.
41
Technical description
42
4.2.1
Technical description
Internal sensors
The MRU 6 has three built-in sensors that measure the following physical vector quantities:
angular rate, linear acceleration and magnetic field. The sensor system is equal for all three
axes, providing no limitations in mounting or operational orientation. The sensor readings are
scaled, linearized, orthogonalized and temperature compensated before they are passed on to
the more advanced signal processing inside the MRU. This is described in chapter 4.2.3.
The sensor axes are accurately aligned to the axes marked on the top lid of the MRU by the
orthogonalisation procedure. This means that accurate axis directional trimming is not
performed mechanically, but by computer software. The precision reference is the top lid.
Index holes in the top lid help the customer to align the MRU properly. The actual MRU axes
can be turned by software to various sets of roll, pitch and yaw angles relative to the basic
directions marked on the MRU housing.
No analog trimming is used inside the MRU. All sensors are trimmed by software during a
computer controlled calibration and burn-in-procedure completed at the factory.
4.2.1.1
The MRU models measure the angular rate vector initially without the use of moving parts
(gyros). Coriolis force based vibratory angular rate sensors are used in the MRU 5 and 6
models. These rate sensors use linear vibratory motion instead of rotary motion, and have low
power consumption and no wear-out parts.
The accuracy of the angular rate sensors is very important for the accuracy of the MRU. If the
gyroscopes are accurate only small and slow feedback from the accelerometers is needed to
determine the vertical direction at all times. This ensures low sway and surge acceleration
sensitivity in the vertical direction.
The characteristics of the Coriolis force based angular rate sensors are as follows:
Very low environmental sensitivity to acceleration and vibration given by high frequent
oscillation (14 kHz), and a symmetric design that cancels external vibrations. This means
that mechanical vibrations in the sensor have only limited impact on the MRU rate
sensors.
Both the scale factor (gain) and the offset (zero) of the sensors are stabilised by a
symmetric and simple mechanical design of the oscillatory mechanical system. Electrical
drift is cancelled in the basic analog design.
High linearity, which results in small average drift errors during oscillating rate loads (as
on a ship's roll axis).
The design of the Coriolis gyro is based on the use of a vibration cylinder.
43
Technical description
v
ac
The sensor is implemented as a force feedback system. The d-axis is used for excitation, and
the f-axis is used to measure the drive amplitude to control the excitation. A measurement
feedback loop controls an excitation along the c-axis. This excitation cancels the vibration set
up along axis s given by the Coriolis acceleration ac, which we want to measure. The drive
signal to the c-axis is thus the final output from the rate sensor. The gyroscopes are interfaced
to the computer by a high resolution A/D system ( technology), and some of the signal
processing for the rate integration is performed directly in a gate array creating the interface
to the micro-computer. A similar design based on quarts rate sensors are used in the MRU
models 4, H and 2.
4.2.1.2
The accelerometers
The accelerometers in the MRU 5 and 6 models are of the accurate pendulum type. These
accelerometers consist of a proof mass, a hinge, some damping, a pickoff, a forcer and a servo
loop.
44
Technical description
The magnetometer
The magnetometer is based on the servo fluxgate principle. This means that a local 3-axis coil
system (of Helmholtz type) cancels the external (the field to be measured) magnetic field. The
output from the sensor is then three DC currents representing the three magnetic field
components. The relation between current and magnetic field in a non-ferromagnetic
environment is linear and given by Biot Savart's law. This means high gain stability and high
linearity. This sensor has a much better linearity and stability than standard fluxgate sensors
based on direct voltage output from the fluxgate itself without the use of a zero field.
A zero field detector is placed inside this coil system and creates feedback to the DC current
flowing in the Helmholtz coils. The detection of the zero field offset is carried out by the use
of a traditional fluxgate based on a ferromagnetic metallic glass core and non-orthogonal use
of the core.
The electronics is directly controlled by the micro-computer for easy self-check and trimming
of the sensor from the internal MRU computer. Most of the electronics is placed in a gate
array. The DC current output conversion is implemented by the use of a high resolution
A/D converter.
45
4.2.2
Technical description
An advanced, time efficient and error-safe procedure for calibration of the internal sensors is
one of the key properties to achieve the quality of the MRU product. Calibration,
orthogonalisation, linearisation and temperature compensation is carried out for each physical
sensor inside each MRU by a computerised procedure.
For calibration of the angular rate sensors and the accelerometers a 2-axis Acutronic rate table
system with temperature chamber, is used. The calibration process is fully automated with the
capacity of calibrating and testing eight MRUs simultaneously. Due to the temperature
chamber on the rate table, temperature gradients can be kept at a minimum during calibration.
The accuracy of this Acutronic system is better than 1 arc s (0.0003) and provides a very
accurate reference during calibration and testing. The calibration of the angular rate sensors is
performed at different rates and temperatures. The accelerometers in the MRU are calibrated
by setting the rate table at certain angles relative to the vertical and repeating the procedure
for different temperatures. From these data the complete sensor calibration parameters are
computed using a generalised least square parameter fit procedure.
The magnetometer is calibrated with the MRU inside a precise 3-axis Helmholtz coil set
controlled by a computer. This is a magnetic field generator that generates homogenous
magnetic fields. Fields with different directions and magnitudes are set up across the MRU.
The internal dynamic and static ferro-magnetism of the MRU is compensated for in the sensor
calibration.
The parameters from the calibration process for each MRU can be found in the ASCII file
with the name "mruNNNN.par" on the floppy disk accompanying each MRU delivery. Here
NNNN is the serial number of the MRU.
4.2.2.1
After calibration, static and dynamic tests are performed on each MRU for final performance
verification. These tests are carried out utilising the Acutronic rate table system and
performed immediately after sensor calibration. The results from these tests are presented on
the MRU Calibration Certificate delivered with each unit.
In order to provide the customers with data showing the quality of each MRU compared with
its technical specifications, the following tests are carried out:
1) Dynamic roll and pitch test that combines two sine functions with different frequencies for
a five-minute recording period. The results are presented by RMS numbers and plots of
both the measurements and the errors are shown on the certificate.
2) Static noise level test for the roll, pitch and yaw angles and angular rate along with the
accelerometers and the magnetic sensor. The results are presented as RMS numbers for a
30-minute recording period.
46
Technical description
3) Rate gyro scale factor test by rotating each sensor axis in the rate table at 10/s and
30/s. The measured scale factor error is presented as an RMS number.
4) The accelerometer scale factor is tested by tilting the MRU in steps of 30 degrees around a
circle. The measured scale factor error is presented as an RMS number.
All the above tests are performed at room temperature. The Calibration Certificate contains
data of each measurement along with the test requirements and an approval column
(passed/failed). The test requirements are according to the technical specifications for each
MRU model given in chapter 2.4 in this manual.
47
Technical description
RMS ( x) =
1
N
N
x2
i =1 i
where,
x
4.2.3
Processing algorithms
It is important to understand its internal functions to fully exploit the possibilities of the
MRU. This section should be read before the MRU is used in a new application. The Seatex
MRU should not be used in applications for which it is not designed.
The MRU 6 operates much like a magnetic north seeking "strap down" inertial navigation
system. It is an inertial navigational system without use of gimbals or a mechanical platform.
All sensors are "strapped" to the housing of the unit or to the vehicle where the MRU is
mounted. The MRU 6 algorithms are tailored to obtain optimum performance from the
MRU's internal sensors in marine applications dominated by ocean wave induced roll, pitch
and heave motion. It is important to obtain as much information as possible from the angular
rate sensors, and to provide fast data response for use in critical real time applications of the
MRU.
A variable gain Kalman filter is part of the sensor error estimator. The algorithms take into
account the fact that the placement of the ship's centre of gravity, the MRU 6 location and the
measurement location on a ship, are usually different (lever arm compensation). An
"intuitive" description on how the MRU works, can be summarised as:
a) The angular rate sensors determine the short term orientation of the MRU, expressed as
roll, pitch and yaw angles or body angular velocity. Internally, the orientation
information is kept in a rotation matrix (a 3 x 3 matrix). This computation is executed at
fast cyclic rates and gives instant orientation response to the user.
b) A small feedback from the horizontal acceleration of the vehicle's centre of gravity, CG,
and the earth rate compensates for the angular rate sensor errors. (Compensation for
centripetal acceleration by speed log input is also performed, if available). In a time
frame of 3 to 10 minutes, the horizontal frame in the MRU will slowly be adjusted so that
the observed horizontal accelerations of the CG is averaged to zero.
c) A small feedback from the magnetometer in the heading direction compensates for the
angular rate sensor errors. This is done by first finding the true horizontal component of
the magnetic field, and then computing the north direction. The deviation from north is
used to correct angular rate sensor errors in the heading (yaw) direction. If no magnetic
sensor is available (MRU 5), or the magnetic conditions are poor, then external heading
information input from a gyro compass may replace the internal heading information.
When there is no heading information available, the measurement will drift slowly in
yaw. In this case the yaw angle is of no use.
48
Technical description
d) Linear motions are computed by limited double integration of the acceleration. This
computation is performed in the g-frame. The limited integration means that the ideal 40
dB/decade frequency response of a double integration is broken at a lower cutoff
frequency. This frequency is typically chosen to be 0.005 Hz, but the user can change it
freely. If a low cutoff frequency is chosen, there will be a moving bias in the velocity
outputs. If a high frequency is chosen, the MRU will not measure low-frequency motions
well. The exact setting can be tuned to achieve the best performance from the MRU. (The
setting of this cutoff frequency corresponds to a tradeoff between external navigation
input weight and INS weight, for those who have worked with integrated navigation.)
The corresponding navigational input of the MRU is always set to zero.
Trimming of the MRU Axis Directions
The axis directions of the MRU are set to be aligned with the axis directions marked on the
MRU housing (R, P, Y) during the calibration procedure. When the MRU is installed in the
vehicle, it is important that the MRU axes are trimmed and aligned to the vehicle axis or the
axis of the system for which it is supposed to compensate the vehicle motions. These offset
angles between the MRU and the vehicle axes need to be downloaded to the MRU from the
setup software, MRC, or from a PC (see the Installation Manual for instructions). The entered
offset angle setting will change the directions of the sensor axes immediately, but the rate
sensors will not "feel" any physical rotation of the MRU. This means that the MRU will align
to the new direction given by the accelerometer and the axes of the magnetometer.
4.2.3.1
Computation of orientation
The orientation information is kept in an on-line rotation matrix representing the rotation of
the geographic frame (g-frame) relative to the body or vehicle frame (b-frame). From a given
initial value of the rotation matrix from b to g-frame Cbg , the present value of Cbg is calculated
by using the differential equation:
C&bg = Cbg b
Here,
C&bg
Angular rate sensors measure the angular rate. The equation above is solved with high
numeric accuracy using a special numerical method. Some of the processing is carried out in
the electronic interface and some in the software. An accurate computation is important for
the MRU's ability to operate in vibrating environments, where strong coning motion is a
problem.
49
Technical description
The initial value of Cbg is computed in a special initial alignment procedure, where the average
value of the acceleration ab is supposed to provide the down-direction, and the heading from
the magnetic north defines the R-axis. If no magnetic north is available, the measurement will
drift slowly in yaw.
The average time needed to stabilise the initial alignment computation is approximately one
minute. Initial alignment starts immediately after power on, or after a command from the user.
If the vehicle has high dynamics (moves a lot) during startup, there may be problems with the
Kalman filter. At worst the alignment must be redone by restarting the MRU. High
dynamics during startup means that the MRU is moved up to 10 degrees in all axes.
The Orientation Estimation
The orientation estimator observes angular rate sensor errors from the measurement of
acceleration and magnetic fields in the g-frame. The estimator is designed as a variable gain
Kalman filter. The gain is a function of the present noise levels estimated from the
measurements (dependent on the present orientation of the MRU) and the present estimated
error variance in this estimator.
Earth rate compensation takes place in the orientation estimator. The earth rate is slightly
higher than the random drift of the angular rate sensors. Earth rate compensation gives a
small improvement to the performance of the MRU during fast changes in the
orientation of the vehicle. Earth rate is only compensated for when absolute north direction
is available (this means MRU 6, 5, 4 or MRU H with external heading input).
If the vehicle turns with a high velocity or accelerates up to a high velocity, this may result in
a dangerous long term acceleration error in the vehicle's CG. This can occur even if there are
no excursions in roll or pitch angle.
Over a very long period of time (> 500 sec), the size of this error in radians is directly
given by
= a/g [rad]
where "a" is the horizontal acceleration and "g" is the gravity. In this case the MRU functions
like an inclinometer.
Over a short period of time, the roll and pitch error of the MRU is given by
= kv v
where "v" is the change in horizontal velocity of the MRU or the actual time integral of
acceleration, while
kv = 0.0014 [s/m]
A changed pitch rate will give a roll error with the opposite sign. The value of kv is rather low
for the MRU if compared to similar products. This means that the sway acceleration
sensitivity is generally lower for the MRU.
50
Technical description
In the case of turning at a high speed, we get a centripetal acceleration caused error given by
= kv v
where "" is the turn angle [rad] and "v" is the cruise speed.
An Example
A ship accelerates up to 10 m/s (20 knots) from standstill in a short time. The measured pitch
error caused by this is given as:
51
Technical description
b) Rotate the b-frame an angle about the common Y and D-axis. This angle is defined as
the heading of the vehicle.
c) Rotate the b-frame an angle about the new P-axis of the b-frame.
d) Rotate the b-frame an angle about the new R-axis of the b-frame.
These definitions of rotation angles correspond to the standard definition of roll/pitch/yaw
angles for ships. The definition is a set of so-called Euler angles.
Notes
The angles are measured from the start position to the final position in each step above.
Positive angular directions are clockwise rotations around the actual turning axis, when
looking from the origin to the end of the axis.
Roll and yaw - angles are not defined for pitch angles of /2 (so-called singular
configurations). This is because the roll angle and the yaw angle in this case both describe
a rotation about the same vertical axis. Ships do not reach this configuration of a 90degree pitch in normal operations. If the MRU is used on an ROV with full orientation
control, the user should apply the quaternion outputs. An MRU requiring external heading
input will also malfunction in the internal processing close to these points, due to that yaw
angle input (same as heading). An MRU 6 using the internal magnetometer will, however,
function in the entire orientation space.
How to Compute the Rotation Matrix from Roll, Pitch and Yaw
Each of these three rotations given by the roll, pitch and yaw angles can be represented by a
rotation matrix. If all three transformations are multiplied, we get the rotation matrix shown
below. The definition can be used if the user wants to generate the rotation matrix from roll,
pitch and yaw outputs from the MRU (C and S are short notes for cosine and sine).
C ( )C ( ) C ( ) S ( ) S ( ) S ( )C ( ) C ( ) S ( )C ( ) + S ( ) S ( )
Cbg = S ( )C ( ) C ( )C ( ) + S ( ) S ( ) S ( ) C ( ) S ( ) + S ( ) S ( )C ( )
S ( )
C ( ) S ( )
C ( )C ( )
The roll and yaw outputs are also unusable close to = /2 due to numeric inaccuracies. This
means that the roll, pitch and yaw angles should not be used when close to the singularity,
that is when operation in the vicinity of pitch angle = /2 is expected. For example, do not
try to generate Cbg from ,, when close to this singularity.
52
Technical description
q12 q 22 q 32 + q 42
C bg = 2(q1 q 2 + q 3 q 4 )
2(q1 q 3 q 2 q 4 )
2(q1 q 2 q 3 q 4 )
q +q q +q
2(q 2 q 3 + q1 q 4 )
2
1
2
2
2
3
2(q1 q 3 + q 2 q 4 )
2
4
2(q 2 q 3 q1 q 4 )
q12 q 22 + q 32 + q 42
Here lx, ly and lz are the direction cosines of the rotation axis, and is the angle of rotation.
Horizontal Plane Pitch Angle Output
The MRU can output horizontal plane roll angle instead of roll angle around the present pitch
axis. This type of roll angle is used in the sensors manufactured by Datawell. The Datawell
sensors additionally output the sine of the roll and pitch angles. The MRU in this case
outputs:
RollHippy (var. no. 66) = sin() = sin()cos()
PitchHippy (var. no. 67) = sin() = -sin()
Here
is the Euler roll angle.
is the Euler pitch angle.
4.2.3.2
The MRU models 4 and 6 include a 3-axis fluxgate magnetometer measuring the magnetic
field at the MRU location. In case of a dominating earth magnetic field (small magnetic
disturbances), a fairly good estimate of the vessels heading angle relative true north can be
determined and output from the MRU. An even better estimate is obtained if the measured
magnetic field can be compensated for the vessel magnetic signature.
The MRU software includes a procedure which can be performed in order to find this
magnetic signature. During training an internal model describing the magnetic signature is
updated continuously while providing online information about the model quality to the user.
If the user accepts the result from the training procedure, the model is stored and used
internally at runtime.
53
Technical description
Ship magnetic
signature
neutralization
Ship magnetic
signature
estimation
Magnetic
heading
estimation
Internal heading
Angular rate
gyro bias
estimation
4.2.3.3
The linear motion computation basically provides acceleration, velocity and position in the gframe (geographic north, east, down). Alternatively, they can be provided in the h-frame
(heading frame F, S, D) or the b-frame (R, P and Y-axes). See definitions of frames in chapter
4.1.6. All internal processing takes place in the h-frame, and data are later transferred to the
other actual frames.
The relative linear position computation is based on double integration of acceleration over
time. Only changes within a short time frame can be estimated, since we do not get static
information on motion (no position measurements). Hence, the MRU cannot be used for any
direct navigation purposes but it can be used to provide smooth measurements within a time
frame up to 25 seconds. The performance is far better in the heave direction than in the surge
and sway directions. The reason for the difference between the channels is the influence of
54
Technical description
roll/pitch-error generated gravity components being a first order effect in the horizontal
channels, and a second order effect in the vertical channel.
A ship or vessel will have short term motions dominated by ocean waves when it is at sea.
The average heave level for a ship or vessel is zero and the heave measurements from the
MRU will always be output relative to this zero level. For surge and sway motions we can
expect motions around a straight-line trajectory.
Acceleration Processing
The measured acceleration is initially transformed to the h-frame at a high sample rate in the
same way as for the vertical erection acceleration processing. The down direction remains
stationary, hence the heave velocity and position can be obtained by direct integration over
time of the acceleration.
The acceleration is compensated for lever-arm effects and gravity. The user can specify a
lever arm from the MRU to the actual measurement point during the installation of the MRU.
The linear motions are then computed in the measurement point. The static value of g is
subtracted before the linear motion computation takes place. The static value is obtained by
using a low-pass filter for the computed acceleration in the vehicle's centre of gravity. The
angular velocity is low-pass-filtered with a cutoff at approximately 10 Hz, prior to processing
of lever-arms in order to reduce effects from sensor noise. This will influence the high
frequency heave/sway/surge components of the lever arm.
The acceleration at the measurement point is computed from:
g
g
& )r b
amp
= amru
+ Cbg ( 2 +
mp
where:
b
rmp
Lever arm vector from the MRU to the actual measurement location
(measurement point) for surge, sway and heave.
Angular velocity (from the angular rate sensors, b-frame), skew symmetric form.
&
Angular acceleration (derived from the angular rate, b-frame), skew symmetric
form.
g
amru
55
Technical description
The linear motion computation for position is a double integration over time for a selected
average period To. Integration of the acceleration over time for each axis gives velocity and
position. However, it is problematic to measure linear motions with long periods, like periods
of 25 seconds or more. The reason for using a highpass filter on the acceleration
measurements, is to remove static or slowly varying errors. These errors will give errors in the
velocity and position data. The filter may be made under-damped to improve the amplitude
response slightly down to To and to improve the phase response above To. The phase varies
more close to To. Low damping also means ringing at the selected average period To. The user
must tune this filter according to the requirements.
The user can set the average period To in the range 1 to 25 seconds. If a too long period is
selected, the velocity and position outputs will have a slowly varying error. If a short period is
chosen, the estimated heave will have a phase error for long period motions.
A low damping factor reduces the short term error for long period motions close to the
selected average period To, since the phase error is reduced. However, ringing in the output at
To may cause some problems. The damping factor can be set in the range 0.3 to 1.0. The
bias in the surge and sway directions is higher than the bias in heave. This is caused by the
influence of small orientation errors providing gravity components in the horizontal direction.
Average periods To set above 2.5 seconds is not recommended in surge and sway due to this
problem.
In the software two different types of filter structures are implemented. The filter mode
"General purpose" is implemented to achieve optimal amplitude performance, whereas the
"Hydrographic survey" mode provides optimal phase performance. For the "Automatic" filter
mode the hydrographic survey filter structure is used. This algorithm estimates the sea
conditions by computing the dominating period of the waves seen from ship or vehicle and
automatically sets the average heave period To in real time during operations. For the surge
and sway measurements the filter mode "General purpose" is the only mode available.
Selection of Heave Filter Mode
The following selections are available in the MRU configuration in order to achieve the
optimal heave performance:
Heave filter mode. Selection between different filter structures.
Period. The average heave period for the vessel, To.
Damping. The heave damping factor to be used in the filter.
The heave filter damping and average period should be chosen in order to obtain the best
possible correspondence between the estimated heave motion and the real heave motion.
These parameters can be set to a constant value or the automatic adaptive filter may be chosen
in case of varying sea environments. The following should be considered when selecting the
different heave filter modes and parameters:
56
Technical description
57
Technical description
Figure 25 Step response in heave with corresponding settling time for "Hydrographic
survey" filter with damping 0.7 and various average heave periods 5, 10, 15 and 20 seconds
The selection of heave filter settings is a trade-off between low heave error over a wide range
of heave periods and the settling time after an occurrence introducing a step response in the
heave filter, like after a turn if the MRU does not have external input of the vessel speed.
Input of vessel speed to the MRU is important to reduce the heave errors after a turn or
changes in speed.
58
Technical description
59
Technical description
Application
Period
[s]
10
25
14
10
3
3
3
General purpose
Rigs & non-cruising ships
Large ships, cruising
Small ship, cruising
ROVs, towfishes & buoys
High speed vessels
Small survey boat
Damping
0.6
0.45
0.6
0.8
1.0
0.8
0.8
In the MRU it is possible to output heave position and velocity measurements where the mean
heave value is not zero, but depends on the vessel trim and list at any time. These output
variables are:
109 LA PosMonD
119 LA VelMonD
These variables are calculated in the following way; First, the CG heave acceleration is
integrated twice to obtain the CG heave position and velocity in the normal way. Then the CG
heave position and velocity is lever arm compensated using the vector between CG and MP
(measurement point) to obtain the alternative MP heave position and velocity. The difference
lies in the lever arm compensation of heave position and velocity after integration, instead of
performing heave acceleration compensation before the integration process. Hence, the
measurement point (MP) heave position is not zero mean, instead its value depends on the
vessel tilt at any time. These variables are useful especially in applications where the distance
between the MP and the sea level is to be determined, like in offshore crane operations or in
echo sounder installations with depth changes due to changes in vessel trim and list.
4.2.3.4
The total time delay for the output data seen from the user is a sum of a number of delay
sources. The size of the contribution from each delay source is determined by the
configuration of the MRU. It also strongly depends on the baud rate and if polled or cyclic
I/O is used.
Below there is a summary of the timing delays found when measuring the time by the use of
an oscilloscope connected to software triggered hardware outputs. The basic timing of each
operation was measured. The actual times given by the configuration setting must be included
to find the total time. The timing will probably vary slightly depending on the release number
of the software. The numbers below are valid for the release 2.50 of the MRU software. Be
60
Technical description
aware of the difference between cyclic and polled output of data. The sample interval will
always be an integer times the internal computation period within the unit (10 ms) when
cyclic output data are used. The output data will then be synchronous with the internal life of
the MRU. With polled output data the sample interval is set by the user during software
configuration, and it is then decoupled from the internal life of the MRU.
Summary of Time Delays Inside the MRU
: ta = 5 ms
: tb = 2.5 ms
: tc = 10 ms 10 ms
: td = 0.8 + n 0.2 ms
: te = 2.5 2.5 ms
f)
: tf = (n + 1) 40000/b ms
: tg = 50000/b ms
61
Technical description
This is the time from the physical event until data are available as a complete message
received by the user.
By cyclic analog output:
t = ta + t b
t = ta + tb + tc + td
t = ta + t b + t c + t d + t e + t f
t = ta + tb + tc + td + te + tf + tg
This is the time from a request is issued until a complete message is received and not the
actual "age" of the physical data.
Hardware polling response time:
thr = td + te + tf
tsr = td + te + tf + tg
Examples
1) Analog output of data, three variables configured, cyclic reading of data by pulse on the
EXT0-line. The EXT0-line goes to low value each time new data are transmitted.
ta = 5 ms, tb = 2.5 ms
delay = ta + tb = 7.5 ms
2) Digital cyclic output of data, three variables at 19200 baud:
td = 0.8 + 3 0.2 ms
tf = 8.3 ms
Delay on output signals from the MRU; delay1 = ta +tb + td = 8.9 ms
Delay on output signals when received by the computer; delay2 = delay1 + tf = 17.2 ms
62
4.2.3.5
Technical description
Most of the logic in the MRU is made by RAM based logic circuits. These circuits can be
uploaded via a serial line from the computer. This means that the MRU can be updated with
new and improved functionality later without opening the MRU housing. Simply install new
software.
CPU
The CPU is a 32 bit CMOS microcomputer placed on one electronic board. A calendar clock
running from a Lithium battery makes the MRU able to time-tag data from this clock. The
serial line from the MRU has an adjustable baud rate up to 57600 baud.
Power Supply
The internal power supply also contains the MRU connector and noise filters. The power
supply can operate at 12-30 V DC. Seatex declares EMC with immunity, enclosure port
EN50082-2, and with radiation, enclosure port EN50081-2. The MRU complies with product
safety standard IEC/EN60950 regarding fire, mechanical and heat hazards, radiation hazards
and chemical hazards (the EMI is reduced even more with a screened cable).
The User I/O
The user I/O is placed on a separate board inside the MRU. Seatex's philosophy is to isolate
the faster changing demands for different types of I/O from the functionality of the MRU to
keep the number of MRU models at a minimum. An exception has been made for analog I/O
which is provided internally in the MRU. The MRU provides a voltage output.
All digital RS-232 I/O to and from the MRU are galvanically isolated. For those who prefer
RS-422 communication with the MRU an additional board can be mounted in the MRU
junction box in order to convert the RS-232 signal to RS-422 and vice versa.
The Real Time Software System in the MRU
The signal processing inside the MRU is real time with very accurate timing requirements and
high-speed operation. The important tasks are always performed independent of external user
requests. The processing software, configuration settings and calibration constants are
downloaded to the MRU from a PC via the RS-232 interface. The software and other data
remain resident while the MRU is not powered due to the Lithium battery inside. Seatex or
the users can download new configuration and revised or new versions of the MRU software
at any time. New software versions can be distributed to existing customers.
63
Technical description
Blank page
64
Operating instructions
5.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
5.1
Start procedure
The following start procedures shall be used when the MRU is installed according to the
procedures described in the Installation Manual.
1) Set power-on. The MRU starts automatically when the unit receives power and will be in
operation as long as power is received.
2) The MRU needs some time before full accuracy is achieved. The maximum erection time
is 15 minutes. During this period the MRU runs an internal self check procedure for
sensors and electronic boards and performs an initial alignment.
3) When the MRU has obtained full accuracy, the status message from the MRU will change
from "reduced accuracy" to "normal" on the asynchronous serial line, and the MRU
XOUT pin goes high or low depending on the selected configuration.
4) The MRU is preferably left with power on since there are no wear-out parts.
Once the MRU is installed, there is no need for manual intervention during operation.
Note
If the vehicle has high dynamics during startup, the MRU may run into problems.
At worst the alignment must be redone by restarting the MRU. High dynamics
during startup means that the MRU is moved up to 10 degrees in all the
orientation axes.
5.2
Operation
Normally the MRU outputs signals on the serial line and/or the analog channels without any
involvement from the user.
When using the MRU for heave measurements it is important to tune the heave parameters
(heave period and damping) to the vessel size and motion characteristics for the actual
weather conditions. Since the configuration parameter "Heave filter mode" only enters the
default values of the heave period and damping according to the selected mode, these values
have to be tuned for the actual vessel and weather conditions in order to achieve optimum
heave performance. Therefore, before a survey and/or during operation check the heave
performance of the MRU and tune the heave parameters until the best heave performance is
achieved. An alternative is to select "Automatic" and let the MRU automatically choose the
best settings.
For applications where the magnetic heading from the MRU 4 and 6 models are used, be
aware that the magnetic field of the vessel can change during operation, and that the magnetic
deviation and the magnetic model may need to be recalculated to ensure an optimum heading
measurement.
65
5.3
Operating instructions
Stop procedure
When the power to the MRU is interrupted, the MRU will stop automatically in a controlled
way. The internal battery ensures that the configuration downloaded into the unit will be kept
while unpowered.
5.4
Performance monitoring
The "Sys Port" serial line from the MRU can be set up to transmit status and event messages
to the host computer for performance monitoring. These messages are set up in the MRU
configuration software, MRC, and in the configuration parameter Verbose mask. In addition
to the status and event messages described in appendix B, there is a quality status flag
transmitted via the "Sys Port" serial line. The quality status is either normal or invalid data.
66
6.
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
The MRU is not designed for service in the field except for installation of new software
versions and change of user configuration. An opening of the housing will result in damage or
degradation of the unit and void the warranty. The MRU is gas filled to insure correct thermal
conductivity and to avoid condensation of water vapour inside the MRU housing at low
temperatures.
An MRU that needs service has to be shipped in the original transportation box to Seatex.
You will find the address on page two of this manual.
During maintenance, Seatex can rent out a spare MRU unit to the user if needed. The user can
load his own configuration file into the spare MRU making it ready for operation. Seatex will
also assist the user with the configuration if needed.
Seatex will regularly provide software upgrades for the MRU. These upgrades will improve
the function of the MRU as additional features evolve. New software versions can also
improve much of the electronic hardware functions inside the MRU. These upgrades can be
carried out without opening the MRU housing by connecting a PC to the MRU and
downloading the new software.
All upgrades are intended to be "backward compatible" with the user's digital drivers so that
previous versions of these drivers will work. This depends on how well the driver is coded by
the user. Therefore, Seatex cannot give a warranty that is " backward compatible".
6.1
Periodic maintenance
The periodic maintenance of the MRU can be divided into three categories:
6.1.1
Software upgrades
Seatex will offer regular software upgrades for the MRU with improvements and new
functionalities. It is up to the user to decide whether he will upgrade his MRU with the new
software. The new software is downloaded to the MRU by following the setup procedure
described in appendix A.
67
6.1.2
Maintenance
The lifetime of the internal lithium battery within the MRU should be at least 10 years, unless
the unit has been stored unused for many years. An indication of a discharged battery will be
that the MRU loses its configuration when the unit is unpowered. The MRU has to be
returned to Seatex for changing of the lithium battery. A discharged battery will not have any
influence on the MRU as long as it is connected to an external power source.
6.1.3
Recalibration
For the models MRU 1, H and 4 a recalibration is recommended after four years in operation.
For the MRU 2, 5 and 6 models a recalibration is recommended after two years in operation
and after one year for the MRU D and Z. A recalibration is recommended due to changes in
the characteristics of the internal sensors over time and is therefore necessary in order to
achieve the specified performance. Exactly when a recalibration is required will depend on
the use of the unit and the actual model number. An indication that recalibration is needed is
oscillations in the roll, pitch and yaw measurements that cannot be related to the vehicle
motions. The MRU has to be returned to Seatex for recalibration.
The following procedures can be used to determine whether a recalibration is required:
1) Set up the MRU as described in "Appendix A - Arrival Check and Test of the MRU". The
MRU has to be brought onshore and located on a rigid and stationary table.
2) Output the variables 63, Roll, 64, Pitch and 65, Yaw at an interval of one second (1000
ms). Log data to file with the MRC software for a period of 30 minutes (approximately
2000 samples). Ensure that the MRU has been powered-on for at least 30 minutes before
the logging is started. For MRU 6 and MRU 4 units the parameter Fluxgate usage under
Magnetic conditions in MRC has to be set to Disabled before starting this procedure.
3) Import the logged data file to a spreadsheet and plot the variables on paper. If one of the
roll, pitch or yaw measurements oscillates around its average with a maximum amplitude
of more than 10 times the specified noise level of this model number, it indicates that the
unit will benefit from a recalibration.
To reduce the need for recalibration, try to install the unit in an environment with constant
and low temperatures.
6.2
Repair of the MRU products consists of replacement of damaged cables, replacement of the
MRU, the MRU junction box or other MRU additional equipment.
68
6.2.1
Maintenance
All repairs and modifications of the MRU except for installation of new software versions and
user configuration have to be carried out by Seatex. An opening of the MRU housing will
result in permanent damage and the user should under no circumstances make any attempt to
do so.
CAUTION
An opening of the MRU housing will result in permanent damage and the user should
under no circumstances make any attempt to do so.
6.2.1.1
If a spare unit is rented while your unit is in for repair, use the following procedure to
download your configuration to the spare unit:
1) Connect a PC to the MRU to be repaired as described in "Appendix A - Arrival Check
and Test of the MRU", if your MRU configuration is not already available on your PC or
backup diskette. When contact is established with the MRU by the MRC software, enter
the folder list Parameter Management \ Save to file in Configuration mode and click the
Save to file button. The configuration in the MRU will then be saved on a file on the PC
or diskette. When the configuration file is saved on your hard disk or on a floppy disk,
close down the MRC software. If it is not possible to establish contact with the MRU and
a backup copy of the used MRU configuration is not available, the spare MRU has to be
configured from the start according to the configuration instructions in the Installation
Manual, reference [2], [3], [4], [5] or [6].
2) Disconnect the MRU to be repaired from the configuration cable and connect the spare
unit to this cable.
3) Enter the MRC software and click the Connect button to establish communication with
the spare MRU. When contact is established, enter the folder list Parameter
Management \ Load from file in Configuration mode and click the Load from file
button to read your saved configuration from a file on the PC or floppy disk. Enter the
folder list Parameter Management \ Download to download your configuration to the
spare MRU. Click the Download Parameters to MRU button to start downloading the
configuration into the MRU.
4) Finally, exit the MRC software. Disconnect the spare MRU from the configuration cable
and mount the unit into the mounting bracket. Ensure that the MRU is mounted in the
correct orientation.
69
6.2.2
Maintenance
First check that the fuse within the box is not blown and replace it if it is. Then check if any
of the cable wires have loosened from the terminals. If the LED light diodes indicate that the
junction box is still not working, the box has to be returned to Seatex for repair.
6.3
Troubleshooting
The best tool for troubleshooting of the MRU is utilising the configuration software MRC. If
trouble occurs, always connect a PC to the MRU by the test cable MRU-T-013 and power up
the unit. The equipment needed and how to start the MRC, is described in detail in the
"Appendix A - Arrival Check and Test of the MRU" in this manual.
Listed below are some hints for troubleshooting:
6.3.1
If you have started the MRC software and there is no contact with the MRU:
Check that you have followed the start-up procedure described in the "Appendix A Arrival Check and Test of the MRU", in this manual.
Try to download the MRU software to the unit if the MRU consumes normal power
(approximately 0.25 A). First, ensure that you have the correct MRU software available
on your hard disk or on a floppy disk. Secondly, start up MRC once more by pressing the
Connect button and check that the MRC tries to connect from the communication port on
your PC (COM1 is default). Let the MRC software search through all baud rates. This can
take some minutes. If the MRC enters the monitor during the connection process, MRC
will ask whether you want to download MRU software. Then answer Yes and follow the
instructions on the screen. Third, if no contact at all click the Offline button. Enter the
Status Folder List and click on the Download Program code button in Status mode.
Click the Download new MRU software button in the next window and select the
location of the software to be downloaded (available on the MRU floppy disk label
delivered with the unit). Press Yes on the question "Are you sure about downloading
program file Mru330.0". After the MRU software is downloaded, remember also to
download the calibration parameter file "mruNNNN.par" by clicking the Download
Calibration set button. Finally, enter the folder list Parameter Management \
Download in Configuration mode to download the MRU configuration file
"mruNNNN.cfu".
If there is still no contact with the MRU after downloading the MRU software, the
hardware inside the MRU has most likely been damaged and the unit has to be returned to
Seatex.
70
6.3.2
Maintenance
If the MRC software responds with the MRU status "Abnormal" in red characters in the MRC
Info Bar, no data will be transmitted from the MRU. When this status appears on the screen,
two types of failures may have caused the problem:
Corrupted Calibration and Configuration within the MRU
This can occur when downloading a major software upgrade to the MRU. A window with the
message "Warning: MRU is in 'Abnormal' mode" will then appear on the screen. Reloading of
the user configuration and the calibration file may help. Do the following:
Download the MRU configuration file "mruNNNN.cfu" (or the name on your own
configuration file) by entering the folder list Parameter Management \ Download in
Configuration mode (NNNN is the serial no of the MRU). A default configuration file is
available on the original software diskette supplied with your MRU or on the diskette with
the software upgrade.
Restart the MRU by clicking the Restart MRU button in Status mode. If the unit still
does not function properly, please contact your nearest Seatex office.
The MRU can enter into the "Abnormal" mode if there has been or there is a failure in one of
the boards within the unit. Enter the MRC Status mode to show the status of the MRU. It is
important that you write down or save on file the listed errors under "Raw status" window and
errors listed in the folder MRU Status \ HW error for later troubleshooting. If you have a
hardware failure in your MRU, it can be difficult to establish contact with the MRU through
the MRC and have any status information listed.
You should now try to restart the MRU from the MRC software by clicking the Restart
MRU button in Status mode
If the unit functions properly afterwards, there has been a temporary failure on one of the
boards within the unit. A temporary failure can occur if the unit has been subject to
environmental conditions for which the MRU is not specified. Typically, if the unit was
started when the temperature was below -5C. In this case the unit can be used as normal
after a restart.
If the unit still does not function properly, there is a permanent failure in one of the boards
within the unit. Ship the unit back to Seatex for service.
71
6.3.3
Maintenance
If the MRU reports unreliable output data (big Q) or a not-ready signal is output on the DPsystem, check the following:
The length of the lever arm vector from the MRU to CG configured in the MRU. This arm
should under no circumstances be longer than 150 meters. If a long arm is configured in
the MRU, try to zero it out and check whether this removes the unreliable data status flag.
The MRU status log by clicking the Status button in MRC to see the MRU Status
window. In the folder EventLog, enter the following events to check whether any events
have happened during the observed period with unreliable output data:
-
If any events have occurred in these folders, save this report to file by clicking the Save
status to text file button and send the file to your nearest Seatex office for comments.
6.3.4
Check the actual mounting orientation of your MRU according to the mounting angles set in
the MRU software configuration. Check the parameter Mount Angles by entering the
Configuration Folder List Sensor \ Geometry in the MRC. For help to enter the correct
mounting angles, enter the Mounting Wizard in the MRC software.
6.3.5
The MRU +R arrow is not properly aligned with the vehicle's longitudinal axes. A
misalignment of only one degree to two degrees will reduce the performance when
exposed to heavy motions due to cross-coupled roll and pitch measurements. If not
already done, ensure that the MRU yaw offset according to the vehicle's longitudinal axis
is accurately measured and entered into the MRU configuration.
There have been several years since the MRU was last calibrated. Check the quality of the
calibration with the procedure described in chapter 6.1.3.
Depth errors in the outer beams on a multi-beam echo sounder may occur when:
The oscillations in the depth of the outer beams are correlated with the pitch angle of the
vessel. Check the mounting angle around the Y-axis. The MRU R-axis has to be parallel
72
Maintenance
with the ship's longitudinal axis as long as the sounder transducer is aligned with the ship
axes.
The oscillations in the depth of the outer beams are correlated with the roll angle of the
vessel. Check the lever arm vector (the components along the R, P and Y-axes) from the
MRU to the ship's centre of gravity (CG), and especially the vertical component (Y).
Please note that it is the co-ordinates from the MRU to the CG that should be entered and
that positive vertical direction is downwards. If the location of the CG is below the
location of the MRU, the vertical component (Y) must be positive. Use the 3D "vessel
window" to check that the MRU is on the expected location according to the ship's centre
of gravity.
There is incorrect synchronisation of the MRU and the multi-beam data (timing error).
Check that the measurements from the two sensor data are handled correctly and that a
timing error has not occurred. A 1PPS input to the MRU should be considered used. Postprocessing of the MRU and the multi-beam data can be used to analyse whether incorrect
synchronisation is the reason for the depth errors.
6.3.6
Reduced performance in heave or depth errors in the centre beam of an echo sounder may
occur:
If there are oscillations in the depth of the centre beams. Check that the correct heave
filter mode and heave period is selected in the MRU configuration.
Be aware that the MRU outputs heave measurements in the MRU mounting location and
not in the transducer location, unless the lever arm vector (the components along the R, P,
and Y-axis) from the MRU to the transducer head (MP, measurement point) is entered
into the MRU configuration. Please note that the vertical vector component from the
MRU to the measurement point is defined positive down. If the location of the transducer
head is below the location of the MRU, the vertical component will be positive and vice
versa. Use the 3D "vessel window" to check that the MRU is on the expected location
according to the enter measurement point (MP).
If the analog output channel is used to output heave from the MRU. Please be aware that
positive heave is defined as down in the MRU. If positive heave is preferred upwards,
change the sign of the gain for the analog channel.
73
Maintenance
Blank page
74
7.
Drawings
DRAWINGS
For outline drawings of the mechanical dimensions of the MRU or its additional equipment,
see the Installation Manuals, reference [2], [3], [4], [5] and [6].
75
Drawings
Blank page
76
8.
Parts list
PARTS LIST
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
The MRU sensor.
Three-metre test cable for PC connection.
Installation Manual for the specific MRU model.
User Manual.
Delivery specific documents for the delivered MRU.
A diskette with the MRU and MRC software.
Transportation box.
MRU-M-SB6
MRU-M-SB7
MRU-E-PT8
MRU-E-JB1
MRU-E-JB1P
MRU-E-JB2
MRU-E-JBRS
MRU-E-SBRS
MRU-E-HYD
MRU-E-POS
MRU-SW-SF
MRU-E-CS1
MRU-E-CS2
MRU-E-CS4
Description
Wall mounting bracket with indexing for easy mounting.
Vibration damper extension to the MRU-M-MB1.
Hydrographic mounting bracket for easy alignment of MRU.
Laser pointer for use together with MRU-M-MB3.
Subsea bottle with two 8-pin Sea Con connectors depth rated to
4000 metres. The bottle is made in titanium.
Subsea bottle with two 8-pin Sea Con connectors depth rated to
1000 metres. The bottle is made of black anodised aluminium.
Subsea bottle with one 8-pin Sea Con connector depth rated to 10
metres. The bottle is made of black anodised aluminium.
Pigtail for 8-pin Sea Con connector.
MRU junction box for flexible connection of MRU to user
equipment.
MRU junction box with power supply for flexible connection of
MRU to user equipment.
Junction box for use in the Hydrographic Package with 10 meter
MRU-E-HY1 cable with connector to the MRU.
Additional board for the MRU Junction Box which includes RS232/-422 converting and galvanic isolation of input/output lines
to/from MRU.
Additional board for the Subsea bottles which includes RS-232/422 converting and galvanic isolation of input/output lines
to/from MRU.
Hydrographic package.
Hydro acoustic positioning package.
ANSI C source code drivers for the RS-232 interface.
Heavy duty screened cable with 14 twisted pairs.
Heavy duty screened cable with 4 twisted pairs.
Umbilical cable for the two 9-pin subsea bottles.
77
Part no.
MRU-T-021
MRU-T-022
Parts list
Description
Test and configuration cable for subsea bottles MRU-M-SB5, 6
and 7.
Configuration cable for use between a PC serial port and the
MRU service port connector in MRU-E-JB1/2/P
78
9.
We recommend that a simple test of the MRU is performed when receiving the unit. The test
procedure described below can also be used as a satisfactory test of the delivered MRU
products and as a setup for troubleshooting of the unit. The test is carried out by connecting
the MRU to a PC by the test cable supplied by Seatex.
Equipment Needed for the Test
a)
b)
c)
A PC that runs under Microsoft Windows 95, 98, Me, 2000 or NT 4.0, keyboard, mouse
and a VGA screen. The PC must have at least one free COM port (COM1 or COM2).
d)
MRU
DC power supply
Startup Procedure
a)
Place the MRU on a stable table with the connector end of the housing pointing up.
b)
Connect the MRU to the PC by the test cable MRU-T-13, and to a power supply of 24
V 1 A DC (Note: The red banana connector is positive). Make sure that it is a 1 A fast
fuse on one of the power leads to the MRU. The COM1 port is the default port when the
test cable is connected to a PC.
d) Install the configuration software, MRC, on the PC fixed disk as follows: first insert Win
MRC CD-ROM into the CD or DVD drive on the local PC. Second, from the Start menu
select Settings. Then select Control Panel and Install program. Follow the instructions
on the screen in order to complete the installation of the "Mrcsetup.exe" program.
79
e) In the Select Components window shown in Figure 27, select the Standard mode. The
other selection, Hydrographic mode, is for those who want to select the digital interface
from the predefined list of echo sounders.
When the installation of files is finished, the window shown in Figure 28 appears. Choose
to restart the computer now or later. Click Finish and the setup is complete. Remove the
CD.
80
d)
Approximately 10 seconds after connecting the MRU to the power supply, the user can
start the MRC software from Microsoft Windows by double-clicking on the MRC icon.
Click the Connect button to establish communication with the MRU. When
communication is enabled the user is free to configure the MRU.
When the Connection Status field shows failed connection, check the following:
COM port connection and that the baud rate is selected correctly.
Power supply and voltage supplied to the MRU.
Cabling between the MRU and the PC.
The 10-second wait: wait at least 10 seconds after supplying the MRU with voltage before
starting the MRC from Windows. The MRU does not respond to requests on the serial
line due to internal self check during the first 10 seconds.
Click the Retry connection button to re-establish connection with the MRU
The MRU Test
a)
When the MRC software is started and the connection with the MRU is established,
select the MRC mode Configuration to enter the MRU configuration folder list.
81
b)
Modify the mounting angles of the MRU models 6, 5, 4, H and 3 by entering the
Configuration Folder List Sensor \ Geometry. Input the mounting angles 180.0, 0.0 and
0.0 in roll, pitch and yaw field. (The default mounting of the MRU is with the MRU
connector pointing right down 0.0, 0.0, 0.0). For the MRU model 2 and 1, the units
have to be mounted with the cable pointing down and the mounting angles should
always be 0.0, 0.0 and 0.0 in the roll, pitch and yaw field when performing this test.
c)
The digital channels have to be used to get output data from the MRU on the screen
with the MRC software. Enter the folder Data Interface / Digital and set the Protocol
to MRU normal, Digital channels to 4 and Interval to 100 ms. In the Source ID field
select variable no. 63 for roll measurement on the first channel, 64 for pitch on the
second, 65 for yaw on the third and 105 for heave (PosMonD) measurement on the
fourth.
d)
In the Parameter Management folder select Download and click the Download
Parameter to MRU button in order to download the edited configuration to the MRU.
e)
Select the MRC mode Data Presentation and click the Run button to display the MRU
data graphically on the screen. Check that roll, pitch, yaw and heave measurements
have stabilised within 20 minutes from startup of the MRU. Check the outputs of roll,
pitch, yaw and heave changes by moving the unit gently.
CAUTION
Avoid bumping into things and turning the MRU fast. This may result in short term
sensor overload, degraded performance or automatic restart of the MRU.
f)
If the MRU is functioning according to the description above, the unit is found
acceptable.
82
10.
These are messages transmitted from the MRU without being asked for. The user
configuration parameter Verbose mask controls which messages that are transmitted and the
following settings are available:
0:
1:
2:
3:
This message is transmitted after every MRU status change if enabled through Verbose mask
in the MRU configuration.
<'c'><6><9><0><s_0><s_1><s_2><s_3><chk>
s_0,1,2,3
Event Message
This message is transmitted at every MRU event (i.e. change of normal operation in MRU, if
enabled through Verbose mask in the MRU configuration).
<'c'><10><9><event><t_0><t_1><t_2><t_3><c_0><c_1><0><0><chk>
event
t_0,1,2,3
32 bit date of event occurrence, number of sec. since 1 Jan 1970 00:00:00
c_0,1
83
Welcome Message
MRU VV.RR is a 10 byte string with software version and revision level
type
vers
hardware version
'0', '1', '2', 'd' and 'e' hardware version identification
v_0,1
16 bit software number multiplied with 100 (version 3.20 will then be 320)
s_0,1
mode
MRU modus
1: Normal
2: Abnormal
opt
N/A
This message is sent every 2 seconds if the MRU is in "Abnormal" mode i.e. some error has
occurred. If the user configuration in the MRU is OK, the message is transmitted at user
specified baud rate & settings. Otherwise the default setting of 4800,N,8,1 is used.
<'c'><6><9><1><h_0><h_1><h_2><h_3><chk>
h_0,1,2,3
Bits".
84
11.
bit 8..15
bit 8 Kalman initialise
bit 9 Sensor over range
bit 10 Data unreliable
bit 11 Sensor clipping
system status:
bit 16..31
bit 16 Break detected
bit 17 Overload, too many parameters out selected
bit 18 Configuration changed, need restart to take effect
bit 19 Magnetic erection off
bit 20 Gravity erection off
bit 21 External velocity
bit 22 External speed
bit 23 External yaw
bit 24 External magnetic
bit 25 External position ref.
bit 26 Emulating
bit 27 Bad Environment
bit 28 Time Sync
bit 29 Transmit buffer overflow
85
Blank page
86
12.
87
Blank page
88
13.
332 error
Board config error
SW descriptor error
HW descriptor error
Board error
SW level error
89
Blank page
90
Index
Index
Heading Frame 39
heave 65, 73
horizontal plane 53
Hydrographic mode 80
A
Abnormal 71
Acceleration Processing 55
accelerometers 44
alignment 50
angular rate sensors 43
Automatic 65
I
Installation 27
junction box 70
battery 68
Body frame 38
Kalman filter 48
limited 23
linear motion computation 54, 56
lithium 68
Lithium battery 63
damage 8, 69
Datawell 53
depth errors 72
downloading 71
drawings 75
M
magnetometer 45
maintenance 67
mechanical shock 7
misalignment 72
modifications 69
MRC 81
MRU 1 22
MRU 2 19
MRU 4 12
MRU 5 10
MRU 6 8, 41
MRU D 20
MRU H 15
MRU Z 17
E
Earth rate compensation 50
Event message 83
F
fluxgate 45
Frames 36
Geographic frame 37
no contact 70
North seeking 35
not ready 72
H
hazards 7
heading 51
91
Index
sensor 43
Sensor frame 39
software upgrades 67
spare unit 69
speed 51
Standard mode 80
start procedures 65
synchronisation 73
O
offset angles 49
operation 65
orientation estimator 50
over-voltage 8
performance monitoring 66
periodic maintenance 67
Pitch 52
polarity 8
polled output 61
Power 24
power connection 8
test 79
time delay 60
transportation 7
Trimming 49
trouble shooting 70
tune 65
quaternions 53
unreliable 72
upgrades 67
recalibration 68
reduced 72, 73
Repair 68
roll 72
Roll 52
rotation matrix 52
warranty 7, 8, 67
Y
Yaw 52
S
satisfactory test 79
92
Reader's comments
Reader's comments
Please help us to improve the quality of our documentation by returning your comments on
this manual.
Reader's comments
Name:
..
Title/function: ..
Company:
.
Address:
.
.
.
Telephone: .
Facsimile:
.
E-mail:
.
Date:
.
Manual reference:
Revision:
.
.
User Manual
User Manual
for
Veripos, Single and Multi GNSS
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-610011-01MU
Unrestricted
User Manual
CHANGE HISTORY
Rev.
Author
Date
First issue
AOA
AOA
26.August 2008
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-610011-01MU
Unrestricted
A2
A1
A
02
01
13.05.2008
18.07.2007
22.05.2007
27.03.2007
26.01.2007
RL
RL
RL
RL
RL
DR
KG
KG
KG/DR
REVISION
DATE
DESCRIPTION
ORIGINATOR
CHECKED
DR
DR
APPROVED
Manual Title:
AB-V-MA-00505
File Ref:
AB-V-MA-00505
CLIENT APPR
Manual Title:
Manual No:
CONTENTS
REFRENCE DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 5
2.
ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................................................... 7
3.
LD2 SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................................................. 8
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.
MECHANICAL ...................................................................................................................................... 8
ELECTRICAL ..................................................................................................................................... 10
DEMODULATOR................................................................................................................................ 10
HF/MF DEMODULATOR.................................................................................................................... 10
DATA INTERFACES .......................................................................................................................... 10
ANTENNA........................................................................................................................................... 10
PC/104 BOARD.................................................................................................................................. 11
GNSS RECEIVER .............................................................................................................................. 11
4.
INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................ 15
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CONFIGURATION MODE............................................................................................................................ 27
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
10.
11.
SYSTEM TESTS........................................................................................................................................... 63
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 2
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
12.
SYSTEM INFORMATION............................................................................................................................. 64
12.1. PC/104 S/W........................................................................................................................................ 64
12.2. INSTALLED H/W ................................................................................................................................ 65
12.3. HOST IP ADDRESS........................................................................................................................... 65
13.
ACCESS CODE............................................................................................................................................ 66
14.
15.
VERIFY DP ................................................................................................................................................... 71
15.1.
15.2.
15.3.
15.4.
15.5.
15.6.
16.
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 71
MONITOR........................................................................................................................................... 71
VERIFY-DP OPERATION .................................................................................................................. 71
SCREEN LAYOUT ............................................................................................................................. 72
DISPLAY VIEWS................................................................................................................................ 72
MAIN MENU ....................................................................................................................................... 90
2.
USING 'L' BAND TAP FROM INMARSAT FOR DGPS CORRECTIONS .................................................. 135
Rev No:
Date:
GGA.................................................................................................................................................. 137
GGX.................................................................................................................................................. 137
GLL ................................................................................................................................................... 138
VTG .................................................................................................................................................. 139
GSA .................................................................................................................................................. 139
GSV .................................................................................................................................................. 140
RMC.................................................................................................................................................. 140
ZDA................................................................................................................................................... 141
GST .................................................................................................................................................. 141
A2
13/05/2008
Page 3
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
REFRENCE DOCUMENTS
Rev No:
Date:
AB-V-MA-00503:
FO-GL-GPS-004:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 4
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
1. INTRODUCTION
Veripos specialise in providing robust data broadcast services for precise positioning
applications for the offshore industry. For optimum performance it is essential that the
receiving and processing hardware is of an equally high standard.
To ensure this, Veripos offers a range of hardware designed and manufactured to the
highest specifications, and with relevant certifications.
The LD2 integrated mobile unit is designed to achieve our product philosophy, which is
standardised, upgradeable hardware with maximum flexibility whilst simple to operate and
maintain.
The LD2 is available in a number of configurations from basic satellite receiver to a fully
integrated mobile positioning unit with demodulator and multi-frequency GNSS receiver.
Completely modular, the unit can be upgraded to different configurations as required.
Functionally, the LD2 can be used in a virtual black box mode to generate any Veripos
proprietary position solution, depending upon which data subscriptions are enabled.
Additionally it can be used as a sensor that outputs received
data
and
GNSS
A2
13/05/2008
Page 5
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
whilst for low-power operation a suitable stabilized dish antenna, such as that used on
vessels for communicating via Inmarsat is needed. A special interfacing kit can be supplied
in this case.
Advanced yet robust, easy to install and operate, the Veripos LD2 is an outstandingly
effective and flexible unit that ensures reliable reception of Veripos services, as well as
producing superior positioning from metre to decimetre level accuracy.
This manual contains the information required to Operate the Veripos LD 2 Unit For any
other information on related products can be found in the: LD 2 Installation Manual (AB-VMA-00503), and Veripos Verify QC (AB-V-MA-00500).
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 6
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
2. ABBREVIATIONS
BER
CoG
CR
DGPS
DOP
DP
GDOP
GLONASS
GPS
GNSS
HDOP
HF
KPH
LAN
LF
LNA
L-Band
LCD
LD2
MF
MPH
NMEA
m/s
PDOP
PPP
PPS
PRN
RMS
RTCM
SD
SNF
SNR
Spotbeam
Standard
Standard+
SV
Ultra
USB
UTC
VDOP
VGA
VOSS
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 7
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
3.
LD2 SPECIFICATIONS
3.1.
MECHANICAL
Rev No:
Date:
Receiver Size:
Weight:
5 kg / 11lb.
Display:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 8
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 9
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
3.2.
ELECTRICAL
Input Voltage:
85 to 264VAC.
Power Consumption:
20W.
Fuse:
3.3.
DEMODULATOR
1525 to 1559 MHz input from L-Band Antenna or tapped.
L-Band output from Inmarsat B terminals.
Acquisition time from switch on typically <20 seconds.
Re-acquisition time typically <10 seconds.
3.4.
HF/MF DEMODULATOR
2 channel HF/MF demodulator in the Frequency. Band 1.6 to 3.5 MHz.
RTCM Output.
Compatible with Veripos Standard HF and third party HF/MF transmissions.
3.5.
DATA INTERFACES
5 x RS232 Ports:
ANTENNA
The GPS antenna is a right-hand circular polarised L band frequency range with an integral
low-noise amplifier. The internal thread is 5/8 x 11 UNC (standard marine mount).
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 10
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
3.7.
PC/104 BOARD
300 MHz Geode processor.
256 Mb SDRAM.
64Mb or 1Gb Compact Flash Card depending on program being supported.
3.8.
GNSS RECEIVER
The following optional OEM GNSS cards can be installed in the LD2:
3.8.1.
Magellan* G12
12 channel L1 C/A code and carrier.
Strobe correlator multipath mitigation.
Standard NMEA-0183 V2.01 output.
Differential remote RTCM V2.2.
Raw data output.
1PPS (5V TTL).
Position and raw data update rates selectable up to 10Hz
2 x bi-directional RS-232 serial ports up to 115200 bps.
Operating temp: -30C to +60C.
Power Consumption: 2.2W.
3.8.2.
Magellan* DG14
12 channel L1 C/A code and carrier.
2 SBAS channels (WAAS/EGNOS/MSAS).
Edge and Strobe correlator multipath mitigation.
Standard NMEA-0183 V3.0 output.
Differential base and remote RTCM V2.2.
Raw data output (code and carrier).
1PPS (5V TTL).
Position and raw data update rates selectable up to 20Hz.
Kalman Filter.
2 x bi-directional RS-232 serial ports up to 115200 bps
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 11
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
3.8.3.
3.8.4.
Magellan* GG24
24 channel GPS and GLONASS.
12 channel L1 GPS code and carrier.
12 channel L1 GLONASS code and carrier.
Strobe correlator multipath mitigation.
Raw data output (code and carrier).
1PPS (5V TTL).
Standard NMEA-0183 V2.01 output.
Differential remote RTCM V2.2.
Position and raw data update rates selectable up to 2Hz.
2 x bi-directional RS-232 serial ports up to 115200 bps.
Operating temp: -30C to +70C.
Power Consumption: 2.3W.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 12
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
3.8.5.
Development work is in progress to integrate the following receivers into the LD2 for
future options:
Novatel OEMIV
Novatel OEMV
Trimble MS
Sepentrio
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 13
AB-V-MA-00505
110/240V
AC
HF Receiver
Board
+12V
Port A
Port B
GPS Card
+5.0V
Battery
Backup
GPS I/O
1 PPS
Chan 2
+5.0V
COM3
PC/104
Processor Card
LAN
COM4
RTCM/NMEA
(TTL)
+5.0V
USB
Status LEDS
Battery
Backup
P3
REM I/O
+5.5V
P5
OEM I/O
NMEA
1 PPS
NMEA Out
P1
GPS I/O
RTCM
RTCM
Ext.
RTCM In
SIG.
STR(D)
MK4 Demodulator/
Decoder Board
P2
Primary
RTCM Out
Chan 1
+12V
+5.5V
P4
Secondary
RTCM Out
RS422 - USB
Interface
Board
PSU
SIG STR(A)
SIG.
STR
MSG/TEST
Out
Page 14
AB-V-MA-00505
A2
13/05/2008
Rev No:
Date:
Configuration/
Status
Manual Title:
Manual No:
4.
INSTALLATION
For Guidance on the installation of an LD2 please refer to the LD2 Installation Manual
AB-V-MA-00503.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 15
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
5.
The front panel of the LD2 contains back lit LCD display, 3 x user keys, 2 x PS/2 ports, 1 x
contrast adjustment key, 6x status LEDs and 1 x power LED.
5.1.
LCD DISPLAY
PS/2 PORTS
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 16
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
5.3.
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
A small flat headed screwdriver can be used to adjust the screen contrast as desired. Turn
clockwise to increase.
5.4.
USER KEYS
Page Key:
Advances the display through the options in a Menu level. After the last
Menu option in the current Menu level the display moves back to the entry
point of that menu.
Enter Key:
Displays the selected menu option, accepts a data entry and advances the
display to the next data entry field.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 17
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
5.5.
STATUS LEDS
Sync LED:
ID LED:
Message LED:
IF Lock LED:
HF Lock LED:
GPS LED:
DGPS LED:
Can be intentionally
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 18
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
6.
The rear panel of the LD2 contains 1 x TNC GNSS antenna connector, 1 x TNC IF/HF
antenna connector, 1 x speaker port, 1 x N-Type L-Band antenna connector, 1 x antenna
voltage locking toggle switch, 1 x Port 3 toggle switch, 1 x grounding pin, 1 x SMA signal
strength connector, 1 x USB port, 1 x RJ45 LAN port, 5 x RS232 data ports, 1 x VGA
display port and 1 x IEC power socket with on/off switch.
6.1.
6.2.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 19
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
If the LD2 is configured for an HF/MF system, connect the HF/MF antenna here. HF/MF
systems require the HF/MF antenna and LD2 chassis to be earthed in order to maximize
HF/MF signal reception.
6.3.
Only used in Verify DP applications where an external speaker is required for the alarm.
6.4.
Connect either an L-Band omni directional Spotbeam antenna (see 6.2) or the line feed
from an Inmarsat system coupler, such as a Narda, Rojone or Radiall (see 6.4). Some
Inmarsat Systems such as the Nera F77 have a dedicated output that doesnt require the
installation of a coupler.
In some cases, the LNA feed should be switched off to prevent damage to vessel Inmarsat
system.
All coaxial cables should be 50 impedance.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 20
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
6.5.
Used to disable the 5VDC antenna LNA feed when connecting the LD2 to certain types of
Inmarsat systems to prevent damage. If the LD2 does not have this switch a DC block
should be used. When using an omni-directional Spotbeam antenna the voltage should be
enabled.
6.6.
PORT 3 IO SWITCH
When the switch is in the GPS position, raw GPS data is output from the GPS card on Port
3 When the switch is in the REM I/O position, the unit can be setup using the front panel to
accept external RTCM messages, Gyro data, output NMEA type messages and allows for
the upload of firmware upgrades to L-band demodulator card. See 9.3.3 for details on how
to set Port 3 up from the front panel.
6.7.
Rev No:
Date:
CHASSIS GROUND
A2
13/05/2008
Page 21
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
The chassis of the LD2 should be connected to ground, usually the vessels superstructure.
This is especially important when using HF systems, where both the HF antenna and LD2
chassis should be grounded.
6.8.
Used to provide a feedback line to a tracking dish type antenna such as a Minidome.
Vessel Inmarsat systems dont usually require signal strength feedback.
6.9.
USB CONNECTOR
The USB connector can be used to input external data from a Gyro or from an external
source of RTCM. (A USB to Serial Converter will be required).
6.10.
Used to network the LD2, so that data can be broadcast over TCP/IP sockets.
The LAN connection can be used to feed External RTCM messages between two
LD2 systems for use with Verify DP 2.05, (A Crossed network cable will be
required).
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 22
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
6.11.
PORT 1 D9 FEMALE
See 9.3.1 for details on data types output on Port 1 and its configuration.
PORT 2 D9 FEMALE
See 9.3.2 for details on data types output on Port 2 and its configuration.
PORT 3 D9 FEMALE
See 9.3.3 for details on data types output on Port 3 and its configuration.
PORT 4 D9 FEMALE
See 9.3.4 for details on data types output on Port 4 and its configuration.
PORT 5 D9 FEMALE
See 9.3.5 for details on data types output on Port 5 and its configuration.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 23
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
6.12.
The LD2 uses a standard IEC male connector for power interfacing. The power interface
has a built in fuse holder and power switch. Replace fuse with a 250V 1A Anti Surge
20mm.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 24
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
7.
INITIAL START UP
To power up the LD2 Receiver, toggle the On/Off switch (next to the power cable on the
rear panel) to ON position. The red DC Supply LED on the front panel and the LCD display
will both illuminate.
For the first few seconds after power up the LCD display will display the following (this can
take up to 30 seconds).
Loading..
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 25
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
8.
Press the *Page* key to step through the Main Menu to the required section. Press the
*Enter* key to enter into the next menu level.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 26
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.
CONFIGURATION MODE
The configuration menu allows the uses to setup the different components of the LD2:
Demodulator, GNSS Receiver, Serial Ports and HF/MF Receiver. The Menu structure can
be seen Appendix I (2)
To access the Configuration Menu, press the *Page* key until Configuration is shown in the
Main menu, then press the *Enter* key.
9.1.
DEMODULATOR MENU
From the Main Menu, Configuration Screen, access the Demodulator function by pressing
the *Enter* key. The following screen is shown:
This provides access to three sub menus See: Appendix I (2.1) which will allow selection
of the Satellite beam (channel) that is used to receive the Veripos corrections. User defined
allows a channel frequency to be entered manually.
Satellite
Low Power
AOR (E)
AOR (W)
POR
High Power
25East
109East
98West
IOR
Frequency (MHz)
1535.1050
1535.1150
1535.1050
1200
1200
1200
1535.1650
1535.1750
1535.1750
1535.0700
1200
1200
1200
1200
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 27
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.1.1.
Channel Select
When changing location or in areas where satellite footprints overlap, it maybe necessary
for the user to change to a different satellite Channel. A total of sixteen channels have been
allocated of which seven satellite channels have been pre-stored (see Table 1 for listing).
This allows the user to select an appropriate channel for a region (see Inmarsat coverage
chart Error! Reference source not found.).
The following is an illustration of how to change beam:
Begin at the main menu using the *Page* key toggle through the Main Menu till
configuration screen is displayed:
Press *Enter* key to access the next menu level this will display the below screen:
Press *Enter* key to access the next menu level this will display the below screen
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 28
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Now Press the *Toggle* key to step through the available downlink beams.
Till the
desired beam is displayed, press *Enter*. This will move the cursor to the right hand side
of the screen and the letter N will be displayed:
Press the *Toggle* key this will change the character from an N to a Y, followed by *Enter*
to confirm the change. This will change which beam corrections are being received from.
The screen will now display:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 29
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.1.2.
Channel 16 Editing
In the unlikely event of a satellite fault, you are able to enter a temporary new beam by
overwriting the satellite parameters in Channel 16. Note that the Channel 16 Edit facility is
to provide for manual entry of a new satellite channel.
Begin at the main menu using the *Page* key toggle through the Main Menu till
configuration screen is displayed:
Press *Enter* key to access the next menu level this will display the below screen:
Press *Enter* key to access the next menu level this will display the below screen
Press *Page* key to move to the channel 16 Edit menu shown below:
Press the *Enter* key to access the first screen in this sub menu which is the Channel 16
Edit screen shown below:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 30
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Press the *Enter* key again and the first letter of the name is highlighted. Use the *Toggle*
key to step through the letters of the alphabet. When the correct character is display, press
the *Enter* key which steps on to the next letter. The maximum six number of characters
long.
After the sixth letter, or blank, has been set, press the *Enter* key the display moves on to
the Frequency selection display shown below:
Press the *Enter* key again and the first number of the frequency is highlighted.
Using the *Toggle* and *Enter* keys as before to set the required frequency.
After the last number, has been set, when you press the *Enter* key the display moves on
to the Data Rate display shown below:
Press the *Enter* key again and the data rate 1200 is highlighted.
Use the *Toggle* key to step through the options which are 600, 1200, 2400, and 4800.
To set the BPS Rate press the *Enter* key. Using the *Page* key to return to the start of
the menu.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 31
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.1.3.
Station ID List
See Appendix II for the Veripos satellite reference station listing.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 32
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.
This provides access to the five sub menus which allow you to set parameters and options
for the GPS Receiver. Press the *Enter* key to select the first sub menu.
9.2.1.
Position Mode
Note: at present these settings are not implemented in the LD2 and do no affect to the GNSS
system.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 33
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.2.
Dynamic Mode
Note: at present these settings are not implemented in the LD2 and do no affect to the GNSS
system.
9.2.3.
Mask Settings
This allows the user to set the GPS Receiver parameters for:
PDOP
HDOP
VDOP
Position Elevation Mask (PEM)
Raw Elevation Mask (REM)
Minimum SVs
Default settings are PDOP:40, HDOP:4, VDOP:4, PEM:5, REM:0, Min SVs:1.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 34
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.4.
Diff control
This function allows the user to communicate with the GPS Receiver and set the Diff Mode,
Station ID, Correction Age Limit and from where the RTCM data is coming from.
The first screen of this sub-menu is as follows:
Press the *Enter* key to access the first screen in the sub-menu which is shown below:
The cursor > shows the current selection.*Toggle* displays the other settings available and
*Enter* selects. If Auto Diff is selected the receiver will output an autonomous position if no
differential corrections are received.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 35
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.5.
Port A Settings
This function allows the user to set up the NMEA outputs from the LD2 which are output on
serial port 1 and serial port 2
The first screen of this sub-menu is as follows:
Press the *Enter* key to access the first screen in the sub-menu which is shown below:
Use the *Toggle* key to move through the list of available NMEA strings that can be output
by the LD2 see Table 2 and Appendix IV for details on the available strings . Press the
*Enter* key when the string to be output is displayed this will move the cursor to the right of
the screen the figure displayed is the output rate that the string will be output at press the
*Toggle* key till the correct output rate is displayed and press the *Enter* Key. It is
possible to output multiple strings on one serial port to a device, after selecting the output
rate for the first string this will return the user to the list of out put strings where additional
strings can be chosen. After selecting the strings to be output by the system press the
*Page* to move to the next menu.
(Note, only 1 second intervals can be used when outputting NMEA messages).
The screen above allows the user to output Ashtech type position strings from Port 1 and
Port 2 of the LD2.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 36
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.6.
Port B Settings
This function allows the user to set up the NMEA outputs from the LD2 which are output on
Port 3
The first screen of this sub-menu is as follows:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 37
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Positioning messages
Message type
Description
GGA
GGX
GLL
VTG
GSA
GSV
RMC
ZDA
GRS
GST
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 38
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.7.
Factory Defaults
This function allows the user to communicate with the GPS Receiver to reset the unit to
factory defaults but does not reset the onboard memory.
The first screen of this sub-menu is as follows:
Press the *Enter* key to access the first screen in the sub-menu which is shown below:
9.2.8.
Data Memory
This function allows the user to communicate with the GPS Receiver to reset the GPS
Receiver to factory defaults and also reset the onboard memory.
The first screen of this sub-menu is as follows:
Press the *Enter* key to access the first screen in the sub-menu which is shown below:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 39
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.9.
Settings
This function allows the user to save the settings of the GPS Receiver in battery backup
memory.
The first screen of this sub-menu is as follows:
Press the *Enter* key to access the first screen in the sub-menu which is shown below:
9.3.
This provides access to the five sub menus which allow the user to set the parameters and
options for the five Serial Ports.
Press the *Enter* key to select the first page which is Serial Port P1.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 40
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.3.1.
Port P1 Set Up
Port P1 is used to output NMEA data. The display is as shown below:
GPS RX is the default value for this Port the user can use the *Toggle* key to switch
between GPS RX and LOCAL (PC104) this allows the user to output a NMEA message
that are either generated from the GNSS receiver or from the onboard algorithms in the
LD2.
Select the source of the output required then press the *Enter* key.
Press the *Page* key to step onto Port P2 Set Up
9.3.2.
Port P2 Set Up
Port 2. Can be used to output RTCM messages directly from port 2, or to relay RTCM
messages internally to the onboard algorithm, for use with Verify DP, LD2 internal solutions
and or output NMEA messages. The default setting for this port is to output all the RTCM
messages for the currently selected beam. From this display the user can select the output
type, set the Baud Rate and Select/Deselect the Stations output through the port. The
display is as shown below:
Output type
When the above screen is displayed use the *Toggle* key to switch between the following
options:
RTCM (p) DLINK: This allows the user to setup which stations are to be output on
the port and or to the internal algorithms
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 41
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
NMEA OUT Local: This allows the RTCM messages to be used internally and for
the NMEA string being output on Port 1 to be output on Port 2.
(Note, setup up the required stations on serial port 2, then switch the port to NMEA out,
when the Port is in NMEA out mode, stations cannot be selected.
Baud Rate
From the menu the user can select the Baud Rate that is needed. Use the *Toggle* key to
step through the options which are:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200 and 38,400.
Press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection.
String Format
Pressing the *Enter* key after selecting the Baud rate moves the curser to STN where the
user can select to finish the RTCM output string with a LF or CR, to do this press the
*Enter* key then using the *Toggle* to toggle between the two options, when the option to
be changed is displayed press the *Enter* key then use the *Toggle* key to change from N
(not selected) to Y (selected). Press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection.
Reference Stations
The user can now select/deselect the reference stations from where RTCM data that is
available. The default setup for Port 2 is to output all RTCM messages from the Satellite
and HF sources either externally or internally.. Using the *Toggle* key to step through the
stations that are available from the station listing.
The stations have the suffix 'N' or Y after the Station Number. The character N indicates
that data for that station is being received by the unit but that it has not been selected for
output on Port 2. To output the data on Port 2 press the *Enter* key when that appropriate
station is shown and then using the *Toggle* key to change from N (not selected) to Y
(selected). Press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 42
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.3.3.
Port P3 Set Up
Can be used for multiple input and outputs within the LD2:
To output raw GPS data on port 3 the Port 3 switch on the back of the LD2 must be in
the GPS position. The P3 settings on the front panel should be set to GPS when the
screen above is displayed us the *Toggle* key till GPS is displayed and press the
*Enter* key.
NMEA type messages can be output from port 3, the Port 3 switch on the rear of the
LD2 must be in the REM I/O position. The P3 settings on the front panel should be set
to SKT when the screen above is displayed us the *Toggle* key till SKT is displayed
and press the *Enter* key. To select the NMEA strings to be output, see the GPS Port
B setup 9.2.6.
External RTCM messages can be input from an external device into Port 3 for use
within the Internal algorithms the Port 3 switch on the rear of the LD2 must be in the
REM I/O position. The P3 settings on the front panel should be set to SKT when the
screen above is displayed us the *Toggle* key till SKT is displayed and press the
*Enter* key. Select the appropriate Baud rate by pressing the *Toggle* till the required
Baud rate is displayed press the *Enter* key, the cursor moves to the right hand side of
the screen press the *Toggle* key untill RTCM is displayed then press the *Enter* key
to confirm the selection. It is possible to output NMEA messages at the same time as
inputting external RTCM when using a Y-cable to split the outgoing data and incoming
data see the LD2 installation manual.
Gyro messages can be input from an external device into Port 3 for use within the
Verify DP2.0.5 for use with the Target monitoring screen. The Port 3 switch on the rear
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 43
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
of the LD2 must be in the REM I/O position. The P3 settings on the front panel should
be set to SKT when the screen above is displayed us the *Toggle* key untill SKT is
displayed and press the *Enter* key. Select the appropriate Baud rate by pressing the
*Toggle* to the required Baud rate then press the *Enter* key, the cursor moves to the
right hand side of the screen press the *Toggle* key untill GYRO is displayed then
press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection. It is possible to output NMEA messages
at the same time as inputting external GYRO when using a Y-cable to split the outgoing
data and incoming data see the LD2 installation manual
Using Port3 it is possible to upload new firmware to the L-Band demodulator card. To
do this the user must switch the Port 3 switch on the back of the LD2 to the REM I/O
position and upload the firmware upgrade using the Veripos Teripos software
Data output types
9.3.4.
Port P4 Set Up
Port P4 can be used to output the Secondary RTCM data from the L-band and HF/MF card.
From this display the user can select the output type, set the Baud Rate and
Select/Deselect the Stations to output through the port. The display is as shown below:
Message output
Using the *Toggle* the message format that is output on port 4 can be altered.
RTCM outputs RTCM message format from the stations on the downlink.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 44
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
OFF
Baud Rate
From the menu the user can select the Baud Rate that is needed. Use the *Toggle* key to
step through the options which are:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200 and 38,400.
Use press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection.
String Format
Pressing the *Enter* key after selecting the Baud rate moves the curser to STN where the
user can select to finish the RTCM output string with a LF or CR, to do this press the
*Enter* key then using the *Toggle* to toggle between the two options, when the option to
be changed is displayed press the *Enter* key then use the *Toggle* key to change from N
(not selected) to Y (selected). Press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection.
Reference Stations
The user can now select/deselect the reference stations from where RTCM data is
available. Using the *Toggle* key to step through the stations that are available from the
station listing.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 45
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
It can be seen that the stations have the suffix 'N' or Y after the Station Number. The
character N indicates that data for that station is being received by the unit but that it has
not been selected for output on Port 4. To output the data on Port 4 press the *Enter* key
when that appropriate station is shown and then using the *Toggle* key to change from N
(not selected) to Y (selected). Press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 46
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.3.5.
Port P5 Set Up
Port P5 is used for a direct external connection to the I/O port of the GPS Receiver Board.
The display is as shown below:
Press the *Toggle* key to switch between REMOTE and OFF, then press the *Enter* key
to select it.
Note that if REMOTE is selected for direct connection to the GPS Receiver via Port P5, the
option to configure the GPS Receiver via the Remote I/O Port P3 is disabled.
Port P5 must be set to OFF to allow configuration of the GPS Receiver via the Remote I/O
Port P3.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 47
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.3.6.
Type
Data on Pins
Port 1
RS - 232
1
2
3
5
Port 2
RS - 232
2
5
port 3
RS - 232
2
3
5
Port 4
RS - 232
2
8
5
RTCM Out
Message/Test Out
Signal Ground
Port 5
RS - 232
2 GPS out
3 GPS In
5 Signal Ground
USB
RS - 232
Ext Gyro In
LAN
NOTE:
The MF RTCM Data is only available on the LAN, this is on socket 5994. The IP of
the LD2 unit will have to be configured to be on the same domain as the computer it
is to be connected to.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 48
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.4.
The HF/MF or Beacon configuration is accessed form the Configuration menu in the main
menu. See Appendix I (2).
9.4.1.
A2
13/05/2008
Page 49
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
of the Veripos HF station transmits corrections on both a high and low frequency. When MF
is selected as the operating mode, two independent MF stations can be selected from used
the LD2 can be setup in MF roaming mode where the Unit can select stations based on the
distance to the two closest stations, or on the strongest frequency being received by the
unit, this may lead to the same station being used on both channels, the user can also
manually enter a frequency
HF station selection
To select a station when in the HF band mode press the *Enter* key on the above display
which will bring up the list of available HF stations channel 1. Press the *Enter* key to gain
access to the station list. Use the *Toggle* key to scroll through the list of available
stations, until the required station is displayed, press the *Enter* key this will move the
curser to the far right LCD Screen. To enable the station use the *Toggle* key to toggle
between N and Y (N being disabled and Y being enabled), *Enter* to confirm the
selection.
MF station selection
When using the MF station operational mode when the above screen is displayed press the
*Enter* key, Use the *Toggle* key to toggle between the roaming MF modes and the
manual entry, press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection for Channel 1 this will move
the curser back to the left of the screen, use the *Toggle* to this allows the user to setup
channel 2
9.4.1.3. HF/MF Station Details
The station details menu, displays a list of attributes associated with the reference stations
in the station listing onboard the LD2, these details are also available in Appendix II
(Error! Reference source not found./1.1). One of the details is the C3 code this is a code
that must be generated by the Veripos helpdesk, for use of the Veripos HF stations. To
generate the C3 Code an SNF form should be filled out and sent to the Veripos helpdesk
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 50
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
see Veripos document FO-GL-GPS-004, along with the C2 code from the unit. See 10.3.2
for details on where to locate the C2 code.
Station Name
Station ID
Channel 1 Frequency
Channel 2 Frequency
Data Rate
C3 Code
To enter the C3 code toggle through, to the bellow display, press the *Enter* key the curser
will start to flash then using the *Toggle* key to toggle through the characters to the first
character supplied by the Veripos help desk, press the *Enter* key to move to the next
character then so on.
9.4.1.4. HF Decryption
Veripos HF stations are encrypted using the C2 and C3 code. There are also free to air HF
stations that do not use encryption. When a free to air station is being used the Decryption
needs to be switched to off. Veripos cannot guarantee availability and system performance
of third party stations as these are not controlled by Veripos
Note: the MF option does not require a C3 code, as this is a free service available to users
and no decryption is necessary.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 51
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.4.2.
Beacon Receiver
The Beacon Receiver is capable of receiving corrections from the MF IALA beacon
network.
Auto Distance: Selects the closest station to the users current location
Auto Frequency: Selects Station with the strongest signal strength at the users location
Manual: Allows the user to enter the frequency and bit rate of a station
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 52
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
10.
UNIT STATUS
The Status menu allows the user to view the systems operational parameters for the
onboard components and system details. The Menu structure is outlined in Appendix I
(3).
10.1.
DEMODULATOR STATUS
The Demodulator status page gives the user details of the Demodulator card ID, the signal
status and the firmware versions on the card.
10.1.1. Unit ID
The first screen shown in this sub menu is as shown below:
Press the *Enter* key to access the first screen shown below:
This shows the Unit ID and that the unit status (Enabled or Disabled). If the unit is disabled,
it will have to be enabled by obtaining the appropriate access code from the Veripos
Network Control Centre. Note that the actual code displayed will be dependent upon the
receiver unit. (See 13) Press the *Page* key enter the next sub menu.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 53
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Press *Enter* again, followed by *Page* and the screen will show:
This displays the status of the received signal from the selected downlink beam. For the
display above, 98West is selected.
3.5V is the signal strength and can range anywhere from 0.0V to 3.5V.
E-7 is the BER and can range anywhere from E-0 to E-7.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 54
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
For correct operation the BER should be E-5 to E-7 with the signal strength above 2V.
The BER is the most important value in the display since its possible to have a high signal
strength and poor BER. Always look at this first.
The four diamonds are the indicate levels of synchronisation lock, from left to right:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 55
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page, which is shown below.
Code
ROM Version
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Constants
Flash Memory
Page 56
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
10.2.
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page. The information below is displayed:
Serial Number
10.2.2. Position
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page. The information below is displayed:
Rev No:
Date:
Lat
Long.
A2
13/05/2008
Page 57
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
10.2.3. Altitude
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page. The information below is displayed:
Alt
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page. The information below is displayed:
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page. The information below is displayed:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
UTC Time
Page 58
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
10.2.6. DOP
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page. The information below is displayed here.
PDOP
HDOP
VDOP
TDOP
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page. The information below is displayed here.
PRN
Azimuth (A/Z)
Elevation (EL)
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 59
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
10.3.
HF/MF STATUS
The HF/MF Receiver status page gives the user details of the HF/MF Receiver cards ID,
the signal status for Channel 1, Channel 2 and the firmware versions on the card.
Press the *Enter* key to access the sub menu and the *Toggle* key to toggle between
Channel 1 and Channel 2. The channel status menu gives details for both Channel 1 and
2, for the frequencys being used, the Bit rate (bps), the signal strength for the current
channel (dBuv/m), and the channels calculated signal to noise ratio (db)
10.3.2. C2 Code
The C2 code is a unique Code that is associated with the HF card this value is needed to
generate the C3 see 9.4.1.3.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 60
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
On entry to the Model & F/W Vers Page, the screen will display the receiver type and the
current firmware version for the HF/MF card.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 61
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
10.4.
BEACON STATUS
The Beacon Receiver status page gives the user details for the Beacon signal status for
Channel 1 and firmware versions on the SBX-4 card.
Press the *Enter* key to access the sub menu and the *Toggle* key to toggle between
Channel 1 and Channel 2. The channel status menu gives details for both Channel 1 and 2
(which for SBX-4 internal use only), on the frequencys being used, the Bit rate (bps), the
signal strength for the current channel (dBuv/m), and the channels calculated signal to
noise ratio (db)
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 62
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
11.
SYSTEM TESTS
System Tests allow the user to check the operation of the front panel LCD display.
Access to System Tests is by pressing the *Page* key in the top level Main Menu until
'System Tests' is displayed. Then press the *Enter* key to show the following display:
Press the *Enter* key to initiate an internal self test of the LCD display Module. This test
checks each segment of the LCD display.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 63
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
12.
SYSTEM INFORMATION
The system information has the following displays: current processor software version;
controller software version; GNSS hardware onboard; and the IP address of the unit.
12.1.
PC/104 S/W
The PC/104 S/W gives software information on the PC/104 card and the controller firmware
version number. When the above display is shown, Press the *Enter* Key to access the
information.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 64
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
12.2.
INSTALLED H/W
The installed Hardware menu allows the user to change the type of commands that are
sent GNSS card by choosing different GNSS card types from a menu. This should only be
undertaken by engineers after a change of GNSS card. Changing this parameter will stop
data from being output from the card if the incorrect receiver type is chosen. It is also
possible to select whether the LD2 has a HF/MF card (3011) or a beacon card (SBX-4)
installed. This will enable the use to configure the selected card in the configuration menu.
12.3.
HOST IP ADDRESS
When the LD2 is connected to a network, the IP will be assigned by the network, provided it
is a DHCP network, otherwise the LD2 unit will default to the IP 192.168.150.249. The IP
of the LD2 will be displayed in the screen below, to access this screen when the above
screen is shown press the *Enter* key.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 65
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
13.
ACCESS CODE
From the Main Menu the user can access the Access Code function by pressing the
*Enter* key. The following screen is shown:
This provides access to the sub menus, which allow you to see the value of the Access
Code.
Press the *Enter *key to select the first page which is the Access Code.
The following screen is shown:
The first 10 digits represent the code that needs to be given to the Veripos Helpdesk in
order to obtain a new enable or disable access code.
In the case of the screen above, that number is A08010003D.
The first digit, A, represents the service code of the Veripos service used:
VERIPOS-Standard (single or dual-beam satellite delivery) Service Code: A
VERIPOS-HF (compatible with VERIPOS-Standard) Service Code: A
VERIPOS-Standard Plus (single or dual-beam satellite delivery) Service Code: M
VERIPOS-DGlonass (single or dual-beam satellite delivery) Service Code: G
VERIPOS-Ultra (single or dual-beam satellite corrections delivery) Service Code: P
VERIPOS-Standard with Verify DP Display Service Code: C
VERIPOS-Standard Plus with Verify DP Display Service Code: J
VERIPOS-Ultra with Verify DP Display Service Code: S
VERIPOS Ultra Position Output Service Code: Z
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 66
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
The second generation of service code have been implemented into the latest release of
software.
L-band Decoder Version: 4.4
Controller Version: 6.33
Note, any controller version lower than 6.20 can only use the previously listed services (see
Page 65), Controller Versions that are 6.20 or higher can use the old services as well as
the new ones listed below:
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
VerifyDP
Ultra
Verify DP, Ultra
STD+
VerifyDP, STD+
STD+, Ultra
VerifyDP, STD+, Ultra
Glonass
VerifyDP, Glonass
Glonass, Ultra
VerifyDP, Glonass, Ultra
Glonass, STD+
VerifyDP, Glonass, STD+
Glonass, STD+, Ultra
Verify DP, Glonass, STD+, Ultra
STD
VerifyDP, STD
STD, Ultra
VerifyDP,STD, Ultra
STD,STD+
Verify DP, STD, STD+
STD, STD+, Ultra
VerifyDP, STD, STD+, Ultra
The new IDs provide the user with more flexibility, and the Glonass service has been
added.
Note : When contacting the service help desk, ensure that you have your controller revision
number to hand.
0801 represents the serial number of the LD2. 0003 represents the number of times the
LD2 has had its signal activation changed. The D at the end indicates that the LD2 is
currently disabled. An E would mean its currently enabled.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 67
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
The second set of digits, 2A34 in the case of the screen above, represents the area where
the new access code needs to be entered once it has been received from the Helpdesk.
The last 4 digits, 66A4 in the case of the screen above, represent the confirmation code.
Whenever the LD2 is enabled or disabled the confirmation code will change.
Please fill out the Signal Notification Form with the relevant information see Veripos
document FO-GL-GPS-004 for instructions and the SNF form.
Once the Veripos Helpdesk has received the SNF form with the current code and service
requirements they will issue a 4 digit code access code. This should be entered into the
screen above using the *Toggle* and *Enter* keys.
Once the code is entered the confirmation code will automatically change. This new code
needs to be reported back to the Veripos Helpdesk to confirm that the signal changes have
been completed. The ID LED on the front panel will switch from being totally off or flashing,
to being on continuously. This indicates that the LD2 is now enabled for use.
Disabling the LD2 is done in exactly the same way as enabling it. Obtain the current code
from the LD2:
In the case of the screen above, that code would be A08010004E. Report this to the
Veripos Helpdesk using the SNF form. Once the disable code has been received, enter it
into the LD2 and report the confirmation code back to the Helpdesk.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 68
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
14.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The equipment is designed and manufactured to exacting standards and, once installed
and operated correctly, should provide prolonged trouble-free service.
The information contained in this section is restricted to such testing that can be
undertaken in the field.
There are no user-adjustable controls or user-serviceable items within the receiver. Units
should be returned to the manufacturer for repair. To expedite repairs, the following
information should be included with the returned unit:
Detailed fault description and operating conditions
Contact name with telephone/fax numbers
The following diagnostic procedures enable the user to carry out simple fault finding on the
system.
14.1.
POWER FAULTS
Fault
Unit off completely.
Reason
On/Off Switch to OFF
Remedy
Switch unit On using
switch on rear panel.
Blown fuse.
Faulty supply.
Check ac supply is
available.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 69
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
14.2.
SIGNAL FAULTS
Fault
Reason
Remedy
No Signal
0V signal strength.
BER=E-0 or E-1
Reference Lock Solid
connection is secure.
Black
Status LEDs:
the antenna.
SYNC is off.
No signal
0V signal strength
BER=E-0 or E-1
LEDs:
SYNC is off.
power break.
Signal Intermittent
antenna.
and connections.
Poor antenna
connections
connections.
BER=E-1
Intermittent Lock Flags
LED's:
SYNC Intermittent
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 70
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
15.
VERIFY DP
15.1.
INTRODUCTION
The software has been designed to keep operator intervention to a minimum and to permit
a fast and easy assessment of the current positioning status. A semi fixed graphical display
provides pertinent information regarding the calculated position solution and associated
received differential corrections. The software generates alarms on all key positioning
parameters as well as software function status and provides flexibility across different
scenarios. Alarm thresholds are user configurable.
The mouse and keyboard operate the functions of the software.
With the appropriate access code, the Verify DP software will automatically start and
configure the necessary inputs required to populate the various graphical views.
Amongst other information, the software displays; position error ellipse, a track plot,
location and signal strength of all GPS satellites and Glonass Satellites when enabled, the
age of corrections received from each Veripos reference station used and or external
RTCM sources. The geographical location of the vessel can be viewed as well as the
available Veripos reference stations in the region, both of which are displayed on a map of
the operating area. When using an external Gyro input the target monitoring screen can be
used to display the vessel outline and user defined targets. A complete record of events is
maintained in a log, which also shows real-time RTCM Type 16 messages broadcast by
Veripos regarding service status.
15.2.
MONITOR
Use a VGA monitor to suit the operational environment. The monitor input is directly from
the LD2 15 way video output on P6.
15.3.
VERIFY-DP OPERATION
Once the LD2 unit has been connected to the appropriate antennas, operation of the Verify
DP can commence.
With the LD2 correctly configured, the onboard Verify DP software automatically runs, this
will configure the GNSS receiver in the LD2 and enable all the information required. The
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 71
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
software will then configure the screen automatically with predetermined windows which
are regarded as the essential information required by the DP operator.
If the vessel is starting work in a new area or the unit is switched on for the first time, then
the appropriate communications satellite transmitting the corrections (sometimes referred
to as the Beam) may have to be changed (see 13.2)
15.4.
SCREEN LAYOUT
15.5.
DISPLAY VIEWS
Figure 4 shows the Verify DP front end display that is automatically presented when Verify
DP is activated and receiving data, this is the standard screen that will be displayed when
the software is started.
The Standard display opens showing the RTCM information from the reference stations
that are being used in the onboard algorithms. Where the system configuration allows it is
possible to display the vessel outline. If the system is configured to display outline from the
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 72
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
setting menu when in Admin mode select Options and Enable the Vessel outline option,
this will add the buttons in Figure 5, and this enables the user to toggle between the station
information view and the vessel outline view.
Each screen window will now be described in detail. The windows have the following titles.
Position Information
Almanac/DOP
DGPS Calculations
Map
Target Monitoring
A2
13/05/2008
Page 73
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
1. Position
This is the calculated position in WGS84 it is displayed in Degrees, Minutes, Seconds to
three decimal points of second (centimetre level precision).
Height is the Antenna height above sea level and is in Meters. This is sometimes referred
to as the height above the Geoid which can be considered for DP purposes to be the height
above the MSL.
2. Mode
The mode shows which Veripos service is being used by the system as a primary source.
The software will always use the best solution available and provided a valid position is
being calculated this box will remain green and indicting which solution is being output.
If the box changes colour to red, there is no valid position is being calculated and the status
will change to Invalid and will require operator intervention.
The mode box will display GNSS and be coloured orange when only free to air services are
used as well as external RTCM sources. The QC of these positions is reduced.
Full QC is used when the Veripos Corrections are input into the solutions.
4. Speed/Course/Heading
Speed is available in different units; click the grey button to the side which will allow the
user to change units: Mph, Kph, m/s, Knots.
Course over Ground is calculated from the GPS antenna and represents the direction of
travel for the vessel. It should be noted that if the vessel is stationary the course can vary
as the antenna is not moving and thus the CoG will constantly change, as the GPS has no
positional history to calculate a heading.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 74
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Heading is available when an external Gyro input is connected to Port 3 and is configured
to accept gyro data, see 9.3.3 (GYRO data can also be input via the USB port, when a
USB Serial converter is used).
5. Fix Button
This Fix button is used to fix the users location at the moment of pressing the FIX button,
the position will be antenna location, unless offsets have been entered.
It is possible to enter Lat / Longs where required to be used for target monitoring purposes.
15.5.2. ALMANAC/DOP
The Almanac/DOP view displays data from the GNSS Almanac which provides the user
with a six hour window that can be used for planning purposes. In addition, a two hour
history is kept showing the predicted DOP from data in the Almanac and the actual DOP
values generated by the Algorithms to the left of the current time, this allows the user to
compare the actual and predicted DOP values.
(Note the actual figures are plotted as lighter lines, compared to the darker lines drawn by
the predicated values).
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 75
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
DOP (Dilution of Precision) is an indicator of the quality of the geometry of the satellite
constellation. The DOP values for the current time are displayed at the top of the view as
well as the last two hours of DOP data being graphically displayed on the display.
GDOP is computed from the geometric relationships between the receiver position and the
positions of the satellites that the receiver is using. For planning purposes GDOP is
computed from the Almanac and a user position. Predicted GDOP does not take into
account obstacles that block the line-of-sight from the position to the satellites.
GDOP Components:
The Green area displays the number of GPS and possible GLONASS (if enabled) satellites
that will are above elevation mask, the white area displays the total number of satellites
above the horizon.
15.5.3. Satellite Polar Plot
The satellite polar plot displays the satellite constellations for the users location. The
satellites are colour coded to provide information on their status with circles representing
the satellites of the GPS constellation and squares representing the GLONASS
constellation:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 76
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
White satellites that are in view but below the elevation mask, and therefore not
used in the computation.
The Left hand column of the view displays the unique PRN (satellite) number of the
satellites in view if the satellite is a GLONASS satellite it will be given a PRN number
greater than 32. The azimuth is the horizontal angle measured in degrees from the fixed
point north to the direction of the satellite and is relative to the users location.
The third column titled Elev is the Elevation of the satellite relative to that users position at
that instant of time. Final column provides an indicator to show if the satellite is either rising
or falling.
The satellite polar plot view will also show the elevation mask set in the unit and the
number of satellites being used of those available. A grey ring is used to indicate the
elevation mask from zero to the elevation mask used and any satellite below the mask will
be used in the position computations.
The strength of the signal received from each satellite available is displayed in the SNR
view. If a single frequency (L1) Multi-Reference solution is in use, only a single bar will be
displayed to represent the L1 SNR, and when the dual frequency solution (Standard Plus
and Ultra) are enabled, then both L1 and L2 measurements are plotted.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 77
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
The X axis lists the PRN numbers of the satellites being received and includes satellites
below the elevation mask. The range on the Y axis is 0 to 60 dBhz, where dBhz provides a
measure of the signal strength with a higher value indicating a stronger signal.
If a satellite is showing as red in the SNR display, check the elevation of the satellite in the
Polar Plot view. Low elevation satellites will typically have a low SNR values but if the
satellite is at a high elevation (i.e. above 40 degrees) and has a low SNR it would indicate
that the signal strength is not as it should be and may indicate a potential problem.
Note: Depending on the GPS receiver used, the values for the signal strength can vary
depending on the implementation by the GPS receiver manufacturer.
The SNR bars will fluctuate over the period that a satellite is in view, this is a characteristic
of the signal due to the changing elevation of the satellite. The main indication of a problem
is when SNR bars are constantly red for long periods.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 78
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Figure 10 shows the DGPS calculation view which displays the position error ellipses for all
the calculations. Each ellipse is uniquely coloured for ease of identification. There is a Key
showing the colours associated with each position calculation along with the deviation of
the solutions compared to the optimum solution.
The + and buttons on the view is available to zoom in and out with the scale ranging from
0.4m per scale bar division to 200m per scale bar division.
The RAD/GRID button toggles between a grid and circular display. In the grid display the
grid marks are spaced one scale bar division apart, whilst the radius of circular display is
two scale bar divisions apart.
The amount of position history shown on the graphical display is changeable to a user
defined value; the current default is 60 seconds. This can be found through the main menu
bar in Setting / DGPS Cal settings or by right clicking on the graphical display.
The numbers in the view relate to the statistics derived for each available solution. The
standard deviation is a measure of the spread of the measurements (at 95% confidence)
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 79
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
and hence the precision of the position computation. The smaller the SD Latitude, SD
Longitude and SD Height the better the derived position.
The RMS is a statistical measure of the computed positions about a best fit position
solution. Root Mean Square (RMS) error is the value of one standard deviation (68%) of
the error in one, two or three dimensions
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 80
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
The RTCM view displays the age of the corrections from the individual reference stations
that are use in the position solution.
The reference stations are listed in the left hand column along with the Veripos station ID.
The number of satellites for the specific reference station is indicated in brackets located to
the right of the scrolling bar for the age of corrections.
Veripos RTCM Type 1 and Type 31 corrections are shown as scrolling bars. The bars will
remain green if corrections are being received, Amber when the corrections are not being
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 81
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
received and are still valid. If the bar is red corrections are not being received and the
corrections are not valid which would indicate a problem with the L-band link which should
be investigated by the user. After a period of time the station will drop off the display. In
conjunction with the scrolling bar for the age of corrections, the values for the age for the
RTCM messages is also shown message are shown.
If any HF stations are selected, they will be shown with blue scrolling bars and if any MF
stations are selected then they will be displayed with orange scrolling bars.
Note: The HF/MF card will have to be installed to receive these corrections along with an
appropriate antenna. When this service is used, the stations will automatically be used
within the calculation, depending on the distance from the stations. Please refer to section
9.4 for configuration of the HF/MF option.
Type 15 messages (Standard Plus service) are shown as an indicator box, with the number
of the satellites available from the station shown in brackets. The box remains green whilst
corrections are received, but if none are received after 6 minutes the box will revert to
amber and then red after 9 minutes. The Type 15 messages remain valid for longer than
the Type 1 messages.
Veripos Ultra corrections are also shown as a box which will remain green whilst valid
corrections are received. If after 2 minutes corrections are not received the box will revert to
amber (corrections still valid), and then after 6 minutes the box will then change to red,
showing that the corrections are no longer valid and solution will revert to s standalone
GPS solution.
It is worth pointing out that the threshold values for the age of corrections can be changed
by the user.
The reference stations that are used in the calculation are the four closest stations to the
users location. The corrections are those that are made available on Port2 of the LD2, the
system by default outputs all stations that are available on the beam that the L-band card is
tracking the user has the ability to switch stations ON and OFF on Port 2 (see 9.3.2). If
only 1, 2 or 3 stations are selected then these will be the only stations used within the
position calculations, provide they are within range.
When using Verify DP it is advised to leave Port 2 in its default setting of outputting all the
RTCM messages.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 82
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
The Map View shows the Veripos Reference stations that are available within the working
area and the users position.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 83
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Vessel Offsets
The user can define two offset positions relative to the vessels CRP (Central Reference
Point): the GPS Antenna offset and the vessels Centre of Rotation offset. To enter these
values the user should use a right click of the mouse, over the Target monitoring view and
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 84
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
from the popup options select Set Vessel Offset & Centre which will display the Offset &
Centre of Rotation dialog box see Figure 13. The user should enter the offset values for
the GPS antenna and Centre of rotation relative to the vessels CRP, measurements are in
metres (m) the sign convention is positive X = starboard, negative X = Port, Positive Y =
forward and Negative Y = Aft .
In this Dialog box it is also possible to set parameters for a vessel proximity alarm or for a
station keeping alarm.
When the alarm is set to Proximity alarm, the system will alarm when the distance from the
target to the vessels centre of rotation is less that the user defined distance. When the
system is set to station keeping an alarm will be given when the distance between the
target position and the vessels centre of rotation exceeds the user defined value.
Target Selection
To enter a target position to be tracked the user should press the FIX button, this will bring
up the Edit Fix Position dialog box, see Figure 14. The position in the Dialog that is
displayed when the screen is brought is the vessel position when the fix button was
selected.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 85
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
The user can enter alternative target position by entering the Lat and Long in WGS84.
Press the OK button to confirm the position, this will return the user to the target monitoring
display.
Target monitoring
When a target position has been entered and the target is within the range of the view it
will be displayed by a target symbol, a Red line will be drawn from the Centre of rotation to
the target position, in the top right hand side of the display the position of the target is
displayed and in the top left of the screen the bearing to the target from the centre of
rotation, distance from the centre of rotation and Estimated Time of Arrival at the target,
see Figure 15
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 86
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 87
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Range Rings
It is possible for the user to switch the range rings off if needed, to do this use a right click
of the mouse, over the Target monitoring view, from the menu click the Show Range Rings,
if this is ticked the range rings will be displayed if it is not ticked then the range rings will not
be displayed.
Zooming
Using the [ + ] and [ ] buttons at the bottom of the screen it is possible zoom in, when
zooming out when the view reaches a set scale the symbol will change to an arrow pointing
in the direction of the heading of vessel.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 88
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Figure 17 presents the system mode view (this is displayed along the bottom of the VerifyDP display). The system mode indicates which position calculations are available and
whether they have been enabled.
A green box denotes that the solution is available and if the text box is highlighted then this
will be the position solution being used (in Figure 12 Ultra is the solution being used). If a
service is not enabled the text box for the service will be greyed out. If the service is
enabled, but not available then the box will be red which may indicate a problem with the
solution.
In addition to the system mode indicators, there are also indicators for the RTCM data input
sources. In normal mode of operation, The RTCM boxes are green when valid corrections
are available but these will turn yellow for a period of 30 seconds, then red if corrections
are not available.
It is possible to have multiple sources of RTCM feeding the algorithms, from the onboard Lband card, the onboard HF/MF card, and External sources of RTCM, external RTCM can
be feed in to the algorithms, through multiple I/O devices, a letter is assigned to the data
source to indicate which I/O it is coming from:
Rev No:
Date:
U = USB
S = Serial
L = LAN (network)
A2
13/05/2008
Page 89
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
15.6.
MAIN MENU
The user has the ability to perform some limited configuration from the main menu
structure.
15.6.1. Settings
The settings menu allows for some basic configuration of the Verify DP software.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 90
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
This displays the reference stations in the LD2 the edit facility allows the user to change
the name and ID of a station.
Re-Initialise IO
This will Re-initialise the internal sockets used for passing RTCM data to algorithms within
the LD.
Re-Initialise Decoder
The Factory settings are re-established on the decoder when this is selected.
This dialogue allows the thresholds for the SNR can be set. To adjust the settings press the
up or down arrow on the appropriate threshold until the required value is displayed.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 91
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
The Reference Station dialogue (Figure 16) indicates the age thresholds of the RTCM
corrections for each message type (Type 1, Type 15 and Ultra). The thresholds can be
changed by the operator with the limits altered by pressing the up or down arrow until the
required threshold value is reached. The default settings are recommended for use.
A maximum age limit can also be set, but it must be remembered that once this limit has
been exceeded that particular station will no longer be used in the calculations.
By right clicking on the view, the dialogue in Figure 12 will be displayed.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 92
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Figure 12 is the dialogue related to the DGPS Calculation view and is used to set the
amount of time that the will be displayed on the view. The longer the time set in seconds
the more data will be displayed on the plot. This dialogue can also be accessed by right
clicking on the DGPS Calculation View (15.5.5).
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 93
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 94
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Configure Alarms
The alarms can be configured to the user requirements using the dialogue in Figure 25.
Alarms are used as an aid to help the user determine if the system is working correctly but
there may be a requirement to alter the alarms settings at some point during operations.
General settings are used to change the audible alarm that is used in addition to the pop-up
box that can be used to warn the user of any issues that might be occurring (Tick the
Enable Popup to facilitate use of this function).
The user also has the ability to set the alarm codes and the warning values. The alarm
codes are:
300 Data Lost
301 Data Missing
302 Data Invalid
303 Data Corrupt
400 Proximity Alarm
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 95
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
The user can configure the priority of alarms these depending on the severity of the
operation, i.e. is data is lost, this may be seen as critical as the system will not be operating
at all. The alarm priorities are:
Normal
Warning
Critical
To change the priorities on the alarm codes, select the select alarm code icon to change
the alarm code and the select the appropriate alarm priority for the alarm code. Finally
select the SET icon to enable the code and priority.
Configure IO Ports
The Configure IO Ports dialog enables the user to configure the internal data ports with in
the LD2 for communications between the internal algorithms.
To configure an IO select which type of IO is being used for data input TCP or Serial,
currently no data is input through Serial port. The following data is available on the
associated port and IP address, as a minimum the VDP and VDP Aux IO should be
configured the gyro data is optional:
Rev No:
Date:
Data
Address
Port
VDP
127.0.0.1
5000
VDP Aux
127.0.0.1
8001
127.0.0.1
4990
127.0.0.1
4997
A2
13/05/2008
Page 96
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Data Decoders
The Decoder settings dialog is used to associate the message types with the available data
port configured in the IO ports configuration. This allows the messages to be read by the
Verify DP GUI. It is highly recommended that these settings are not altered other than by a
qualified Veripos engineer.
The above dialog enables the user to configure the data inputs from external data sources
into the algorithms. The Stream is the Source of the data input, the user should select the
appropriate data source then tick the Enable box then choose the appropriate data type :
Rev No:
Date:
GNSS
L-band
HF/MF
A2
13/05/2008
Page 97
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Serial P3
External data from a third party system being feed through Port 3
HF/IALA
UHF Local
L-band (Ext 2) Allows for the input of None Veripos RTCM messages into
the onboard algorithms.
L-band (Veripos)
algorithms
External data from a third party system being feed through the USB
USB
port
HF/IALA
UHF Local
L-band (Ext 2)
L-band (Veripos)
Ext. LAN
External data from a third party system being feed through the LAN
Port. When using the External LAN data feed, the user must enter the IP and port
number of the system that is outputting the data.
HF/IALA
UHF Local
L-band (Ext 2)
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
L-band (Veripos)
Page 98
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Configure IP Address
The IP Address Configuration dialog allows the user to configure the way that an IP
address is assigned to the LD2. The user can configure the system to obtain an address
from an Network using DHCP where supported, or the user can allocate the LD2 a Static IP
Address.
Change Password
If the password is changed, it is strongly recommended that the new password is held in a
secure place on the vessel so that when it is urgently required it can be easily obtained.
Display Dimming
This facility can be used to adjust the display for the operators night time requirements.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 99
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Once in this menu, by putting the curser over, either the Day or Night time button (showing
the colour last selected) and left click, the colour palette will be displayed. Once the colour
has been selected it is advisable to add it to the custom colours for future use.
Colour selection can be done either directly from the basic colour table or the colour chart
on the right. There are two ways to use the colour chart, one to left click, and hold it down,
on the square box, and move the grey square around until the desired colour is displayed in
the sample box. The second method is to move the vertical slider up and down until the
desired colour is selected. Again this can be added to the custom colour selection. Once
the colour selection is correct then exit by pressing OK
Options
There are two options in the options menu:
Vessel outline enable: enables the View option in the top menu bar which allows the user to
toggle between the vessel outline and the station information view.
HF/MF card installed: should be enabled when there is an HF/MF installed in the LD2.
Close Verify DP
Selecting this will close the screen leaving it blank, but the LD2 unit will keep running. To
restore Verify-DP on the screen, the LD2 must be cycled off/on.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 100
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
15.6.3. Display
This Menu is for the night dimming of the Verify DP screen if it is situated on a ship bridge
which is darkened at night.
15.6.4. View
The View menu is available when system is enabled to display the vessel outline, from the
Admin menu. It gives the user the ability to toggle between the Vessel outline view and the
Station information view.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 101
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
15.6.5. Help
The Help menu enables the user to access this user manual the contents menu. The Index
menu is currently not used. The about menu opens the below dialog box which gives the
user information about the unit: IP address, the LD2 uptime and Software Versions.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 102
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
16.
CONTACT INFORMATION
Veripos c/o Subsea 7
Greenwell Road,
East Tullos,
Aberdeen, AB12 3AX
Rev No:
Date:
Tel
Fax
veripos.helpdesk@subsea7.com
Web Site
www.veripos.com
A2
13/05/2008
Page 103
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
APPENDIX I
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 104
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
1. MAIN MENU
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 105
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
2. CONFIGURATION
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 106
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 107
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
** GPS Receiver **
Position Mode
Enter
* Position Mode *
Man 3-D(Min 4SVs)
Toggle
* Position Mode *
Auto 3-D(Min 3SVs)
Toggle
* Position Mode *
Man 2-D(Min 3SVs)
Toggle
* Position Mode *
Auto 3-D(DOP lim)
Page
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Dynamic Mode
Enter
* Dynamic Mode
Static
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Quasi-Static
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Walking
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Ship
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Unlimited
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Aircraft
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Automobile
Toggle
Page
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
*
Adaptive Dynamic
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Mask setting
Enter
* Mask Settings
PDOP:
99
Toggle
* Mask Settings
HDOP:
99
Toggle
* Mask Settings
VDOP:
99
Toggle
* Mask Settings
*
Pos. Elev: 07 degs
Toggle
Page
* Mask Settings
*
Min SVs(Raw) 1
Toggle
* Mask Settings
*
Raw Elev: 00 degs
* Diff.Control
*
Station ID: 0000
Toggle
* Diff.Control
*
Age Limit: 0100 s
Toggle
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Diff.Control
Enter
* Diff.Control
*
Diff. Mode: Remote
Toggle
* Diff.Control
Auto Diff: ON
Toggle
Toggle
Page
*** Configuration***
GPS Receiver
Toggle
* Diff.Control
*
RTCM Source:DNLINK
Page
Enter
** GPS Receiver **
Port A Settings
Enter
* Port A Settings *
NMEA O/P:GGA1.0
Page
* Port A Settings *
Raw O/P:MBN 1.0
Page
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Port B Settings
Enter
* Port B Settings *
NMEAO/P:GGA OFF
Page
Page
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Factory Defaults
Enter
* Factory Defaults*
Use ENTER to reset
Enter
* Factory Defaults*
Restoring Defaults
* Data Memory
*
Use ENTER to Clear
Enter
* Data Memory*
Clearing Memory
* Save settings
*
Use ENTER to save
Enter
* Data Memory*
Saving Settings
Page
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Data Memory
Enter
Page
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Save Settings
Enter
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 108
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
*** Configuration***
Serial Port
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
USB1 RTCM IN
9600
Page 109
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Page
** Operating Mode **
Frequency Band: HF
Toggle
** Operating Mode **
Frequency Band: MF
Toggle
Page
Note: Depending on the selection made in the Operating Mode selection this
will change the stations that can be selected in the Station selection listing to
those of the Veripos HF Network or of those of the Iala MF network
Page
** HF/MF Receiver **
Station Select
*** Configuration***
HF/MF Receiver
Enter
* HF Station Select*
>: See station list
Page
Page
Page
** HF/MF Receiver **
Station Details
Enter
* Station Details *
Station Name ID
Toggle
Enter
Toggle
* Station Details *
Name: Name
Toggle
* Station Details *
Station Name ID
* Station Details *
ID: XXX
Toggle
* Station Details *
CH1 Freq: 1111.11KHz
Toggle
Page
* Station Details *
C3 Code: XXXXXX
Page
Toggle
* Station Details *
Data rate: XXX
Toggle
* Station Details *
CH2 Freq: 1111.11KHz
Toggle
Page
** HF/MF Receiver **
Decryption
Enter
* Decryption *
Disabled
Toggle
* Decryption *
Enabled
Toggle
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 110
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
** Operating Mode **
Frequency Band: HF
Toggle
** Operating Mode **
Frequency Band: MF
Toggle
Page
Note: Depending on the selection made in the Operating Mode selection this
will change the stations that can be selected in the Station selection listing to
those of the Veripos HF Network or of the of the Iala MF network
Page
** HF/MF Receiver **
Station Select
*** Configuration***
HF/MF Receiver
Enter
* MF Station Select*
CH1: See station list
Page
Toggle
* MF Station Select*
CH2: See station list
Toggle
Page
Page
** HF/MF Receiver **
Station Details
Enter
Toggle
Toggle
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 111
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
*Beacon Receiver*
Station select
*** Configuration***
Beacon Receiver
Enter
Enter
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 112
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
3. STATUS
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 113
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
*** Status
***
Demodulator
Enter
** Demodulator
Unit Id
**
Enter
Page
Page
** Demodulator **
Signal Status
Enter
AOR(E)
0.0V E-0
+000000Hz ID:
Page
Page
** Demodulator **
S/W Versions
Enter
Page
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 114
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
*** Status
***
GPS Receiver
Enter
**GPS Receiver **
Receiver Info
Enter
*Receiver Info
*
Model & F/W Vers
Page
Page
**GPS Receiver **
Position
Page
Enter
Page
Model Name:
Firmware Vers:
Enter
Lat:
Lon:
Enter
Alt:
V.VEL:
Enter
Course:
Speed:
*Receiver Info
Serial Number
Page
Enter
*Receiver Info
*
Installed Options
Page
Serial Number:
0123456789
Enter
Installed Options
Page
**GPS Receiver **
Altitude
m
m/s
Page
**GPS Receiver **
Course & Speed
degs
knts
Page
**GPS Receiver **
Time (UTC)
Enter
UTC Time: : :
Page
**GPS Receiver **
DOPs
Enter
PDOP:
VDOP:
HDOP:
TDOP:
Enter
PRN: 01 S/N: 00
AZ: 360 EL: 00
Page
**GPS Receiver **
SVs in View
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Toggle
PRN: 02 S/N: 00
AZ: 180 EL: 00
Toggle
PRN: ect...S/N: 00
AZ: 180 EL: 00
Toggle
Page 115
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Page
*** Status
***
HF/MF Receiver
Enter
*HF/MF Receiver *
Channel Status
Enter
Ch1: .kHz
...bps ..dBuv/m ..dB
Toggle
Ch2: .kHz
...bps ..dBuv/m ..dB
Toggle
Page
*HF/MF Receiver *
C2 Code
Enter
HF Encryption
C2 Code: XXXXX
Page
Page
*HF/MF Receiver *
Model & F/W Vers
Enter
Model Name:
F/W Vers:
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 116
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
*** Status
***
Beacon
Enter
*Beacon Receiver *
Channel Status
Enter
Ch1: .kHz
...bps ..dBuv/m ..dB
Toggle
Toggle
Page
Page
*Beacon Receiver *
Model & F/W Vers
Enter
Model Name:
F/W Vers:
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 117
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
4.
Rev No:
Date:
SYSTEM TEST
A2
13/05/2008
Page 118
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
5. SYSTEM INFORMATION
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 119
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
6. ACCESS CODE
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Enter
*Subsea7 AccessCode*
P12345689D 0123 456
Page 120
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
APPENDIX II
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 121
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 122
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Gustavus
Cold Bay
Cape Hinchinbrook
Level Island
Potato Point
Biorka
Kenai
Kodiak
Annette Island
284
296
288
282
290
280
292
294
278
288.0
289.0
292.0
295.0
298.0
305.0
310.0
313.0
323.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Brisbane
Darwin
Exmouth
Cape Flattery
Karratha
Ingham
Perth
Sydney
Gladstone
Cape SchanckI
Albany
Mackay
Corny Point
Weipa
Mallacoota
Horn Island
007
014
015
005
001
008
012
003
006
000
011
004
010
009
013
002
294.0
294.0
297.0
304.0
304.0
306.0
306.0
308.0
313.0
314.0
315.0
315.0
316.0
316.0
318.0
320.0
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Horta
Sao Miguel
484
490
308.0
312.5
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Bahrain
480
298.0
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Malaga
514
299.5
100
Alaska
Australia
Azores
Bahrain
Balearics
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 123
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
MF
MF
Mahon
Cala Figuera
524
522
293.0
294.5
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Oostende
640
312.0
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
St David's Head
323.0
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
461
464
460
465
467
462
290.0
290.0
300.0
300.0
305.0
305.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
MF
MF
MF
MF
Abrolhos
Rio Grande
Ponta se Sao Marcos
Sao Tome
Cabo Calchanhar
Ilha da Moela
Cabo de Santa Marta Grande
Lt
Canivete
Ilha Rasa
Sergipe
466
463
469
468
310.0
310.0
315.0
320.0
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Cavarna
900
300.0
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Wiarton
Cape Ray
Labrador
Partridge Island
St. Jean Richelieu
Hartlen Point
Rigolet
Riviere du Loop
Sandspit
Cardinal
Fox Island
Albert Bay
Lauzon
Cape Norman
Western Head
Moise
Cape Race
Tofino (Amphitrite Point)
Point Escuminac
Richmond
310
340
345
326
312
330
344
318
306
308
336
300
316
342
334
320
338
302
332
304
286.0
288.0
290.0
295.0
296.0
298.0
299.0
300.0
300.0
306.0
307.0
309.0
309.0
310.0
312.0
313.0
315.0
315.0
319.0
320.0
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Belgium
Bermuda
Brazil
Bulgaria
Canada
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 124
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
MF
Trois Rivieres
314
321.0
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
La Entallada
534
284.0
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Fangchen Gang
Kau Yi Chau
Yanweigang
Dasansgan Dao
Haozhi Gang
Dajishan
Laotieshan Xijiao
Dinghai
Bachu Jiao
Beitang
Chengshan Jiao
Zhenai Jaio
Luyu
Zhoudao
Qinghuangdao
Sanya
Sanzao
Shi Tang
Tiandashan
Wangijamai
Yangpu
646
852
620
602
622
624
604
626
652
608
612
632
640
644
606
654
642
628
630
614
656
287.0
289.0
291.0
301.5
304.0
307.5
307.5
310.0
310.5
310.5
317.0
320.0
317.0
301.0
287.5
295.0
307
295
313
313.5
313
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
Hammerodde
Blavandshuk
Skagen West
Thorshavn
700
705
710
715
289.5
290.0
296.0
287.5
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Alexandria
Port Said
Ras Umm Sidd
Ras Gharib
Mersa Martruh
El Quseir
440
442
444
446
448
450
284.0
290.0
293.5
298.0
307.0
314.5
200
200
200
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
Flamborough Head
Wormleighton
North Foreland
Lizard
687
691
688
681
290.5
291.0
299.5
306.0
100
100
100
100
Canary Isles
China
Denmark
Egypt
England
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 125
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
MF
St Catherine's Point
680
307.5
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Narva
Ristna
841
840
295.5
307.0
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Klamila
Mantyluoto
Puumala
Kokkola
Porkkala Pilot Station
Turku
Outokumpu
Marjaniemi
606
601
602
608
600
604
603
605
287.0
287.5
290.0
290.5
293.5
301.5
304.5
314.5
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Porquerolles
Gatteville
Cap Bear
Les Sables Olonne
Pont de Buis
Pen Men
Cap Ferret
Les Baleines
Saint Mathieu
469
460
468
464
462
463
466
464
462
286.5
299.0
304.5
307.0
308.5
309.0
310.0
305.0
310.5
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Cayenne
475
307.0
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Dune Helgoland
Zeven
Gro Mohrdorf
762
763
761
298.5
303.5
308.0
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Upolu Point
Pahoa
Kokole Point
258
254
260
286.0
290.0
300.0
100
100
200
Estonia
Finland
France
French Guyana
Germany
Hawaii
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 126
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Skardhsfjara
Skagata
Raufarhofn
Djupivogur
Reykjanes
Bjargtangar
632
626
628
630
622
624
287.0
289.0
289.5
291.0
293.5
300.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Aguada
Utan Point
Dolphin's Nose
Okha
Periyar River
Keating Point
Pondicherry
Sagar Island
Minicoy Island
Periyar River
Suratkal Point
Gopnath Point
Porbandar
Ratnagiri
Indira Point
Antarvedi
Krishnapatnam
Nagapatinam
Pandian Island
Paradip
410
406
428
400
414
438
422
434
418
414
412
404
402
420
444
436
432
426
424
440
286.0
286.0
295.0
296.0
301.0
313.0
315.0
318.0
320.0
320.0
320.0
299.0
293.0
308.0
303.0
320.0
297.0
323.0
309.0
290.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Mizen Head
Tory Island
Loop Head
660
670
665
284.0
288.5
293.0
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Daio Saki
Gesashi
Kushiro Saki
Sakata
Hekura Shima
Inubo Saki
Muroto Saki
Soya Misaki
Wakamiya Shima
Hachijo Shima
Ose Saki
Shiriya Saki
692
710
660
676
674
682
694
664
702
688
704
678
288.0
288.0
288.0
288.0
295.0
295.0
295.0
295.0
295.0
302.0
302.0
302.0
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Iceland
India
Ireland
Japan
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 127
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Hamada Ko
Abashiri
Ken Saki
Matsumae
Toi Misaki
Kinkasan To
Miyako Shima
Shakotan Misaki
Tanga
Nagoya
Seto
E Saki
Nakano Shima
Ohama
Urayasu
Tsurugasaki
670
662
686
668
706
680
712
666
672
690
700
696
708
698
684
686
305.0
309.0
309.0
309.0
309.0
316.0
316.0
316.0
316.0
320.0
320.0
320.5
320.5
321.0
321.0
309.0
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Changgigot
Chuk To
Chumunjin Dan
Eochong Do
Geomun Do
Mara Do
Palmido
Ullung Do
Yong Do
732
730
726
728
724
730
722
734
720
310.0
290.0
295.0
295.0
287.0
290.0
313.0
319.0
300.0
100
100
100
100
100
200
200
200
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Kuwait
482
295.0
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Porto Santo
486
287.5
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
Bintulu
Kuantan
Lumut
Kuching
821
827
825
822
290.0
297.0
298.0
305.0
200
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Mode
Vlieland
Gilze Rijen
Hoek van Holland
Name
655
655
650
ID
294.0
301.0
312.5
F1
200
200
200
BPS
Korea
Kuwait
Madeira
Malaysia
Netherlands
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 128
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Norway
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Torsvag
Skomvaer
Halten
Svinoy
Sklinna
Lista
Vardo
Fruholmen
Faerder
Andenes
Utsira
Utvaer
796
793
790
788
791
783
800
797
780
794
785
787
284.0
286.5
301.0
302.5
303.5
304.0
305.5
309.5
310.5
311.0
313.0
314.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Miraflores
Gatun
901
903
302.0
307.0
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Dziwnow
Jaroslawiec
Rozewie
741
745
743
283.5
295.0
301.0
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Leca
Sagres
Cabo Carvoeiro
488
482
480
290.0
305.5
311.5
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Isabella
034
295.0
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Jeddah
Gizan
961
962
320.0
324.0
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Stirling
Butt of Lewis
Girdle Ness
693
684
686
285.5
295.5
297.0
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
Panama
Poland
Portugal
Puerto Rico
Saudi Arabia
Scotland
Shetland Isles
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 129
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
MF
Sumburgh
685
291.5
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
Cape Recife
Cooper
Cape Aghulas
Cape Columbine
225
228
223
221
291.0
292.0
301.0
310.0
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Cabo Machichaco
Castellon
Pont Llobregat
Cabo Mayor
Cabo Salou
Estaca de Bares
Cabo Penas
Cabo Finisterre
Cabo de la Nao
Punta Sabinal
Cabo de Gata
Cabo de Palos
Tarifa
Rota
Cabo San Sebastian
La Entallada
500
526
530
502
528
506
504
508
520
515
514
518
512
510
532
534
285.0
286.0
288.5
289.0
291.0
293.0
295.0
296.0
297.5
298.5
299.5
302.0
302.5
303.5
313.5
284.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Colombo
Barberyn
Dondra
941
943
944
295.0
300.0
305.0
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Jarnas
Holmsjo
Kullen High
Goteborg
Hoburg
Nynashamn
Skutskar
Hjortens Udde
Kapellskar
Bjuroklubb
724
720
732
736
730
734
726
733
728
722
289.0
292.0
293.0
296.5
297.5
298.0
299.5
302.0
307.5
311.5
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
South Africa
Spain
Sri Lanka
Sweden
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 130
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Turkey
MF
MF
Turkeli
Kumkale
545
547
301.0
307.5
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Ra's Al Khaymah
Abu Dhabi
484
486
292.0
314.0
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Key West
Sandy Hook
Fort Stevens
Pigeon Point
Portsmouth Harbour
Cape Canaveral
Driver
Penobscot
Cape Mendocino
Cheboygan
Kensington
Moriches
English Turn
New Bern
Wisconsin Point
Milwaukee
Upper Keweenaw
Mobile Point
Angleton
Annapolis
Wildwood
Saginaw Bay
Point Loma
Whidbey Island
Aransas Pass
Bakersfield
Alexandria
Acushnet
Pickford
Reedy Point
Tampa
Portsmouth
Sturgeon Bay
Brunswick
Chico
Detroit
Savannah
Lompoc
Miami
Youngstown
Robinson Point
Isabella
022
008
272
266
002
018
012
044
270
112
192
006
028
196
100
106
102
026
246
058
038
114
262
276
032
084
040
198
110
170
244
1008
104
042
256
116
036
264
020
118
274
034
286.0
286.0
287.0
287.0
288.0
289.0
289.0
290.0
292.0
292.0
292.0
293.0
293.0
294.0
296.0
297.0
298.0
300.0
301.0
301.0
301.0
301.0
302.0
302.0
304.0
305.0
305.0
306.0
309.0
309.0
312.0
313.0
314.0
316.0
318.0
319.0
319.0
321.0
322.0
322.0
323.0
295.0
100
200
100
200
100
100
100
200
100
200
100
100
200
100
100
100
100
100
100
200
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
200
200
200
200
200
100
100
100
200
100
100
100
100
200
100
United States
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 131
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
MF
Galveston
030
296.0
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Point Lynas
Nash Point
682
689
297.5
309.5
100
100
Wales
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 132
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
APPENDIX III
Equipment Setup
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 133
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 134
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 135
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
APPENDIX IV
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 136
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
1. GGA
Essential fix data which provides 3D location and accuracy information.
$GPGGA,123519,4807.038,N,01131.000,E,1,08,0.9,545.4,M,46.9,M,08,1004*47
GGA Data Message defined:
GGA
123519
4807.038,N
01131.000,E
Fix quality:
08
0.9
545.4,M
46.9,M
08
1004
*47
If the height of the geoid is missing then the altitude should be suspect. Some non-standard
implementations report altitude with respect to the ellipsoid rather than geoid altitude. Some
units do not report negative altitudes at all. This is the only sentence that reports altitude.
2. GGX
Essential fix data which provides 3D location and accuracy information identical to the GGA
string structure with increased accuracy in the Latitude and Longitude from 3 decimal
points to 7 decimal points.
$GPGGX,123519,4807.0381234,N,01131.0001234,E,1,08,0.9,545.4,M,46.9,M,08,1004*47
GGA Data Message defined:
GGA
123519
4807.0381294,N
01131.0001234,E
Fix quality:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 137
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
08
0.9
545.4,M
46.9,M
08
1004
*47
2 = DGPS fix
3 = PPS fix
4 = Real Time Kinematic
5 = Float RTK
6 = estimated (dead reckoning) (2.3 feature)
7 = Manual input mode
8 = Simulation mode
Number of satellites being tracked
Horizontal dilution of position
Altitude, Meters, above mean sea level
Height of geoid (mean sea level) above WGS84 ellipsoid
Time in seconds since last DGPS update.
DGPS station ID number
Checksum data, always begins with *
If the height of the geoid is missing then the altitude should be suspect. Some non-standard
implementations report altitude with respect to the ellipsoid rather than geoid altitude. Some
units do not report negative altitudes at all. This is the only sentence that reports altitude.
3. GLL
Geographic Latitude and Longitude is a holdover from Loran data and some old units may
not send the time and data active information if they are emulating Loran data. If a GPS is
emulating Loran data they may use the LC Loran prefix instead of GP.
$GPGLL,4916.45,N,12311.12,W,225444,A,*31
GLL Data Message defined:
GLL
4916.46,N
12311.12,W
225444
A
31
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 138
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
4. VTG
Velocity made good.
GPVTG,054.7,T,034.4,M,005.5,N,010.2,K*33
VTG Data message defined:
VTG
054.7,T
034.4,M
005.5,N
010.2,K
*33
Note that, as of the 2.3 release of NMEA, there is a new field in the VTG sentence at the
end just prior to the checksum. Receivers that don't have a magnetic deviation (variation)
table built in will null out the Magnetic track made good
5. GSA
GPS DOP and active satellites. This sentence provides details on the nature of the fix. It
includes the numbers of the satellites being used in the current solution and the DOP. DOP
(dilution of precision) is an indication of the effect of satellite geometry on the accuracy of
the fix. It is a unitless number where smaller is better. For 3D fixes using 4 satellites a 1.0
would be considered to be a perfect number, however for overdetermined solutions it is
possible to see numbers below 1.0.
There are differences in the way the PRN's are presented which can effect the ability of
some programs to display this data. For example, in the example shown below there are 5
satellites in the solution and the null fields are scattered indicating that the almanac would
show satellites in the null positions that are not being used as part of this solution. Other
receivers might output all of the satellites used at the beginning of the sentence with the
null field all stacked up at the end. This difference accounts for some satellite display
programs not always being able to display the satellites being tracked. Some units may
show all satellites that have ephemeris data without regard to their use as part of the
solution but this is non-standard.
$GPGSA,A,3,04,05,,09,12,,,24,,,,,2.5,1.3,2.1*39
Where:
GSA
Satellite status
A
Auto selection of 2D or 3D fix (M = manual)
3
3D fix - values include: 1 = no fix
2 = 2D fix
3 = 3D fix
04,05... PRNs of satellites used for fix (space for 12)
2.5
PDOP (dilution of precision)
1.3
Horizontal dilution of precision (HDOP)
2.1
Vertical dilution of precision (VDOP)
*39
the checksum data, always begins with *
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 139
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
6. GSV
Satellites in View shows data about the satellites that the unit might be able to find based
on its viewing mask and almanac data. It also shows current ability to track this data. Note
that one GSV sentence only can provide data for up to 4 satellites and thus there may need
to be 3 sentences for the full information. It is reasonable for the GSV sentence to contain
more satellites than GGA might indicate since GSV may include satellites that are not used
as part of the solution. It is not a requirement that the GSV sentences all appear in
sequence. To avoid overloading the data bandwidth some receivers may place the various
sentences in totally different samples since each sentence identifies which one it is.
The field called SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio) in the NMEA standard is often referred to as
signal strength. SNR is an indirect but more useful value that raw signal strength. It can
range from 0 to 99 and has units of dB according to the NMEA standard, but the various
manufacturers send different ranges of numbers with different starting numbers so the
values themselves cannot necessarily be used to evaluate different units. The range of
working values in a given in the GSV string will usually show a difference of about 25 to 35
between the lowest and highest values, however 0 is a special case and may be shown on
satellites that are in view but not being tracked.
$GPGSV,2,1,08,01,40,083,46,02,17,308,41,12,07,344,39,14,22,228,45*75
Where:
GSV
2
1
08
01
40
083
46
*75
Satellites in view
Number of sentences for full data
sentence 1 of 2
Number of satellites in view
Satellite PRN number
Elevation, degrees
Azimuth, degrees
SNR - higher is better for up to 4 satellites per sentence
the checksum data, always begins with *
7. RMC
NMEA has its own version of essential gps pvt (position, velocity, time) data. It is called
RMC, The Recommended Minimum, which will look similar to:
$GPRMC,123519,A,4807.038,N,01131.000,E,022.4,084.4,230394,003.1,W*6A
Where:
RMC
123519
A
4807.038,N
01131.000,E
022.4
084.4
230394
003.1,W
*6A
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 140
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Note that, as of the 2.3 release of NMEA, there is a new field in the RMC sentence at the
end just prior to the checksum. For more information on this field
8. ZDA
The ZDA message is Date and Time.
$GPZDA,hhmmss.ss,dd,mm,yyyy,xx,yy*CC
ZDA Data Message defined:
hhmmss
dd,mm,yyy
xx
yy
*CC
HrMinSec(UTC)
Day,Month,Year
local zone hours -13..13
local zone minutes 0..59
checksum
9. GST
The GST message contains Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)
pseudorange error statistics.
$GPGST,hhmmss.ss,a.a,b.b,c.c,d.d,e.e,f.f,g.g *cc
GST Data Message defined:
hhmmss.ss
a.a
b.b
c.c
d.d
e.e
f.f
g.g
*cc
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 141
AB-V-MA-00505
User Manual
for
CyScan
POSITION REFERENCE SENSOR
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-613001-01MU
Unrestricted
CHANGE HISTORY
Rev.
Minor change
Author
Date
AO Austnes
05.06.2008
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-613001-01MU
Unrestricted
27/2/08
12:28 pm
Page 1
Operators
Guide
Document
4 Dominus Way
Meridian Business Park
Leicester
LE19 1RP
United Kingdom
This issue:
Date:
22/02/08
Date:
27/2/06
Changes:
Document : 94-0004-4
Previous issue: Operators Guide v3.6d
Table of Contents
Introduction
Navigation Basics
Welcome................................................................................................................... 3
Blanking Zones....................................................................................................... 16
System Overview...................................................................................................... 3
Getting Started
Screen Layout........................................................................................................... 7
Sensor Display....................................................................................................... 8
Navigation Section................................................................................................. 9
Status Bar.............................................................................................................. 9
Button Bar........................................................................................................... 10
CyScan
Operator 1
Navigation
Troubleshooting
Alarm Codes........................................................................................................... 40
Multi-Target Navigation........................................................................................ 27
Technical Notes
TargetsReflective Material................................................................................. 44
Support Information
Serial Numbers & Software Versions..................................................................... 32
Configuration Settings........................................................................................... 33
Index
CyScan
Operator 2
Introduction
Welcome
Welcome to the CyScan position reference system. CyScan is a high accuracy laser sensor
which provides positional information to allow automated approach and/or station keeping
relative to a structure or vessel. The structure or vessel requires one or more reflective
targets to be attached to its sides.
System Overview
CyScan emits eye-safe infra-red light and detects the reflections back from retro-reflective
targets. Targets are mounted on designated structures or vessels. They consist of strips of a
high performance reflective tape mounted on a flat or a cylindrical support.
The accurate range and bearing of one or more targets is measured by CyScan and used to
calculate the exact position of the CyScan vessel relative to the target structure or vessel.
This positional information is displayed on the console screen and automatically transmitted
to the vessels DP system.
XX
XX
XX
Structure or
Vessel
CyScan
Sensor
Reflective targets
PSU
Power
Console PC
Hardware
DP
System
CyScan
equipped
vessel
CyScan
Operator 3
Rotor
Scanner
Sensor unit
Base Plate
CyScan
Operator 4
Getting Started
This section covers the basics of using the CyScan system. It contains the following pages:
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
CyScan
Operator 5
Shut Down
1. Click on the CyScan button in the lower left corner of the screen
Note: This button is disabled while navigating or during manual logging. (See page 37).
3. T
he Console display screen will appear.
After a brief initialisation period the sensor will begin operation and its scanning results
will be displayed on screen.
2. Click on the down-arrow. Select one of the following options and click on the OK button.
XX
XX
XX
CyScan
SuspendPlaces the sensor into a sleep mode whereby the rotor ceases spinning and
the scanner tilt returns to a fixed state. However, upon command from the Console
application, the unit will return to full operation. This mode is suitable for use when
travelling between locations.
Suspend & ExitPlaces the sensor into the same sleep mode as the suspend command
(discussed above) and also closes the CyScan Console program.
Reset CommunicationsRe-initialises the communication links between the Console
computer and the CyScan sensor.
Operator 6
Screen Layout
The CyScan User Console screen has five key areas:
XX
The
Sensor Display(see page 8)
XX
XX
XX
XX
Navigation Section
The Navigation Section displays
positional data when the system is
in navigation mode. (See page 9).
Sensor Display
This circular area displays the
relative positions of the CyScan
vessel and any targets that have
been picked up by the sensor
(See page 6).
Property Tabs
The Alarms and Reflections tabs
are always displayed. (See page 11).
Additional tabs can be accessed by
clicking on the Sensor Operations
button.
Button Bar
A collection of nine buttons that
provide, or control, a range of
functions. (See page 10).
Status Bar
Provides important feedback information on various topics and displays
the date and time that the situation was first reported. (See page 9).
CyScan
Operator 7
Sensor Display
CyScan Vessel
The circular Sensor Display shows the relative positions of the CyScan vessel and any detected
reflections. Click on the Display Options button to configure which of the following elements
appear on the display. (See page 10).
Reflection
images
Tilt-direction
and tilt-angle
The CyScan vessel image can be displayed as either an outline or a solid filled shape, with a
distinct bow and stern. The vessel image may be switched off if required.
Depending upon the chosen display option, the centre of the Sensor display will either represent
the CyScan vessel, or the target origin of the current multi-target group.
(See Display Options on page 10).
Blanking Zone
The Blanking Zone is the segment within each revolution of the sensor rotor where the laser
is switched off. It is typically set to correspond with the area where the beam would strike
portions of its own vessel. The blanking zone can be adjusted to suit different situations.
(See Blanking Zones on page 16).
Range Circles
The Range Circles act as a visual guide to show the distance between the CyScan vessel and
the detected reflections. Distances are shown in in metres from the CyScan vessel.
Use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons on the Button Bar to change the scale of the display.
(See page 10).
XX
XX
XX
When the tilt-angle and tiltdirection are being adjusted manually, the outer arrow head follows
the cursor to apply the necessary offsets. (See Manually Tilting the Scanner on page 22).
Multi-Target
reference
frame
CyScan
vessel
Target Images
Range
circles
Reflections that have been picked up by the sensor are displayed as yellow squares. During
navigation, red or yellow boxes are drawn around reflections to show how they are associated
with the selected targets. A yellow box indicates strong association, whereas a red box
indicates poor or no association.
CyScan
Operator 8
Navigation Section
The upper right corner of the screen displays positional information while the system is
navigating.
Positional display
The status of the Scanner Tilt Mode (see page 21) and the DP Feed (see page 34).
Status Bar
Provides important feedback information on various topics and displays the date and time
that the situation was first reported. A flashing green icon indicates that communication
between the User Console and the CyScan sensor is OK.
Double click on the Time and Date portion of the status bar to set the current system date
and time. (See page 13).
DP Feed mode
Information
Quality Indicator
XX
XX
CyScan Button
For NMEA0183 DP feed types in single target operation, this display will show distances
along Bow and Starboard axes. Heading information is not available for single target
navigation.
For NMEA0183 DP feed types in multi-target operation, the range is displayed along
A and B axes determined by the multi-target group configuration, and Heading is
calculated relative to the axes origin, i.e. Target 1.
For ASCII17 DP feed types, Range and Bearing data are shown relative to the single
target or primary target (in multi-target target operation).
(See Positional Display Modes on page 18).
Click this button to view the Control dialog. From here you can select the following options:
XX
XX
XX
SuspendPlaces the sensor into a sleep mode whereby the rotor ceases spinning and the
scanner tilt returns to a fixed state. However, upon the resume command, the unit will
return to full operation.
Suspend & ExitShuts the Console software application but maintains power to the
sensor. Upon starting the application the unit will return to full operation. This mode is
suitable for use when travelling between mooring locations.
Reset CommunicationsRe-initialises the communication links between the Console
computer and the CyScan sensor.
Note: This button is disabled while navigating or during manual logging. (See page 37).
Help Button
Click this button to view the online CyScan User Console operators guide using
Acrobat Reader.
The colour of the bars and the display read-out also changes according to the quality of the
information. (See Navigational Information Quality on page 25).
CyScan
Operator 9
Button Bar
The Button Bar contains nine buttons providing the following range of functions.
When a function is not available, the button image is greyed-out.
XX
Stop Navigation
Zoom Out
Display
Options
Sensor
Operations
See below
See opposite
Cancel
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Start Navigation
Zoom In
Alarms
Apply
Click to zoom in
on the display
Click to apply
the current
changes.
XX
XX
XX
Multi-Target
GroupChoose between either Align, Create or Edit:
AlignAllows the Heading Axis to be rotated so that it aligns with true North.
This enables the reported position to be given in true Northings and Eastings.
(See Aligning Multi-Target Groups on page 30).
CreateUsed to create preset multi-target groups. (See page 28).
XX
Show Vessel ShapeDetermines how the CyScan vessel is represented on the sensor
display the options are: Off, Outline and Filled.
Click on the Sensor Operations button to view the following configuration options:
Display Options
XX
Show TiltDisplay/hide the arrow and angle label that indicate the current direction and
angle of tilt.
Sensor Operations
XX
XX
Show Blanking ZoneDisplay/hide the angular area within each rotor revolution where
the laser is switched off.
Note: Display Options are temporary and only apply to the current session.
XX
Set Blanking ZoneUsed to select the required blanking zone. (See page 16).
Show Bearing AxisDisplay/hide the tick marks around the outer circle of the sensor
display.
XX
Select Tilt ModeSelects the scanner tilt mode. (See page 21).
XX
Show
Range CirclesDisplay/hide the concentric distance circles of the sensor display.
Show LabelsDisplay/hide the the numbering of targets within a multi-target group under
navigation.
how ReflectionsDisplay/hide the markers representing the reflections received by the
S
CyScan sensor.
Show TargetsDisplay/hide the range and bearing vector, if selected, and the association
boxes that are superimposed on the reflection squares.
Set Manual TiltUsed to set a manual tilt angle and direction. For example, when stationkeeping close to a platform where the targets are mounted high and the CyScan sensor
must be made to look up for them.
Note: Scanner tilt presets are only possible when the tilt mode is set to Manual Tilt.
XX
XX
XX
CyScan
Operator 10
Alarms Tab
Reflections Tab
Alarm messages are classified into four types, in increasing order of severity:
Provides a numeric list of the reflections received during the last complete revolution of the
sensor rotor. This screen can be used to verify the graphical representation of reflections
shown within the Sensor display.
XX
Informationgrey symbols
XX
Warningorange symbols
XX
Errorred
symbols
XX
Fatalred
symbols
A filter is available to suppress the display of particular alarm types. As standard, the filter is
activated and grey information messages are hidden from the list.
The arrow symbol indicates the start of an entry that persists, while the square symbol
indicates the end of an entry. The pause symbol indicates an entry that does not persist.
Accepting alarms in the Current list moves them to the Historic list. (See page 14).
As a new revolution is started, the list is cleared and starts again. For each verified reflection
the list provides: Range, Bearing and Brightness values. The two sliders allow you to filter out
unwanted reflections that might adversely affect navigation.
(See Rejecting Unwanted Reflections on page 20).
Extra information is displayed on the Reflections Tab when the Extended Dialogs option is
selected on the Configuration tab. (See page 34).
Note: If an arrow is appended to a reflection entry, this indicates that the reflection may
be improved by tilting the sensor either upwards (up arrow) or downwards (down arrow).
Please refer to the Scanner tilt adjustment section on page 21.
Deleting alarms from the Historic list will delete them permanently.
CyScan
Operator 11
Night View
Day View
CyScan
Operator 12
1. Double-click on the time displayed on the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen.
2. The Date and Time Properties window is opened.
3. Set the correct date and time and click on the OK button.
When displayed the on-screen keyboard appears Always on Top of all other applications
this can be changed using its Settings menu.
2. Select an item within CyScan Console that requires text entry or editing.
3. Click on the necessary keys on the on-screen keyboard using your mouse.
CyScan
Operator 13
During operation, the CyScan system produces an event audit trail of system messages.
These range in increasing order of severity from: Information, Warning, and Error to Fatal.
As these alarms are received from the sensor, the console application lists them within the
Alarms tab on the property sheet.
Alarm types are colour coded:
Information -
(grey)
Warning -
(orange)
(red)
XX
The Current List displays new alarms (since the last start of the console software).
XX
The Historic List is used to store alarms that have been cleared from the current list.
The triangular and square symbols represent the start and stop points of each alarm.
When an alarm is raised, a start
Filtering Alarms
The alarm filter allows you to select the types of alarm that are displayed.
By default, only Warning, Error and Fatal alarms are displayed.
button.
Note: If you attempt to transfer any alarms that are still unresolved, a warning dialog
will be displayed.
1. Click on the Alarms tab on the Property sheet (in the lower right corner of the screen).
button.
button.
A drop down list will be displayed showing the four types of reports/alarms.
To delete one alarm click on the alarm entry and then on the
Alarm types that are ticked are displayed in the alarms list, un-ticked items are hidden.
button.
To delete two or more alarms hold down the Ctrl key, and
click on the required alarm entries and click on the
button.
To delete all alarms click on the
button.
A dialog will be displayed and will require confirmation for each deletion.
You can confirm each deletion individually, or click on the Yes to All button.
CyScan
Operator 14
Navigation Basics
This section explains how to set up the system prior to navigating.
It contains the following pages:
XX
XX
XX
XX
CyScan
Operator 15
Blanking Zones
The Blanking Zone is used to mask the segment of the scan rotation that is obscured by the
vessels superstructure. While the scanner passes through the blanking zone, the laser is
switched off to prevent any unwanted reflections from interfering with the target data.
(Even if the sensor has a clear 360 view, there must be a blanking zone of at least 90).
Generally, once the blanking zone has been set, it will not need to be changed. However,
there may be occasions when it is necessary to adjust the blanking zone, for example if the
target is on the opposite side of the vessel to normal.
Note: Changing the blanking zone whilst navigating will interrupt the data sent to
the DP system.
If the blanking zone is adjusted while navigating, the new values are applied only to
the active multi-target group. However, if the blanking zone is adjusted while out of
navigation mode, the new values are not applied to any existing multi-target groups
but instead form a new baseline setting.
XX
XX
Creating
a custom blanking zone (see page 17).
CyScan
Operator 16
CyScan
Operator 17
e
tS
ir s
gm
t
en
La
st
S
eg
m
en
t
click
The relative positions of the CyScan vessel and single or multiple targets can be expressed
either as Range and Bearing values, or in terms of the rectangular coordinate frame
appropriate to the selected type of navigation (single or multi-target) and DP feed messages.
Coordinate frame axes are only displayed if the DP feed is set to either NMEA0183P or
NMEA0183R. The display can be overridden to display Range and Bearing data, if required.
DP Mode
NMEA0183P (Primary)
NMEA0183R (Raw)
Navigation Type
Single Target
Multi-Target
In this mode the position of the sensor vessel is expressed in metres from the target along
Bow and Starboard axes which have their origin at the primary (or only) target.
The axes are parallel with the vessels own axes.
This mode is available for single target navigation, and for multi-target navigation where the
DP feed messages are of type NMEA0183P (primary).
Single Target
Multi-Target
A and B Axes
In this mode the position of the sensor vessel is expressed in metres from the target along A
and B axes which have their origin at the primary target.
The axes are initially aligned with the multi-target group, with the A axis passing through the
secondary target. However, if the multi-target group is subsequently aligned, the axes are
rotated such that the A axis remains as the baseline for the vessel heading.
Range and Bearing mode displays the distance and the bearing of the target from the
sensor vessel.
This mode is only available for multi-target navigation where the DP feed messages are of
type NMEA0183R (raw).
CyScan
Operator 18
Pulses
The Pulses column displays the number of laser pulses that have been received back from
each target in the following format:
USING/BAD/TOTAL
For example, if the pulses column was displaying 9/1/10, it would indicate that CyScan was
using 9 laser pulses for the position calculation, and had discarded 1 bad pulse out of a total
of 10.
In general, the larger the target the more pulses that will be returned.
This value will increase as the distance to the target reduces.
The following icons indicate that the scanner is operating correctly:
A black cross indicates that the reflection has been manually rejected using the
minimum Range and Brightness sliders. (See page 20).
Extended Reflection Data
A red icon indicates that the reflected pulse was too bright and has blinded the scanner.
Width
The Width column shows the horizontal width of each target, measured in degrees.
Rev#The total number of revolutions made by the scanner rotor since CyScan has been last
switched on.
The Signal A-lo, Signal B, and Signal C-hi columns can indicate that the scanner is pointing
too low or too high in relation to the detected reflections.
This can occur when the CyScan Vessel is working close to a rig and the targets are mounted
high above the scanner. (See Manually Tilting the Scanner on page 22).
Note: High readings in either the A or C sectors can also be caused by unwanted
reflections and do not always necessarily indicate that the scanner is pointing too low
or too high in relation to the intended target.
PulsesThe total number of pulses received during the last revolution of the scanner.
AmbientThe temperature inside the scanner unit.
(See Technical Note 4: Low Temperature Operation on page 48).
MarkerThe Marker displays the orientation of the scanner in relation to the vessel:
0 indicates that the scanner has been mounted with its connectors facing the bow.
180 indicates that the scanner has been mounted with its connectors facing the stern.
CyScan
Operator 19
The Range and Brightness sliders on the Reflections tab can be used to reject any unwanted
reflections that may be interfering with the CyScan system. For example, reflections from a
different vessel to the one you are keeping station with.
1. Click and drag the range and/or brightness sliders to the required threshold settings.
Once set, any reflections that do not meet the specified range or brightness values will be
marked in red on the scanner display, listed as a reject on the property page and omitted as a
navigation reference.
To hide rejected reflections on the Reflections tab,
tick the Suppress rejects from reflection list option.
CyScan
Operator 20
XX
XX
Zero TiltThe scanner tilt automatically maintains the rotor in a horizontal position by
compensating for the pitch and roll of the vessel.
Manual TiltThis mode is used when it is necessary to manually tilt the scanner to reach
the target. For example, when station-keeping close to a platform where the targets are
mounted high up and the CyScan sensor must be tilted up at them.
Auto Draught FollowThe scanner tilt automatically adjusts to compensate for draught
changes as the vessel loads or unloads.
20
2. Click on Select Tilt Mode and then choose the required scanner tilt option from the
sub-menu.
3. Click on the Apply Sensor Changes button
Beam spread
20
20
Note: When changing from Zero Tilt to Manual Tilt modes, you will be immediately
asked to select the required tilt bearing and angle of tilt.
(See Setting the Tilt Bearing and Angle on page 23).
8
8
Sensor tilt
20
Sensor tilt
CyScan
Operator 21
The amount of signal being received in each sector is displayed on the Reflections tab (when
the Extended Dialogs option is selected).
Generally, most of the signal should be in the middle Sector B. If the sensor is pointing too
low then most of the signal will be in Sector C. If the sensor is pointing too high, most of the
signal will be in Sector A.
Sector C
Sector B
Beam spread
Note: High readings in either the A or C sectors can also be caused by unwanted
reflections and do not always necessarily indicate that the scanner is pointing too low
or too high in relation to the intended target.
Sector A
CyScan
Operator 22
Note: If the tilt bearing and angle are adjusted while navigating, the new values are
applied only to the active multi-target group. However, if the tilt bearing and angle are
adjusted while out of navigation mode, the new values are not applied to any existing
multi-target groups but instead form a new baseline setting.
XX
Grey no tilt.
XX
When the tilt angle is correct, click the mouse button to fix the tilt angle.
5. Click on the Apply
CyScan
Operator 23
Navigation
This section explains how to select targets and navigate with them.
It contains the following pages:
XX
XX
XX
CyScan
Operator 24
CyScan
Operator 25
Tracking stability will be affected if the target reflection is lost temporarily, as there is no
redundancy.
XX
If the true target reflection is obscured by vessel operations there is a possibility that the
sensor track will jump to another reflection.
XX
Single target navigation can be started when the CyScan vessel is within range
of the platform or vessel, and a target is visible on the console sensor display.
1. Click on the
1. Click on the
button.
button.
2. Select either:
[Single Cylinder or Flat Target]
(if the vessel/platform targets are flat or cylindrical)
Or:
[Single Prism or Prism Cluster]
(if the vessel/platform targets are prism style).
Note: The most common targets are flat or cylindrical.
3. Select a reflection to use as a target by clicking on one of
the yellow squares shown on the sensor display.
After a short delay, the navigation data will be determined
and displayed.
Note: Only Range and Bearing or Bow and Starboard
values will be shown as single targets cannot provide
heading information.
CyScan
Operator 26
Multi-Target Navigation
During multi-target navigation CyScan uses between two and five retro-reflective targets.
Navigation using a preset group can be started when the CyScan vessel is within range of the
platform or vessel, and the groups reflections are visible on the console sensor display.
Multi-Target navigation has the following advantages when compared to using a single target:
1. Click on the
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
button.
2. Select the preset group that matches the rig that you
are approaching.
3. A
fter a short delay, the system will start to use the
preset reflections as targets and navigational data will
start to be sent to the DP system.
Note: When a multi-target group is selected for
navigation, the scanner tilt bearing and the blanking
zone defined for that multi-target group are applied.
A new temporary multi-target group can be created when the CyScan vessel is within range of
the platform or vessel, and two or more targets are visible on the console sensor display.
1. Click on the
1. Click on the
button.
Note: Once navigation stops, the baseline scanner tilt and blanking zone defined for
single target mode will be re-applied.
The first reflection that you click on will form the origin
point for the multi-target group. The positions of the other
reflections will be calculated relative to this origin point.
XX
If more than two reflections are used, select either the far
right or far left one as the origin.
button.
CyScan
Operator 27
A new multi-target group can be created when the CyScan vessel is within range of the
platform or vessel, and two or more targets are visible on the console sensor display.
Note: Navigation accuracy is improved when using multiple, asymmetrically spaced
targets. This helps CyScan to differentiate between targets with greater precision.
(Please refer to Technical Note 2, TargetsInstallation and Position on page 45).
If multiple targets are not spaced asymmetrically, it is better to operate
with fewer (eg. 2) targets. If more targets are mounted on the rig, then the superfluous
ones should be physically removed and not just omitted from the multi-target group.
If there are other targets in the vicinity that cannot be removed (i.e. on a neighbouring
rig) try to adjust the blanking zone to obscure them from view.
(See Blanking Zones on page 16).
Consider the following when selecting targets:
XX
Use the zoom in or zoom out buttons to select an appropriate view where you can see all
of the targets.
XX
The first target that you click on will form the origin point for the multi-target group. The
positions of the other targets will be calculated relative to this origin point.
XX
If more than two targets are used, select either the far right or far left one as the origin.
3. Within the sensor display, click on two or more yellow target images
(up to a maximum of five targets).
4. If required/available, up to three more targets can be selected in turn.
(See note above about the asymmetric spacing of targets).
5. When all required targets have been selected, (up to a maximum of five)
click on the Apply tick button.
(Continued on next page).
continued
CyScan
Operator 28
CyScan
Operator 29
CyScan
Operator 30
Support Information
This section contains the following pages:
XX
XX
XX
XX
CyScan
Operator 31
Product Labels
Component Part Numbers and individual Serial Numbers are assigned to each component of
CyScan. They can be found on product labels affixed to each unit.
The Configuration tab within the Property sheet provides version information about every
software component within the Console application and the CyScan Sensor.
CyScan sensor
part number
CyScan sensor
serial number
Software component
version information
CyScan PSU
part number
CyScan PSU
serial number
CyScan
Operator 32
Configuration Settings
The Configuration tab is used to display CyScan sensor data for troubleshooting purposes, and
to set the default display options.
Note: The default display options can be overridden by clicking on the Sensor Display
Options button. However, any overrides will only last for the current CyScan session.
XX
XX
XX
CyScan
Operator 33
Extended Dialogs
The DP Message string field displays the current text being sent to the DP system based on
the current selection of the DP Feed Format type
The Extended Dialogs option displays extra information in the Alarms and Reflections tabs.
(When the system is in Service Access (see page 35) or Engineer modes, extended dialogs are
displayed by default and the option is greyed-out).
The DP Feed Format option controls the format in which the positional information is packaged and sent to the vessels DP system. The DP Feed Format may only be changed when
CyScan is not navigating.
Note: Any changes to this setting MUST be carried out in conjunction with a similar
change on the DP system both systems must use exactly the same format.
The choice of DP Feed Format can have an effect on the information displayed in the
Navigation section (top right corner) of the console screen.
CyScan
Operator 34
Service access mode can be entered by plugging an engineer USB key into any available USB port on
the console computer prior to starting the application. It is recommended that the application be
re-started without the key in order to return to normal user mode.
3. Click on the Service Access button in the lower right corner of the About tab.
A dialog will be opened, displaying a Service request code:
4. Send the service request code to Guidance Navigation Limited
(cyscan@guidance.eu.com) or an authorised customer service representative.
Note: The service request code is constructed as two groups of six capital letters [A-Z]
separated by a + sign. There are never any numerals in a service access code.
5. A corresponding Service Access Code will be supplied to you. This code is nontransferable
and will operate only with current Console system for a limited period.
Note: The service access code is a 12 digit hexadecimal number [0-9, A-F].
6. Enter the received code into the Service access code field and click on the OK button.
Service access will be granted on this system for a maximum period of 12 hours, however,
the mode will be automatically ended after 20 minutes.
Click on the Service Access button to restart service access mode.
CyScan
Operator 35
CyScan
Operator 36
Logs are written to compressed folders that each contain approximately one hours data. The
folders are named according to the date and time period that they cover, and the type of
navigation that was being carried out. For example, logs recorded between 1 and 2 oclock
on the 4th February 2008 during multi-target navigation would be stored in a folder named:
Logs are stored in the C:\Program Files\CyScan directory and can be copied manually and
e-mailed to Guidance Limited (cyscan@guidance.eu.com) or your DP Supplier in the event
of a problem. Logs can also be copied automatically to a USB drive or memory-stick (see
below).
The Screen Shot option records every detail of the current screen and stores it as a bitmap
image. Screen shots can be analysed by a service engineer or e-mailed to Guidance Limited
in the same way as log files.
Screen shots are stored in the same directory as the log files (C:\Program Files\CyScan). They
are named according to the date and time that they were taken, for example:
4. Click on the time period that corresponds to the log files that you want to copy
(either All files from today, All files since yesterday, the Last 7 days files or the
Last 14 days files).
5. Click on Datalogs > Copy Log Files
to USB > USB DISK.
6. The light on your USB drive will
flash to show that files are being
copied.
When the light stops flashing, the
drive can be disconnected from the
PC.
4. Make a note of the name and location of the file and click on the OK button.
CyScan
Operator 37
Troubleshooting
If you experience problems when installing or using the CyScan system, please check through
this Troubleshooting section for a possible solution. It contains the following pages:
XX
XX
XX
Cleaning
the Sensor and Targets (page 40)
XX
CyScan
Fuse Information (page 41)
XX
CyScan
LED Indicators (page 42)
If your problem is not listed or you cannot resolve the issue, please contact the system
installer or equipment provider who are trained to assist with installation and operational
problems.
If the problem cannot be resolved by the system installer or equipment provider, please
contact Guidance Navigation Limited:
Contact Details
XX
Phone:
XX
Fax:
XX
E-mail:
cyscan@guidance.eu.com
CyScan
Operator 38
The User Console alerts the operator on loss of communications and offers to Reset
Communications. Click OK.
XX
XX
Ensure that the LEDs on the sensor unit only show the green LED flashing fast, the yellow
and red LED should be off. If this is not the case, power cycle the sensor and observe the
LED behaviour. (See page 42).
XX
Check on the data feed converter that it is powered (yellow LED on) and that the outer
transmit/receive lights are flashing once every couple of seconds (i.e. the user console
is trying to establish communications with the sensor unit). Under normal conditions
the outer LEDs should flash first followed by the inner two LEDs flashing in response (the
sensor unit answering with data).
XX
XX
Clean the CyScan sensor lenses. (See Cleaning the Sensor on page 40).
XX
Check that the Show Reflections option in Display Options is selected. (See page 10).
XX
XX
XX
Check that the blanking zone is not blocking targets from view.
XX
XX
XX
Check the LEDs on the system unit. Ensure that the red LED is not on. Otherwise there is a
hardware fault; power cycle the unit and observe LED behaviour.
XX
Check for ice build up between rotor and gearbox cover. Remove any ice which may be
present.
XX
Check that the red locking pins used in transit have been removed.
XX
XX
Check that the correct data format is selected for the DP system.
When switched on from cold at low temperatures the unit may rotate slowly for several
minutes before building up to normal speed of 1 rev per second.
CyScan
Check that the external supply voltage, supplied via the Power cable, to the sensor has
not dropped below 18V.
XX
Check for condensation or ice on the lenses of the sensor. Clean if necessary.
Operator 39
Alarm Codes
For the purpose of an audit trail, events of any nature are reported in the Console application
in the form of 4 different alarm types. These alarms only apply to the embedded navigator
and the interaction between the sensor unit and the Console user-interface.
To maintain the CyScan Sensor in good working order it is important that its optical elements
are kept free of contamination.
ErrorsCodes 3xxx
Signifies an unexpected event such as a missing parameter file or a lack of response from a
particular sub-system; these errors normally clear themselves after a while. If these errors
occur repeatedly in quick succession especially after restarting the system, then a serious
hardware problem might have occurred.
Use a lint-free cloth with IPA spray to carefully wipe the optical window.
WarningsCodes 4xxx
Signifies a possible error source; it will be followed by a relevant error message if the system
deteriorates, otherwise this will clear itself in due course. In general most warnings if they
are infrequent can be ignored.
InformationCodes 5xxx
Signifies purely an event, user initiated or automatic, for audit purposes.
CyScan
Operator 40
XX
On the Controller PCB within the CyScan sensor housing on the DC input
Fuse specification:
20mm
4A rating
Slow Blow
Fuse specification:
20mm
5A rating
Slow Blow
CyScan
Operator 41
Flashes once briefly when power is applied and should then be off for as
long as the yellow LED is on.
As soon as the yellow LED has turned off, it will toggle at one second
intervals as the scanner tilt circuitry initialises for about 30 seconds.
After the initialisation period, the Red indicator should switch off and stay
off. If at any point it stays on permanently then a hardware fault has been
detected.
Yellow
Red
Yellow
Green
Sensor diagnostic
Embedded PC status
Main status
Green Flashes once per second after power is applied and while the yellow led is on.
As soon as the yellow led switches off and the leveller initialises
(RED led toggles), the green led will begin to flash at 10 Hz intervals giving the
main system heartbeat. When the system is suspended it flashes briefly once a
second.
Shutdown/Suspend
Red
Red
CyScan
Toggling twice a secondAfter power has been applied, waiting for the PC to
initialise and the yellow LED to turn off.
Operator 42
Technical Notes
1. TargetsReflective Material (page 44)
2. TargetsInstallation and Position (page 45)
3. Vertical
Beam Divergence (page 47)
4. Low
Temperature Operation (page 48)
CyScan
Operator 43
Technical Note 1
TargetsReflective Material
CyScan has been designed to operate with good quality retro-reflective targets. There are
numerous manufacturers and types of reflective material available worldwide. These have
widely varying angular reflective specifications and are not all suitable for laser navigation
purposes.
Only one type of reflective material is recommended for use with CyScan. It is known as
Scotchlite Diamond Grade White 4090 and is manufactured by the 3M Company. It is widely
available as a tape or flexible sheet in a variety of sizes with an adhesive backing. The
material can be obtained through 3Ms international product distribution network as detailed
below.
3M trademarks are acknowledged.
Contact point
United States
United Kingdom
Canada
Japan
Germany
Italy
France
Hong Kong
3M Diamond Grade
White 4090
CyScan
Operator 44
Technical note 2
Flat Targets
Cylindrical Targets
Prism Targets
Cylindrical targets can be used up to approximately 300 metres. They can be hung over the
side of the structure/vessel and secured at either
end.
CyScan
Operator 45
Target Installation
Key to the operation of the CyScan system is the correct installation of targets. Please follow
the guidelines given below when installing targets on the structure/vessel.
Once the targets are installed, their relative positions can be automatically surveyed by the
system.
Installation Tips
XX
Targets should be placed in positions where the sensor can see them while the vessel is
within the expected working area. Consider vertical position as well as horizontal.
XX
lat targets should not be placed too far along the structure/vessel from the expected
F
working area as this can reduce the viewing angle for close operations.
XX
he sensor beam should not strike a flat target at an angle of more than 45 degrees to the
T
target surface.
XX
VI
ANEWAB
GLE LE
45
45
XX
o
XX
VI
ANEWAB
GLE LE
argets should be positioned with unequal spacing between them this helps the system
T
to distinguish between specific targets. For example, with a typical mooring distance
of 40-80m using three targets, suitable spacings between the targets would be 10m and
20m giving a total spread of 30m.
Targets should be placed no closer than 5m together. Ideally they should be placed 10m or
more apart.
CyScan
Operator 46
Technical note 3
Target
Range R
(Not to scale)
MK II
Range R (m)
Height h (m)
20
5.6
30
8.4
50
14.0
70
19.5
90
25.1
100
27.9
120
33.5
150
41.9
180
50.3
200
55.9
250
69.8
300
83.8
CyScan
Operator 47
Technical note 4
Operating Conditions
Technical Considerations
XX
XX
safety interlock prevents activation of the range-finder laser if the scanner head stops
A
or is prevented from rotating by ice build-up.
XX
iew of the retro-reflective targets will be obscured by a build-up of ice on either the
V
optical windows of the scanner or the surface of the targets (N.B. ice has poor reflective
properties at the infra-red frequency used by CyScan).
XX
For operation below 5C the sensor should remain powered and running
(i.e. not suspended). However, where this is not possible and it is necessary for the
system to be switched on at temperatures below 5C (and down to 25C) the sensor will
require some time to reach optimum operating condition.
XX
hen the system is not in use (i.e. un-powered or suspended) the sensor should be
W
protected by means of a suitable insulating and protective cover to prevent the external
build-up of ice.
XX
For operation below 25C additional forced air heating must be provided
Note: Not exhaust emissions as these contain particulates which will degrade the optics.
XX
he external PSU leads are rated for static operation to 40C but only to 5C for flexing
T
operation. The leads must therefore be adequately secured to prevent flexing and the
system should not be installed or de-installed at temperatures below 0C.
CyScan
Operator 48
VESSEL INTERFACE
Emitter Type
Classification
Beam Characteristics
Positional Accuracy
Range Resolution
Range Repeatability
Power Requirement
I/O
Data Formats
10cm
Connections
20cm
Diagnostics
Angular Resolution
Angular Repeatability
Operating System
PC / MS Windows XP Professional
Rotation
Software
Hardware Options
LEVELLING PLATFORM
Active Axis
Tilt Compensation
Sensors
56
ENVIRONMENTAL
Marine Certification
MECHANICAL
Operating Temperature
IP66 rated
EMC
CE certified
Enclosure
Dimensions
Weight
ca. 27kg
Documentation
Mounting
Warranty
Transport packaging
SUPPORT
continued
CyScan
Operator 49
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Simulator
10-0011-4
20-0030-0
31-0027-4
Retro-Reflective Targets
Flat 2m x 350cm
20-0031-0
20-0078-0
20-0075-1
CyScan
Operator 50
Index
Symbols
3M 44
A
A and B Axes 18
About
CyScan 10
Tab 35
Accept Alarms 14
Access Code 35
Accessories 50
Active Axis 49
Alarm Codes 40
Alarms
Accept 14
Clear 14
Export 14
Filter 14
Filtering 14
Tab 11
A Pos 18
Apply Changes 10
ASCII17 9
Auto Draught Follow 21
Contact Details 38
DP
3M 44
Guidance Navigation 38
Characteristics 49
Divergence 47
Bearing Axis 10
Blanking
Tab 16
Blanking Zone 8, 16
Create Custom 17
Custom 17
Select Preset 16
Set 10
Setting 16
Show 10
About 10
Button 9
Configuration 10
Console 3
Sensor Part Names 4
Vessel 8
Feed 9
ASCII17 9
NMEA0183 9
Drive Mechanism 49
E
E-mail 38
EMC 49
Emitter Type 49
Enclosure 49
Ending
Multi-Target Group Navigation 27
Single Target Navigation 26
C
Cables And Converters 50
Cancel Changes 10
Classification 49
Cleaning 40
Clear Alarms 14
Communication/Display Options 36
Compass Safe Distance 49
Configuration
Settings 33
Tab 33
Data Converter 3
Data Formats 49
Datalogs 10
Date and Time 13
Day View 10, 12, 33
Deleting Log Files 37
Diagnostics 49
Dimensions 49
Display
Centred On 10
Day/Night View 10
Extended Dialogs 34
Options 10
Vessel Bow 10
Documentation 49
Connections 49
Console 3
CyScan
Operator 51
F
Fax 38
Filtering Alarms 14
Flat Targets 26, 45
Fuse Information 41
G
General Settings 36
Getting Started 5
H
Hardware Options 49
Heading Axis 10
Help 9
Historic Alarm List 14
Mechanical 49
Memory Stick 37
Message String 33, 34
Minimum
Mounting 49
Multiple Target Spacing 46
Multi-Target Group 8, 10
Part Names
4
Part Number
Cylindrical Target 45
CyScan PSU 32
CyScan Sensor 32
Flat Target 45
Prism Target 45
Ending 27
Preset 27
Starting 27
Temporary Group 27
L
Labels 10, 32
LED Indicators 42
Levelling Platform 49
Logging 37
Copy Files to USB 37
Deleting Log Files 37
Starting 37
Stopping 37
M
Manually Tilting the Scanner 22
Manual Tilt 21
Set 10
Marine Certification 49
Marker 19
Maximum Tilt Speed 49
Range 20
Align 10, 30
Create 10
Creating 28
Name 29
Types 27
Keyboard 13
On-Screen Keyboard 13
Operating
Optional Accessories 50
Multi-Target Navigation 27
Conditions 48
System 49
Temperature 49
Brightness 20
Range 20
Phone 38
Positional
Accuracy 49
Data Display 7
Display Modes 18
Information Quality 25
N
Name
Power 19
Power Requirement 49
Power Supply Unit 3, 50
Preset Blanking Zones 16
Prism
Multi-target Group 29
Navigation 24
Basics 15
Ending
Multi-Target 27
Multi-Target 27
Section 7, 9
Single Target 26
Starting 10
Cluster 26
Targets 45
Multi-Target 27
Stop 10
CyScan
Operator 52
Circles 8, 10
Repeatability 49
Resolution 49
Reflections 19
Images 8
Rejecting 20
Show 10
Reflections Tab 11
Reflective Material 44
Reflective Tape 44
Rejecting Unwanted Reflections 20
Rejects 19
Reset Communications 6, 9
Retro-Reflective 3
Targets 50
Rev# 19
Rotation 49
Scanner Tilt
Controls 21
Modes 21
Screen Layout 7
Screen Shots 37
Select Tilt Mode 10
Sensor 3, 49
Display 7, 8
Operations 10
Part Names 4
Serial Number
CyScan PSU 32
CyScan Sensor 32
Service
Access Code 35
Access Mode 35
Configuration Settings 36
Request Code 35
Set
Blanking Zone 10
Manual Tilt 10
Tilt Angle 23
Tilt Bearing 23
Show
Bearing Axis 10
Blanking Zone 10
Heading Axis 10
Labels 10
Range Circles 10
Reflections 10
Targets 10
Tilt 10
Vessel Shape 10
Shut Down 6
Shutdown/Suspend 42
Signal A, B and C Levels 19
Signal A-lo 19
Signal B 19
Signal C-hi 19
Simulator 50
Single Cylinder or Flat Target 26
Single Prism or Prism Cluster 26
Single Target Navigation 26
Ending 26
Starting 26
Tab
About 35
Alarms 11
Blanking Zone 16
Configuration 33
Reflections 11
Software 49
Software versions 32
Spacing Multiple Targets 46
Specifications 49
Starboard Axes 18
Starting
Preset Multi-Target Group Navigation
27
Single Target Navigation 26
Temporary Multi-Target Group Navigation 27
Start Navigation 10
Start up 6
Startup Indication 42
Status Bar 7, 9
Status Bar Buttons 9
Stop Navigation 10
Sub-zero Temperatures 48
Support 49
Support Information 31
Suppress Rejects 20
Suspend 6, 9
System Date and Time 13
System Logging 37
System Specifications 49
Cylindrical 45
Flat 45
Images 8
Installation 45, 46
Installation Tips 46
Position 45
Prism 45
Reflective Matierial 44
Show 10
Spacing 46
Types 45
Technical Notes 43
Temperature 19, 48
Temporary Service Access Code 35
Tilt
Angle 8
Set 23
Bearing 23
Compensation 49
Controls 21
Direction 8
Mode 9, 21
Select 10
Show 10
CyScan
Operator 53
USB Drive 37
Using the Historic Alarm List 14
V
Vertical Beam Divergence 47
Vessel 8
Interface 49
Shape 10
W
Warranty 49
Water / Dust Protection 49
Wave Motion Compensation 49
Weight 49
Welcome 3
Width
Target 19
Z
Zero Tilt 21
Zoom In/Out 10
27/2/08
12:28 pm
Page 3
User Manual
for
7 kVA UPS
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-381001-01MU
Unrestricted
- BLANK PAGE -
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-381001-01MU
Unrestricted
www.mgeups.com
Comet EX 7 RT
Comet EX 11 RT
EXB
EX
11
RT
RT
ON
OFF
www
.mge
ups.com
s.com
D E R
V I
O
R
U N
I N
T E
R
.mgeup
T H E
www
34007558EN/AA
- Page 1
Introduction
Thank you for selecting an MGE UPS SYSTEMS product to protect your equipment.
The Comet EX RT range has been designed with the utmost care.
We recommend that you take the time to read this manual to take full advantage of the many features of your UPS.
Warning: this is a class A UPS product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which
case, the user may be required to take additional measures.
If the device must be installed in overvoltage category III or IV environments, additional upstream overvoltage protection
must be provided for.
To discover the entire range of MGE UPS SYSTEMS products and the options available for the Comet EX RT range,
we invite you to visit our web site at www.mgeups.com or contact your MGE UPS SYSTEMS representative.
Environmental protection
MGE UPS SYSTEMS cares about the environmental impact of its products and has therefore implemented an eco-design
process for the entire life cycle of the Comet EX RT product: design, usage and recycling.
Icons
Important instructions that must always be followed.
Visual indication.
Action.
Audible alarm.
In the illustrations on the following pages, the symbols below are used:
LED off.
LED on.
LED flashing.
Page 2 - 34007558EN/AA
Contents
1.
Presentation
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
2.
Installation
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
34007558EN/AA
- Page 3
Contents
3.
Operation
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.
3.5
3.6
Maintenance
4.1
4.2
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................... 31
Hot-swapping the power module .............................................................................................. 32
Disconnecting the power module .................................................................................................. 32
Reconnecting the power module .................................................................................................. 33
4.3
4.4
5.
Appendices
5.1
Page 4 - 34007558EN/AA
5.2
Glossary ....................................................................................................................................... 38
5.3
Index ............................................................................................................................................. 38
1. Presentation
1.1 Standard configurations
Tower configuration
Dimensions in mm/inches
(H x W x D)
Comet EX 7 RT
Comet EX 11 RT
Comet EXB 7 RT
Comet EXB 11 RT
Weight in kg/lbs
EXB
EX
11
RT
RT
ON
OFF
www
www
.mge
ups.c
om
.mge
ups.c
Comet EX 7 RT
22.5 / 49.6
Comet EX 11 RT
27.5 / 60.6
Comet EXB 7 RT
64.5 / 142
Comet EXB 11 RT
68.5 / 151
om
Battery module
(Comet EXB 7 RT / EXB 11 RT)
Power module
(Comet EX 7 RT / EX11 RT)
Rack configuration
Power module (Comet EX 7 RT / EX11 RT)
Dimensions in mm/inches
(H x W x D)
Comet EX 7 RT
Comet EX 11 RT
Comet EXB 7 RT
Comet EXB 11 RT
Weight in kg/lbs
1 RT
EX 1
Comet EX 7 RT
22.5 / 49.6
Comet EX 11 RT
27.5 / 60.6
Comet EXB 7 RT
64.5 / 142
Comet EXB 11 RT
68.5 / 151
ON
OFF
www.mg
eups.co
EXB
www.mg
eups.co
RT
Battery module
(Comet EXB 7 RT / EXB 11 RT)
34007558EN/AA
- Page 5
1. Presentation
1.2 Rear panels
Power module Comet EX 7 RT / EX 11 RT
1
1
2
3
4
5
7
NORMAL
BY
PASS
8
9
10
11
12
Page 6 - 34007558EN/AA
1. Presentation
1.3 Display and control panel
13
14
15
16
EX 11 RT
LOAD LEVEL
4 kW / 5 kVA
OFF
18
ON
19
20
21
1.4 Options
Rack mounting kits
Telescopic rails for Power module mounting in 19" enclosure with mounting hardware
(Part number 68001)
22 Ear hangup.
22
24
25 Input/Output box bracket system.
Telescopic rails for Battery module mounting in 19" enclosure with mounting hardware
(Part number 68002)
22 Ear hangup.
22
34007558EN/AA
- Page 7
1. Presentation
Transformer for galvanic isolation or earthing arrangement change
(Part number 68003)
This module is necessary either when a downstream neutral system from the UPS upstream is required, or when a
different power source connects the automatic bypass for higher availability.
EX
RT
www.m
Transform
geups.
er
com
AC Normal input
Page 8 - 34007558EN/AA
1. Presentation
Battery extensions for UPS backup times up to 60 minutes (at full load)
Comet EX RT offers a standard backup time of 5/7 minutes at full load.
To increase backup time, it is possible to connect Comet EXB 7 RT / EXB 11 RT modules to the UPSs.
Comet EX 7 RT
+ EXB 7 RT
/
Comet EX 11 RT
+ EXB 11 RT
7 kVA:
11 kVA:
Comet
EXB 7 RT
/
Comet
EXB 11 RT
7 min
5 min
Comet
EXB 7 RT
/
Comet
EXB 11 RT
20 min
14 min
32 min
22 min
Comet
EXB 7 RT
/
Comet
EXB 11 RT
Comet
EXB 7 RT
/
Comet
EXB 11 RT
45 min
30 min
Comet
EXB 7 RT
/
Comet
EXB 11 RT
57 min
42 min
70 min
53 min
CLA module (Long backup time charger) for backup times from 2 to 8 hours
(Part number 68004)
Very long backup times, from 2 to 8 hours at full load, require a Comet EX RT CLA module.
Comet EX 7 RT /
EX 11 RT
50A
~
Comet
EX RT CLA
2 heures
65 Ah
100 Ah
4 heures
130 Ah
200 Ah
8 heures
200 Ah
400 Ah
34007558EN/AA
- Page 9
1. Presentation
Modules integration system (Part number 68005)
RT
EXB
Transformer module
www.mgeu
ps.com
RT
EX 11
Power module
ON
OFF
www.mgeu
ps.com
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
Batteries modules
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
12
Battery circuit breaker with Remote Emergency Power OFF shunt trip.
Page 10 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
2.1 Unpacking and parts check
Power module
EX
11
RT
23
22
24
30
26
31
25
IP=
MAC=00E0D8FF855E
100
10
Reset
Card Settings
UPS
data
1 2
ON
RS232 Download
ETHERNET
RS232
66074
Battery module
EXB
RT
27
28
29
32
25
28 Battery cable.
24 Product documentation.
24
Packaging must be destroyed according to waste management standards. Recycling icons are displayed for easy
selection.
A dangerous voltage is present inside the power module and the battery module. Any operations to be carried out
on these modules must be done so by qualified staff.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 11
2. Installation
2.2 Installation in tower configuration
Use the tower stand template provided with the battery module.
2
2
1
1
EXB
EX
11
RT
RT
ON
OFF
www
www
.mge
ups.c
.mge
ups.c
om
om
3
3
4
4
4
4
Follow steps 1 to 4 to adjust the tower stands for the upright position.
Page 12 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
2.3 Installation in rack configuration
We recommend to mount the battery module first, then mount the power module above the battery module.
1 RT
EX 1
EX
11
OFF
RT
ON
www.mgeups.com
OFF
ON
om
www.m
EX
11
OFF
RT
ON
www.mgeups.com
geups.c
1 RT
EX 1
om
geups.c
www.m
ON
OFF
6
Battery module rack mounting (optional rails required, part number: 68002)
The battery module is very heavy. To ease its rack integration, we strongly recommend to remove the battery trays as
explained below:
2
RT
EXB
2
www.m
geups.c
om
x6
4
34007558EN/AA
- Page 13
2. Installation
6
Power or battery module rack mounting (optional rails required, part number: 68001)
Follow steps 1 to 4 for rack mounting the UPS onto the rails.
3
3
3
1
3
2
4
1
The rails and the necessary mounting hardware are supplied by MGE UPS SYSTEMS.
Note for step 1: it is possible to adjust the position of both front mounting ears.
Page 14 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
Rear bracket system (included with rail kits, part numbers 68001 and 68002)
To be used if you need to move the rack
enclosure with UPS already rack-mounted
inside.
2
2
Input/output junction box bracket system (included with power module rail kit, part number 68001)
This bracket will maintain the Input/Output box at the rear of the rack enclosure when hot-swapping the power module.
It will then be easier to slide the replacement module into the connectors of the Input/Output box.
4
4
3
34007558EN/AA
- Page 15
2. Installation
2.4 Communication ports
Comet EX RT provides 3 communication methods that can be used simultaneously:
The COM port provides RS232 communications using MGE UPS SYSTEMS SHUT protocol. Compatible with most power
management software applications available into the enclosed Solution Pac CD-Rom.
The output contact port is used for basic signaling or for protection of IT systems like IBM iSeries (formerly AS400) and
more.
The slot is compatible with any MGE UPS SYSTEMS communication card (check www.mgeups.com web site for the
complete list of compatible cards).
NORMAL
BY
PASS
4
9
n.o.
n.c.
3
8
n.o.
2
7
1
6
n.o.
n.o.
common
When the status is active, the contact between the common (Pin 5) and the relevant information pin is closed.
Page 16 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
Remote Power Off communication port
Used in conjunction with the optional EPO battery module, this port enables total isolation of all power sources connected
to the UPS in case of emergency (the cable is not provided).
RJ11
RJ11
654321
654321
5 V DC to 27 V DC
5 V DC to 27 V DC
Signal:
- activation voltage: 5 V DC to 27 V DC.
- current: 10 mA max.
Installation of communication cards (optional, standard with the Network Pack version)
Communication card.
IP=
MAC=00E0D8FF855E
100
10
Reset
Card Settings
UPS
data
1 2
ON
RS232 Download
RS232
ETHERNET
66074
NORMAL
BY
PASS
34007558EN/AA
- Page 17
2. Installation
2.5 Installation depending on the system earthing arrangement (SEA)
Comet EX UPS can only be connected to single phase and neutral distributed systems.
11
Bypass AC
Normal AC
10
load
Bypass AC
11
Isolation transformer
part number: 68003
10
load
load
load
Normal AC
or
Main lowvoltage
switchboard
(MLVS)
Bypass AC
11
10
Normal AC
Bypass AC
11
(*)
10
Normal AC
Bypass AC
11
(*)
10
load
Normal AC
Page 18 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
UPS with separate Normal and Bypass AC inputs, supplied by separate sources
Bypass AC
MLVS 1
11
MLVS 2
10
load
load
Normal AC
or
Bypass AC
MLVS 1
11
MLVS 2
10
Normal AC
11
MLVS 1
10
MLVS 2
load
Normal AC
11
10
load
Normal AC
Hot stand by
Configuration used to provide full redundancy (2N) to critical loads.
Main lowvoltage
switchboard
(MLVS)
Bypass AC
11
10
Normal AC
(*)
(see page 18)
11
Normal AC
10
load
34007558EN/AA
- Page 19
2. Installation
2.6 Required protective devices and cable cross-sections
Recommended upstream protection
UPS power
Upstream
rating
circuit-breaker
7 kVA
D curve - 40A
11 kVA
D curve - 63A
Note: see the simplified diagrams in the appendix for common or separate AC inputs, indicating the positions of the
protection devices, the characteristics of the internal UPS fuses and UPS line currents under overload conditions.
Downstream
rating
circuit breaker
7 kVA
Z curve - 10A
C curve - 4A
11 kVA
Z curve - 10A
C curve - 6A
Note: see the simplified diagrams in the appendix for common or separate AC inputs, indicating the positions of the
protection devices, the characteristics of the internal UPS fuses and UPS line currents under overload conditions.
Page 20 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
2.7 Connections of input/output power cables
This type of connection must be carried out by qualified electrical personnel.
Before carrying out any connection, check that the battery circuit breaker 12 and that the upstream protection devices
(Normal and Bypass AC sources) are open ("0").
Comet EX RT UPS always comes from factory with Normal and Bypass AC inputs already connected together, using a
bridge.
Use included insulated ferrules with stranded wires.
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
L2
N2
1
1
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
L2
N2
5
2 4
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
L2
N2
10
100
Reset
1 2
ON
IP=
MAC=00E0D8FF855E
RS232 Download
ETHERNET
UPS
data
Card Settings
66074
AL
NORM
34007558EN/AA
- Page 21
2. Installation
UPS with separate Normal and Bypass AC sources
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
N2
L2
2
1
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
L2
N2
7
4 6 8
3 5
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
N2
L2
9
9
10
10
100
Reset
1 2
ON
IP=
MAC=00E0D8FF855E
RS232 Download
ETHERNET
UPS
data
Card Settings
66074
Page 22 - 34007558EN/AA
AL
NORM
2. Installation
Frequency converter
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
N2
L2
2
1
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
N2
L2
4 6
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
3 5
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
N2
L2
7
7
8
AL
NORM
10
100
Reset
1 2
ON
IP=
MAC=00E0D8FF855E
RS232 Download
ETHERNET
UPS
data
Card Settings
66074
34007558EN/AA
- Page 23
2. Installation
Connection of battery cables
4
29
28
12
INPUT
N
L
OUTPUT
N
L
Transformer Input
Transformer Output
Output cable cross-section (not provided): 10 mm2, solid or stranded wire (maximum 13 mm2 or AWG 6).
Input cable cross-section (not provided): 10 mm2, solid or stranded wire (maximum 13 mm2 or AWG 6).
Page 24 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
Connection of CLA module
29
BATTERY
28
_
+
AC INPUT
N
L
To battery
AC Input
Connect the battery cable 28 (provided with the CLA module) between the power module and the CLA module.
Connect the cable 29 (provided with the CLA module) between the power module and the CLA module.
Connect the battery:
Cable cross-section (not provided): 10 mm2, solid or stranded wire (maximum 13 mm2 or AWG 6).
Use a circuit-breaker (curve B, 50 A) for cable protection.
Connect the input cable of the CLA module to the AC input:
AC input cable cross-section (not provided) : 2,5 mm2.
Use a circuit-breaker (curve C, 10 A) for cable protection.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 25
3. Operation
3.1 Initial start up
Check that the manual bypass switch 7 is on Normal position.
Set the normal AC source switch 9 to the "I" position.
Set the battery circuit breaker 12 to the "I" position.
15
The load is powered via the bypass AC source, but not protected
by the UPS.
Batteries are recharging, an eight-hour recharge period is
necessary to get full backup time.
LED 15 is ON.
PRESS ON
TO START UPS
OFF
ON
UPS personalisation
If specific settings are required, it is recommended to enter the UPS personnalisation mode at this stage.
It is possible to enter this mode through the front panel buttons or the Personal Solution-Pac software for Windows
included in the MGE UPS SYSTEMS Solution-Pac power management suite CD-ROM.
UPS SET UP
EXIT
ENT
OFF
ON
19
20
Local settings
Factory setting
Function
Options
Language
English
International format
(DD-MM-YYYY/HH:MM)
Date / time change
Time in France
MM-DD-YYYY/HH:MM adjustable.
Audible alarm
Quick beeps
Slow beeps.
Output features
Factory setting
Function
Comments
Options
Output voltage
230 Volts AC
200/208/220/240/250
Frequency converter
Disabled
Enabled
Output frequency
Auto ranging
50/60 Hz
Eco mode
Disabled
Enabled
See glossary.
Hot standby
Disabled
Enabled
Full redundancy
(See section 2.5 "Hot standby").
Operating mode
I/T Network
Industrial
(*)
Transfer on Bypass AC
(*)
source
inside tolerances
out of tolerances
Break time
10 ms
10 to 200 ms
Overload level
102%
50/70%
(*) : - Select "I/T Network" and "AC Bypass within tolerance" for computer loads.
- Select "Industrial" and "AC Bypass out of tolerance" in case of absolute need for service continuity (with potential
10 ms break).
Page 26 - 34007558EN/AA
3. Operation
ON/OFF features
Factory setting
Function
Options
Comments
Cold start
Disabled
Enabled
Start on battery.
Forced reboot
Enabled
Disabled
Automatic restart
Enabled
Disabled
Sleep mode
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Battery features
Function
Options
Factory setting
Battery test
Every week
20%
0 to 100%
From 65 to 400 Ah
modules connected
Battery deep discharge
Enabled
1% increment.
Requires Comet EX RT CLA if using options
(see section 1.4 "Battery extensions").
Disabled
protection
Comments
If disabled, lost of
MGE UPS SYSTEMS warranty.
During the restart, if the Bypass AC source is out of tolerance, the UPS will generate an output 10 ms calibrated
break.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 27
3. Operation
3.3 Operating modes
Normal (double conversion) mode
This is the standard operating mode, set by default in the factory.
Two possible choices.
13
ON
19
13
20
21
14
ECO mode
13
The main advantage of the Eco mode (see glossary) is that it reduces
the consumption of electrical power.
Three possible choices:
15
ECO MODE
4 kW / 5 kVA
OFF
ON
13
14
ON
OFF
Page 28 - 34007558EN/AA
ON
3. Operation
3.4 Operation on battery power
The load continues to be protected by the UPS when the Normal AC source is not available. Power is supplied by the
battery.
LED 13 is ON.
LED 14 is ON.
The audio alarm beeps every 10 seconds.
14
ON
LED 13 is ON.
LED 14 flashes.
The audio alarm beeps every 3 seconds.
14
BACKUP TIME
2 minutes
OFF
ON
14
15
ON
34007558EN/AA
- Page 29
3. Operation
3.6 Shut down
1 - Press the OFF button 18 more than 3 seconds.
15
LOAD LEVEL
4 kW / 5 kVA
OFF
18
ON
12
NORMAL
BY
PASS
Page 30 - 34007558EN/AA
4. Maintenance
4.1 Troubleshooting
If any of LEDs 15 or 16 is on, there is an operating anomaly or an alarm.
Use "scroll up" or "scroll down" function button to reset the audible alarm.
Signification
Indication
Led 15 is on,
BAD CONNECTION
REWIRE AC NORMAL
Load supplied by bypass AC source.
Led 15 is on,
Led 15 is on*,
Led 16 is on,
180 degree phase shift between bypass and Check if bypass source is correctly wired (in
normal AC source.
BYPASS REVERSE
REWIRE BYPASS
Indication
Correction
Internal fault
section 4.3).
on bypass AC source.
xxx FAULT
www.mgeups.com
Led 15 is on* and audible alarm is on.
the alphanumeric display shows:
BATTERY FAULT
Led 15 is on,
section 4.3).
SHUTDOWN
STATIC SW FAILED
Audible alarm is on, and the alphanumeric
display shows:
END OF WARRANTY
www.mgeups.com
Audible alarm is on, and the alphanumeric
display shows:
BATTERY CHECK
www.mgeups.com
34007558EN/AA
- Page 31
4. Maintenance
4.2 Hot-swapping the power module
This operation can be performed without interrupting the load.
15
XXX FAULT
1CXXXXXXX
OFF
ON
18
Tower configuration
Card
IP= =00E0D8
MAC
FF85
5E
10
100
ings
Sett
UPS
data
32
RS2
Reset
1 2
ON
d
nloa
32 Dow
RS2
66074
ET
ERN
ETH
29
28
BY
PASS
12
Rack configuration
Page 32 - 34007558EN/AA
4. Maintenance
Reconnecting the power module
13
15
LOAD LEVEL
4 kW / 5 kVA
OFF
ON
29
28
28
12
34007558EN/AA
- Page 33
4. Maintenance
4.4 Training Center
To allow you to use MGE UPS SYSTEMS products effectively and carry out basic maintenance, we offer a complete range
of technical training courses in English and French.
50 Hz Training Center:
MGE UPS SYSTEMS
140, Avenue Jean Kuntzmann
Zirst - Montbonnot St Martin
38334 - St Ismier Cedex - FRANCE
Tel: (33) (0)4 76 18 34 14
Fax: (33) (0)4 76 18 45 21
Email: training@mgeups.com
Internet : www.mgepowerlearning.com
On-line catalogue and registration.
60 Hz Training Center:
MGE UPS SYSTEMS
1660, Scenic Avenue
Costa Mesa, CA 92626, USA
Tel: (1) 714 557 1637
Fax: (1) 714 437 9072
Email: dpaul-pierre.marchand@mgeups.com
Internet : www.mgepowerlearning.com
Page 34 - 34007558EN/AA
5. Appendices
5.1 Technical specifications
Electrical characteristics
I/T network and industrial operating modes
Industrial mode
AC source in tolerance.
UPS returns to normal mode if overload released. return to normal mode if overload released.
The UPS shuts down and load is not transfered to Load is transfered to Bypass AC source with 10
Bypass AC source.
Bypass AC source in
tolerance.
circuit remains.
The load remains powered by the UPS. The UPS The load is transfered to Bypass AC source with 10
tolerance.
remains.
11
Upstream
circuit breaker
(not supplied)
Bypass AC
Normal AC
Input
fuse
Downstream
circuit breaker
(not supplied)
Output
fuse
10
8
Q1
Bypass AC
11
Upstream
circuit breaker
(not supplied)
Normal AC
Input
fuse
Downstream
circuit breaker
(not supplied)
Output
fuse
10
8
Q1
When sizing the upstream circuit breakers, the parameters presented below must be taken into account:
Line current values
UPS
Continuous current
Continuous current
power rating
nominal load
= 110 % limited to 2
minutes
7 kVA
23/33 A
37 A
63 A
63 A
11 kVA
38/54 A
60 A
80 A
80 A
Discrimination of upstream/downstream protections mentioned in paragraph 2.6 is achieved for a 30 m cable length and
10 mm2 cross section.
Circuit breaker capacity must be selected according to the installation, length and cross section of cables.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 35
5. Appendices
Time/current curves for UPS input and output fuses
t (s)
104
104
103
103
102
102
10
10
10- 1
10- 1
-2
-2
10
10
10- 3
10- 3
10- 4
t (s)
I (A)
10
102
103
10- 4
104
I (A)
10
102
103
Frequency
Voltage
Normal AC source
40 to 70 Hz
Bypass AC source
48 to 52 Hz**
Load output
50/60 Hz autoranging
possible values)
70%
U
120V 160V
Page 36 - 34007558EN/AA
280V
104
5. Appendices
Permissible UPS overloads as a function of time
P/Pn
1.5
1.25
1.1
1.02
0.5s
t
30s
60s
120s
Comet EX Transformer
Nominal power
Nominal current
11 kVA
63 A
160-280 Volts AC
Input voltage
Voltage drop
Frequency
Isolation (EN 61558-1-2-4)
Operating temperature
Max. operating rel. humidity
Derating / altitude
Dimensions HxWxD (tower)
Dimensions HxWxD (rack 3U)
Weight
Comet EX 7 RT
Comet EX 11 RT
Configuration for
2 hours backup time
Configuration for
4 hours backup time
Configuration for
8 hours backup time
5 hours
7 hours
12 hours
15 hours
20 hours
24 hours
Thermal characteristics
The operating temperature is 0 to 40C (8 hours at 45C), however optimum operation is within the +20 to +25C range.
Battery backup time is adversely affected by high and low temperatures. It is significantly reduced at temperatures under
10C. Above 25C, battery service life is cut in half every 10C. Above 40C, battery manufacturers no longer guarantee
operation due to the risk of thermal runaway.
Air enters through the front and exits through the back.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 37
5. Appendices
5.2 Glossary
Backup time
Bypass AC source
Source supplying the bypass line. The load can be transferred to the bypass line if an overload
occurs on the UPS output, for maintenance or in the event of a malfunction.
ECO mode
Operating mode by which the load is supplied directly by the AC source if it is within the
tolerances defined by the user. This mode reduces the consumption of electrical power.
Load
Manual bypass
Rotary switch controlled by the user, used to connect the loads directly to the AC source.
Transfer of the load to the manual bypass enables UPS maintenance without interrupting the
supply of power to the connected loads.
Relay contacts
UPS
5.3 Index
A
LEDs ................................................................................ 7
Long backup time charger (CLA) module ........................ 9
B
Battery ................................................... 6, 9, 13-14, 29, 33
Buttons ............................................................................. 7
C
Cable cross-sections ...................................................... 20
Circuit-breakers
Battery ...................................................................... 6
Input ......................................................................... 6
Upstream, downstream .......................................... 20
Communication card ................................................ 11, 17
Communication ports ................................................. 6, 16
Connections
Access ...................................................................... 9
AC inputs, output ............................................... 21-23
Auxiliary wires ................................................... 16-17
Battery .................................................................... 24
Communication card .............................................. 12
Isolation transformer ............................................... 24
Long backup time charger ...................................... 25
D
Dimensions ...................................................................... 5
Display ....................................................................... 7, 31
E
Emergency remote power OFF ....................... 6, 10, 16-17
Environmental .................................................................. 2
M
Manual By-pass ................................................... 6, 32, 33
O
Outputs contacts ............................................................ 16
P
Provided cables ............................................................. 11
R
Rotate switch (by-pass) ................................................... 6
S
Standards ......................................................................... 2
T
Terminals
AC inputs .................................................................. 6
AC output ................................................................. 6
Auxiliaries informations ...................................... 6, 16
Communication .................................................. 6, 16
Telescopic rails ................................................... 11, 14-15
Tower stands ............................................................ 11-12
W
Weight .............................................................................. 5
I
Isolation transformer ....................................... 7, 18-19, 24
Page 38 - 34007558EN/AA